DELIXI E Series User Manual

To Users
To Users
——Notices of Onsite Installation and Operation
Respectful User:
Thanks for your Option of E Series Frequency inverter manufactured by Delixi (Hangzhou) Inverter Co., Ltd. In
order that you can better use the product, please pay attention to the following:
1. After frequency inverter is installed and commissioned, fasten the components, especially connecting bolt of
the line, which shall cause fire accident due to heat at the connection if not fastened.
2. Design of installation on the site should be reasonable to maintain excellent ventilation.
3. In and out lines of the frequency inverter should not be connected reversely. Otherwise, it shall lead to
frequency inverter explosion.
4. Starting and stopping the motor directly by power-on and power-off the main circuit of the frequency inverter
shall cause frequent jumping faults to the frequency inverter.
5. When selecting frequency inverter type, configure the frequency inverter as per actual load power (load
working current). When there is heavy load, type selection can be magnified by 1 to 2 shifts. Smaller type shall
cause overcurrent or overload jumping faults to the frequency inverter.
6. Protection level of the frequency inverter is IP20, that is, it can prevent a foreign matter with a diameter of
12.5mm or greater from completely entering, without waterproof function.
7. Frequency inverter if stored for more than half a year should be powered with a voltage regulator to increase
voltage gradually. Otherwise, there is danger of electric shock and explosion.
8. If line connecting the frequency inverter to the motor exceeds 50m, it is required to add AC output inductor.
Otherwise, the frequency inverter and the motor are in danger of damage
In order that you can use the product safely for a long time, you need to carefully inspect the product, regularly
power off it to clean and maintain. For any trouble in process of inspection, please notify us by phone or mail. Our
service hotline is 0571-85243785. We shall send professional to your site as per your trouble to assist you in
solving the trouble and ensure the product is operated safely and reliably.
Foreword
Foreword
Chapter 1 Safety Operation and Notices............................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Examination and Acceptance....................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Precautions for safe operation:..................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Safety mark of frequency converter: ........................................................................................................... 2
Chapter 2 Product Information ............................................................................................................................. 4
2.1 Nameplate data and naming rule.................................................................................................................. 4
2.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................................................................................. 5
2.3 Product List .................................................................................................................................................. 9
2.4 Appearance and installation size ................................................................................................................ 17
2.5 Routine maintenance.................................................................................................................................. 25
Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter .............................................................................. 27
3.1 Option of the Site and Space for Installation ............................................................................................. 27
3.2 Wiring of the Peripherals and Optional parts............................................................................................. 28
3.3 Wiring of the main circuit .......................................................................................................................... 29
3.3.1 Wiring diagram for the main circuit and precautions ............................................................................. 29
3.3.2 Precautions for wiring the input side of the main circuit ........................................................................ 31
3.3.3 Precautions for wiring the output side of the main circuit ...................................................................... 32
3.3.4 Wiring and Supporting Peripherals for Main Circuits ............................................................................ 33
3.4 Connection of control circuit ..................................................................................................................... 36
3.4.1 Arrangement and connection of controlling circuit terminals ................................................................ 36
3.4.2 Function of control circuit terminal ........................................................................................................ 39
3.4.3 Wiring Instruction for Control Circuit .................................................................................................... 40
3.5 Grounding .................................................................................................................................................. 43
Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Running ....................................................................................................... 44
4.1 Option of operating mode .......................................................................................................................... 44
4.2 Test run and inspection .............................................................................................................................. 44
4.2.1 Precautions and inspection before test run.............................................................................................. 44
4.2.2 Test run ................................................................................................................................................... 44
4.2.3 Operating inspection ............................................................................................................................... 44
4.3 Operating method of keyboard. ................................................................................................................. 45
4.3.1 Keys on keyboard and their functions .................................................................................................... 45
4.3.2 Data Monitoring Mode ........................................................................................................................... 50
4.3.3 Use of Multi- Function Key JOG............................................................................................................ 50
4.3.4 Parameter check and set methods (using digital keyboard) .................................................................... 51
4.4 Function Code Display Mode .................................................................................................................... 52
Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters ............................................................................................................... 53
5.1 P0 Group - Basic Function......................................................................................................................... 54
5.2 Group P1 - Motor Control Parameter ........................................................................................................ 58
5.3 Group P2 - Input/Output Terminal Function .............................................................................................. 62
5.4 Group P3 - Programmable Function .......................................................................................................... 67
5.5 Group P4 - PID Control And Communication Control .............................................................................. 73
5.6 Group P5 - Keyboard Display.................................................................................................................... 75
5.7 Group P6 - Fault Display and Protection ................................................................................................... 78
5.8 Group P7 - User Function Customization .................................................................................................. 82
5.9 Group P8 - Manufacturer Function ............................................................................................................ 83
5.10 Group P9 - Monitoring Parameter ........................................................................................................... 84
Chapter 6. Description of Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 86
6.1 Group 0 - Basic Function ........................................................................................................................... 86
6.2 Group P1 - Motor Control Parameter ........................................................................................................ 98
6.3 Group P2 - Input/Output Terminal Function ............................................................................................. 111
6.4 Group P3 - Programmable Function ........................................................................................................ 129
6.5 GROUP P4 PID CONTROL AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL ................................................... 138
6.6 Group P5 Keyboard Display .................................................................................................................... 143
6.7 Fault Display and Protection Control Group P6 ...................................................................................... 148
6.8 Group P7 User Function Customization .................................................................................................. 154
6.9 Group P8 Manufacturer Function ............................................................................................................ 155
6.10 Group P9 Monitoring Parameter ............................................................................................................ 157
IV
Foreword
Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case............................................................................................. 159
7.1 Common Function ................................................................................................................................... 159
7.1.1 Start and Stop Control ........................................................................................................................... 159
7.1.2 Start and Stop Mode.............................................................................................................................. 161
7.1.3 Acceleration and Deceleration Mode .................................................................................................... 163
7.1.4 Jogging Function .................................................................................................................................. 163
7.1.5 Running Frequency Control.................................................................................................................. 164
7.1.6 Multi-speed Function ............................................................................................................................ 165
7.1.7 Simple PLC ........................................................................................................................................... 165
7.1.8 Timing Function.................................................................................................................................... 166
7.1.9 Fixed-length Function ........................................................................................................................... 167
7.1.10 Counting Function .............................................................................................................................. 168
7.1.11 Distance Control Function .................................................................................................................. 169
7.1.12 Simple Internal Relay Programmable Function .................................................................................. 170
7.1.13 Internal Timer Function ...................................................................................................................... 173
7.1.14 Internal Operation Module Function................................................................................................... 174
7.1.15 PID FUNCTION ................................................................................................................................. 177
7.1.16 Wobbulating Function ......................................................................................................................... 177
7.1.17 Analog Input/Output Use .................................................................................................................... 179
7.1.18 Digital Input/Output Use..................................................................................................................... 180
7.1.19 Communication of Upper Computer................................................................................................... 181
7.1.20 Parameter Identification ...................................................................................................................... 182
7.2 Application Cases .................................................................................................................................... 184
7.2.1 Switching function of dual-pump ......................................................................................................... 184
7.2.2 PID control for Water Supply at Permanent Pressure ........................................................................... 185
7.2.3 Ball mill ................................................................................................................................................ 189
7.2.4 Injection Molding Machine .................................................................................................................. 192
7.2.5 Local/ Remote Control.......................................................................................................................... 195
Chapter 8 E Series Frequency Inverter RS-485 Communication ......................................................................... 196
9.1 Frequency inverter Fault and Exclusion Measure.................................................................................... 204
9.2 Motor Fault and Exclusion Measure ........................................................................................................ 209
Appendix 1 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Methods ................................................................................. 210
A2.1 Alternative Current Reactor (ACL) ............................................................................................................. 212
A2.2 DC reactor .................................................................................................................................................... 213
A2.3 Radio noise filter .......................................................................................................................................... 213
A2.4 Remote Operation Keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 213
A2.5 Energy Consumption Brake Unit and Brake Resistance .............................................................................. 214
Appendix 3 E180 I/O Expansion Card ................................................................................................................. 218
Appendix 4 E180 Encoder Expansion Card ......................................................................................................... 220
Appendix 5 Expansion Card of RS485 Communication ...................................................................................... 222
Appendix 6 Expansion Card of E180 Injection Molding Machine ...................................................................... 223
Appendix 7 E180-DP Expansion Card ................................................................................................................. 224
Appendix 8 E180-WSP Expansion Card .............................................................................................................. 227
Foreword
Foreword
Thank you for choosing E Series Frequency inverter manufactured by Delixi (Hangzhou) Inverter Co., Ltd. It
includes CDI-E100 Series, E102 Series and CDI-E180 Series.
Before using it, please read this manual carefully so as to guarantee correct operation. Erroneous operation
might result in malfunction, faults or shortened life span of the equipment, or even personal injury. Therefore,
users are advised to read carefully this manual and abide by it during operation. The manual is a standard attached
document. Please keep it for maintenance and repair in the future.
Aside from operation instructions, this manual also presents some wiring diagrams for your reference. If you
have any difficulty or special demands for using the frequency inverter, please contact our offices or distributors.
You may also contact the customer service centre of our head office for our quality service. The manual noted that
its content might change without further notice.
Please confirm following content during unpackaging:
1. If the product is damaged during process of transportation, if parts are damaged and dropped, or if main
body is bruised.
2. If rated value marked on nameplate is consistent with your order requirement, or if there are ordered
Unit, acceptance certificate, operation manual and guarantee shed in package.
The Company strictly complies with quality system during production and packaging, for any inspection
miss, please contact our Company or supplier for settlement.
People should not reprint,

transmit, and use the manual or
content relating to it without
written permission of the
Company, who will assume legal
responsibility for damage caused
in violation of the item.
VI
Chapter 1 Safety Operation and Notices

Please read the manual carefully before install, operate, maintain or check E Series Frequency inverter.
To protect yourself, the equipment, and the property from any possible harm, please do read this chapter
before using our E Series Frequency inverters. Precautions relevant to operation safety are categorized as
“Warning” and “attention”.
: Potentially dangerous condition, which maybe cause severe body injuries or dead if
relevant requirement is ignored.
Warning
: Potentially dangerous condition, which maybe cause middle, light injuries or device
Attention damage if relevant requirement is ignored, it also applies to unsafe operation.
1.1 Examination and Acceptance

Items to be examined are as follows:
Items Note
1. Does the model conform to your order? Check the Model indicated on the nameplate on one side
of the frequency inverter.
2. Is there any damage to the components? Survey the external appearance of the frequency inverter
and make sure that no damage has occurred during
transportation
Remove the front cover and examine all visible
3. Are the components properly fastened?
components with appropriate tools.
4. Do you have the user’s manual, the quality Check for the user’s manual, the quality certificate and the
certificate and the warranty claims form? warranty claims form
If any of the above items is problematic, please contact us or our distributors.
1
1.2 Precautions for safe operation:

1. Installation and maintenance should be performed by professional only.
2. Verify that rated voltage of the frequency inverter should conform with voltage level of AC
power supply. Otherwise it shall cause hurt to human body or fire accident.
3. Do not make supply power of AC loop connect with outputting terminal U, V and W.
The connection will damage converser, thus guarantee card should be nonserviceable.
4. Only connect it to input power supply after the panel is well installed. Do not remove the
Warning external lid when it is powered; otherwise it may cause electric shock.
5. Forbid touching high voltage terminal inside the frequency inverter when it is powered on;
otherwise, there is danger of electric shock.
6. Because there is an amount of capacitance stored electric energy inside the frequency inverter,
maintenance should be implemented at least 10 minutes after the power is off. At this time,
charging indicator should be off thoroughly or positive or negative Bus line voltage is confirmed
to be below 36V; otherwise there is danger of electric shock.
7. Do not turn on or off line and connector when the circuit is powered on; otherwise it can cause
hurt to human body.
8. Electric elements can be easily damaged by static electricity. Do not touch electric elements.
9. This frequency inverter should not undergo voltage withstand test, which might result in
damages to the semiconductor devices in it.
10. Before switching on the power supply, please put the cover board in position. Otherwise,
electric shock or explosion might occur.
11. Never confuse the input terminals. Otherwise, explosion or damage to the property might
occur.
12. For frequency inverter of which storage period exceeds half year, please increase the input
voltage gradually by using regulator, to prevent from electric shock and explosion.
13. Do not operate the frequency inverter with wet hand; otherwise, there is danger of electric
shock.
Electro Static 14. All parts should be replaced by professional only. It is strictly prohibitive to remain stub or
Discharge metal object in machine, to prevent from fire.
(ESD) 15. After replaced control board, please perform relevant parameter setting before operation to
prevent from damage of materials.
2
Chapter1 Saftey Operation and Notices
1. If the motor is used for the first time or has been in leisure for a long time, remember to
check its insulation first. It is advisable to use a 500V megger. Make sure the insulation
resistance should not be less than 5 MΩ..
2. If you need to operate the frequency inverter at frequencies beyond 50Hz, please consider
the support capability of the mechanical devices.
Attention 3. The output at certain frequencies might encounter the resonance points of load devices. This
can be avoided by resetting the jump frequency parameter of the frequency inverter.
4. Do not use three-phase frequency inverters as two-phase ones. Otherwise, fault or damage
might occur.
5. In regions at an altitude of more than 1000 meters, the heat dissipation capability of the
frequency inverter might be compromised because of the thin air. Therefore, de-rated
operation will be necessary. In such cases, please contact us for technical advice.
6. The standard matched motor is a four-pole squirrel-cage asynchronous machine. In case of
discrepancy, please choose appropriate frequency inverters in accordance with the rated
current of the motor.
7. Do not start or stop the frequency inverter with contactors. Otherwise, damage might occur
to the equipment.
8. Do not modify factory set value of frequency inverter without authorization, or damage
might be caused.
1.3 Safety mark of frequency converter:
Make sure to follow the warning marks which are pasted at the following position of the frequency converter.
●Make sure to read the Manual prior to installation and running to avoid an electric shock!
●Do NOT dismantle the cover plate when power is on or within 15min when power is cut off!
●Do NOT perform maintenance, inspection and wiring until the power supply at input/output side is cut off
for over 15min and power indicator becomes off completely!
3
Chapter 2 Product Information

2.1 Nameplate data and naming rule
Nameplate data: for example CDI-E180G011/P015T4BL:
Model：CDI-E180G011/P015T4BL
Input：AC 3PH 380±15% 50/60Hz
Output：AC 3PH 0～380V 0～3200Hz 25/32A
Hardware Version：1.1.00 Software Version：1.12
E180G011/P015T4BL13F000001
CDI E180 G011/P015 T4 B L
Frequency inverter
Product Series No.

E100 Series No: No Built-in DC Reactor
E102 Series L: Bui lt-in DC Reactor
E180 Series
Product Type No: No Built-in Brake Unit

G: General type B: Bui lt-in Brake Unit
P: Light load type

Voltage Level (Rated Voltage)
1R5：1.5kW S2: One-phase 220V, 50/60Hz
011：11kW T2: Three-phase 220V, 50/60Hz
T4: Three-phase 380V, 50/60Hz
T6: Three-phase 690V, 50/60Hz
4
2.2 Technical Specifications

Item Specification
V/F Control
Control mode Open-loop Vector Control (SVC)
Closed-loop Vector Control (VC)( Invalid CDI-E100 Series)
Frequency Digital: 0.02%
Resolution Analog: 0.1%
V/F curve Linear, square root, random V/F
Overload G Model: 60s for 150% of the rated current; 3s for 180% of the rated current;
Capability P Model: 60s for 120% of the rated current; 3s for 150% of the rated current;
Start G Model: 0.5Hz/150% (SVC); 0Hz/180% (VC)
Control
Torque P Model: 0.5Hz/100%
Speed Regulation
1:100（SVC） 1:1000（VC）
Range
Stable Speed
±0.5%（SVC） ±0.02%（VC）
Accuracy
Torque Control
±5%（VC）
Accuracy
Torque
Manual torque compensation (0.1%~30.0%), automatic torque compensation
Compensation
Control E100 Max. Output Current 300mA with current-limiting protection
power E102 Max. Output Current 300mA without current-limiting protection
supply
E180 Max. Output Current 300mA with current-limiting protection
P24V
6-way Digital Input Terminal (DI1~DI6), in which D16 can access to high-speed
Impulse Input (both built-in and external power supply are available).
E100 2-way Analog Input Terminal (VF1, VF2), which can be used as voltage
(0V~10V) or current (0/4mA~20mA) input. It can be used as Digital Input
Terminal through reference.
5-way Digital Input Terminal (DI1~DI6), in which D16 can access to high-speed
Impulse Input (only internal power supply is available)
Configuration
E102 2-way Analog Input Terminal (VF1, VF2), which can be used as voltage
Input (0V~10V) or current (0/4mA~20mA) input. It can be used as Digital Input
Terminal Terminal through reference.
6-way Digital Input Terminal (DI1~DI6),in which DI6 can access to high-speed
Impulse Input. Through external I/O expansion card, it can be expanded to
4-way(DI7~DI10).
2-way Analog Input Terminal (VF1, VF2), which can be used as voltage
E180 (0V~10V) or current (0/4mA~20mA) input. It can be used as Digital Input
Terminal through setting
NOTE: Both internal power supply and external power supply can be used
for DI1～DI6, only internal power supply can be used for DI7～DI10.
5
Item Specification
2-way Analog Input Terminal (FM1, FM2), which can not only be used as output
voltage (0V~10V),but output current (0mA~20mA)
1-way open collector output (YO), DC 48V 50Ma below
E100 1-way Impulse output (FMP), Frequency Range between 0.01kHz~100.00kHz
2-way Relay Output (T1, T2), DC 30V/3A below and AC 250V/3A below
Note: YO and FMP are common YO/FMP terminal, but only one can be used
at the same time.
1-way Analog Input Terminal FM1, which can not only be used as output voltage
Output E102 (0V~10V),but output current (0mA~20mA).
Configuration
Terminal 1-way Relay Output T1, DC 30V/3A below and AC 250V/3A below
2-way Analog Input Terminal (FM1, FM2), which can not only be used as output
voltage (0V~10V),but output current (0mA~20mA)
1-way open collector output (YO), DC 48V 50Ma below. Additional 2-way open
collector output (YO1, YO2) can be added through external IO expansion card.
E180
1-way Impulse output (FMP), Frequency Range between 0.01kHz~100.00kHz
2-way Relay Output (T1, T2), DC 30V/3A below w and AC 250V/3A below
Note: YO and FMP are common YO/FMP terminal, but only one can be used
at the same time.
Operating
Keyboard, terminal, RS485 communication
mode
14 kinds of main frequency sources and 14 kinds of auxiliary sources. Adopt
Frequency various combination modes to switch. Diversification to Each Frequency Source
Source Input Mode: keyboard potentiometer, external analog, digital reference, impulse
reference, Multiplex Directive, simple PLC, communication, arithmetic results, etc.
14 kinds of Torque Sources, including digital reference, external analog, impulse
Torque Source
reference, Multiplex Directive, communication, arithmetic results, etc.
Acceleration
and Four groups of straight lines (select the terminal to switch through acceleration and
Deceleration deceleration time), S Curve 1 and S Curve 2
Time
Emergency
Interrupt output of frequency inverter.
stop
Running
Multiplex 16 speed is allowable to set at most and use various combination of multiplex
Speed directive terminal to switch
Simple PLC Continuously run 16-phase speed and independently set acceleration and
Function deceleration time and running time
Independently set Jogging frequency and jogging acceleration and deceleration
Jogging
time, additionally, set the unit under running state and confirm whether the jogging
Control
is preferential
Rotating
Speed Frequency inverter starts operation by tracking the load speed
Tracking
Fixed-length
and
Realize fixed-length and fixed-distance control function through Impulse Input
Fixed-distance
Control
6
Item Specification
Control mode Realize counting function through Impulse Input
Wobbulating
Apply for textile winding equipment
Function
Built-in PID Realize process control closed loop system
AVR
When the gird voltage fluctuates, ensure constant output
Function
DC Braking Realize fast and stable shut-down
Slip
Compensate the speed deviation caused by the increase of load
Compensation
Hopping
Prevent resonance from occurring with load
Frequency
Sagged
Balance the load of multiple motors with same load
Function
Running
Timing Be able to realize automatic shutdown of the frequency inverter when reaching
Control given time
Realize simple logic Programming to multi-functional output terminal function
Built-in
and digital input terminal signal, the logic results can not only be equivalent to
Virtual Delay
digital input terminal function, but can be output through multi-functional terminal
Relay
output
Build in 2 timers and acquire the timing input signal to realize timing signal
Built-in Timer
output. Use alone or in combination
Operation
Module
One built-in 4-way Operation Module to realize simple addition, subtraction,
Built-in
multiplication and division, size judgment and integral operation
Operation
Module
The control panel is directly equipped with RS485 Communication Interface and
E100
supports Standard MODBUS Protocol
The control panel is not equipped with built-in RS485 Communication Interface,
E102 so external communication expansion card is required. It supports Standard
Communication
MODBUS Protocol (External Connection of E102-485 Expansion Card)
The control panel is not equipped with built-in RS485 Communication Interface,
E180 so external communication expansion card is required. It supports Standard
MODBUS Protocol (External Connection of E180-485 Expansion Card)
Be able to connect the encoder through Terminal DI5 & DI6 on control panel,
such an encoder connection method can realize simple closed-loop control
E100
through PID Control and used for occasions without high requirements to control
accuracy.
E102 Only connect to 1-way pulse signal of encoder (DI6)
Encoder
The control panel is not equipped with encoder interface, so external encoder
expansion card is required. It supports ABZ Incremental Encoder, UVW
E180 Incremental Encoder and Rotary Transformer. This encoder connection method
can realize high-performance closed-loop vector control and be used for occasions
with high requirements to control accuracy.
E100 Not only be equipped with asynchronous motor, but synchronous motor
Type of Motor E102 Not only be equipped with asynchronous motor, but synchronous motor
E180 Not only be equipped with asynchronous motor, but synchronous motor
7
Item Specification
Running Given frequency, output current, output voltage, Bus line voltage, input signal, feedback
informati value, module temperature, output frequency, motor synchronous speed, etc.
on Through >> Key, display 32 loops at most
Display
Error Save the historical information of 3 faults under running state of fault protection. Every
informati piece of fault information includes frequency, current, Bus line voltage and input/output
on terminal status when fault happens.
Frequenc
y
Overcurrent, overvoltage, module fault protection, undervoltage, overload, external
inverter
fault protection, EEPROM fault protection, ground protection, default phase,etc.
protectio
n
Frequenc
Protection y
Locked protection, overload alarm
inverter
alarm
Instantan
eous Lower than 15 ms: Continuous operation
power-of Bigger than 15 ms: Automatic restart is allowable
f
Ambient
temperat -10℃~40℃
ure
Storage
temperat -20℃~65℃
ure
Environment Ambient
90 % RH in max .(no dewing)
humidity
Height/v
Below 1,000 m, below 5.9m/sec²(=0.6g)
ibration
Applicati
on No corrosive gas, inflammable gas, oil mist, dust and others
position
Cooling Air-blast cooling
8
2.3 Product List
One. E100 Series
(1) Type list
Matchable
Rated capacity Rated input current Rated output current
Frequency inverter type Motor
(KVA) (A) (A)
(kW)
S2 (Single-phase 220V, 50/60Hz) (Built-in Brake Unit)
CDI-E100G0R4S2B 0.8 5.0 2.3 0.4
CDI-E100G0R75S2B 1.5 9 4.0 0.75
CDI-E100G1R5S2B 2.7 15.7 7.0 1.5
CDI-E100G2R2S2B 3.8 27 10.0 2.2
T2 (Three-phase 220V, 50/60Hz) (Built-in Brake Unit)
CDI-E100G0R4T2B 0.8 2.6 2.3 0.4
CDI-E100G0R75T2B 1.5 6 4.0 0.75
CDI-E100G1R5T2B 2.7 8.8 7.0 1.5
CDI-E100G2R2T2B 3.8 12.5 10.0 2.2
T4 (Three-phase 380V, 50/60Hz) （15kW and below the standard built-in brake unit）
CDI-E100G0R75T4B 1.5 4.4 3.0 0.75
CDI-E100G1R5T4B 3.0 6.0 4.5 1.5
CDI-E100G2R2T4B 4.0 6.8 6.0 2.2
CDI-E100G3R7T4B 5.9 11 9.5 3.7
CDI-E100G5R5/P7R5T4B 8.5/11 15.5/20.5 13/17 5.5/7.5
CDI-E100G7R5/P011T4B 11/17 20.5/26 17/25 7.5/11
CDI-E100G011/P015T4BL 17/21 26/35 25/32 11/15
CDI-E100G015/P018.5T4BL 21/24 35/38.5 32/37 15/18.5
CDI-E100G018.5/P022T4 24/30 38.5/46.5 37/45 18.5/22
CDI-E100G022/P030T4 30/40 46.5/62 45/60 22/30
CDI-E100G030/P037T4 40/50 62/76 60/75 30/37
CDI-E100G037/P045T4 50/60 76/92 75/90 37/45
CDI-E100G045/P055T4 60/72 92/113 90/110 45/55
CDI-E100G055/P075T4 72/100 113/157 110/152 55/75
CDI-E100G075/P093T4 100/116 157/180 152/176 75/93
CDI-E100G093/P110T4 116/138 180/214 176/210 93/110
CDI-E100G110/P132T4 138/167 214/256 210/253 110/132
CDI-E100G132/P160T4 167/200 256/305 253/300 132/160
CDI-E100G160/P185T4 200/224 305/344 300/340 160/185
CDI-E100G185/P200T4 224/250 344/383 340/380 182/200
CDI-E100G200/P220T4L 250/276 383/425 380/420 200/220
CDI-E100G220T4L 276 425 420 220
CDI-E100P250T4L 316 484 480 250
CDI-E100G250/P280T4L 316/355 484/543 480/540 250/280
CDI-E100G280/P315T4L 355/395 543/605 540/600 280/315
CDI-E100G315/P355T4L 395/467 605/714 600/680 315/355
CDI-E100G355/P375T4L 447/467 683/714 680/710 355/375
CDI-E100G375T4L 467 714 710 375
CDI-E100P400T4L 494 753 750 400
CDI-E100G400T4L 494 753 750 400
CDI-E100P500T4L 612 934 930 500
CDI-E100G500T4L 612 934 930 500
CDI-E100G630T4L 790 1206 1200 630
9
（2）Type configuration
Frequency inverter type Brake unit D.C. reactor LCD keyboard
T4（Three-phase 380V, 50/60Hz）
CDI-E100G0R75T4B
CDI-E100G1R5T4B
CDI-E100G2R2T4B N/A
CDI-E100G3R7T4B Built-in as
standard
CDI-E100G5R5/P7R5T4B configuration
CDI-E100G7R5/P011T4B
CDI-E100G011/P015T4BL Built-in as standard
CDI-E100G015/P018.5T4BL configuration
N/A
CDI-E100G018.5/P022T4 Built-in as option
CDI-E100G022/P030T4 configuration
CDI-E100G030/P037T4
CDI-E100G037/P045T4 Built-in as
CDI-E100G045/P055T4 option
CDI-E100G075/P093T4 External connection
as option
CDI-E100G110/P132T4
CDI-E100G132/P160T4
CDI-E100G160/P185T4
CDI-E100G185/P200T4
CDI-E100G200/P220T4L
CDI-E100G220T4L
CDI-E100P250T4L
CDI-E100G250/P280T4L External
CDI-E100G280/P315T4L connection as
Option configuration
CDI-E100G315/P355T4L option
configuration Built-in as standard
configuration
CDI-E100G375T4L
CDI-E100P400T4L
CDI-E100G400T4L
CDI-E100P500T4L
CDI-E100G500T4L
CDI-E100G630T4L
10
Two E102 Series

(1) Type list
Matchable
Frequency inverter type Motor
(KVA) (A) (A)
(kW)
S2 (Single-phase 220V, 50/60Hz) (Built-in Brake Unit)
CDI-E102G0R4S2B 0.8 5.0 2.3 0.4
CDI-E102G0R75S2B 1.5 9 4.0 0.75
CDI-E102G1R5S2B 2.7 15.7 7.0 1.5
CDI-E102G2R2S2B 3.8 27 10.0 2.2
T2 (Three-phase 220V, 50/60Hz) (Built-in Brake Unit)
CDI-E102G0R4T2B 0.8 2.6 2.3 0.4
CDI-E102G0R75T2B 1.5 6 4.0 0.75
CDI-E102G1R5T2B 2.7 8.8 7.0 1.5
CDI-E102G2R2T2B 3.8 12.5 10.0 2.2
T4 (Three-phase 380V, 50/60Hz) （15kW and below the standard built-in brake unit）
CDI-E102G0R75T4B 1.5 4.4 3.0 0.75
CDI-E102G1R5T4B 3.0 6.0 4.5 1.5
CDI-E102G2R2T4B 4.0 6.8 6.0 2.2
CDI-E102G3R7T4B 5.9 11 9.5 3.7
CDI-E102G5R5/P7R5T4B 8.5/11 15.5/20.5 13/17 5.5/7.5
CDI-E102G7R5/P011T4B 11/17 20.5/26 17/25 7.5/11
CDI-E102G011/P015T4BL 17/21 26/35 25/32 11/15
CDI-E102G015/P018.5T4BL 21/24 35/38.5 32/37 15/18.5
CDI-E102G018.5/P022T4 24/30 38.5/46.5 37/45 18.5/22
CDI-E102G022/P030T4 30/40 46.5/62 45/60 22/30
CDI-E102G030/P037T4 40/50 62/76 60/75 30/37
CDI-E102G037/P045T4 50/60 76/92 75/90 37/45
CDI-E102G045/P055T4 60/72 92/113 90/110 45/55
CDI-E102G055/P075T4 72/100 113/157 110/152 55/75
CDI-E102G075/P093T4 100/116 157/180 152/176 75/93
CDI-E102G093/P110T4 116/138 180/214 176/210 93/110
CDI-E102G110/P132T4 138/167 214/256 210/253 110/132
CDI-E102G132/P160T4 167/200 256/305 253/300 132/160
CDI-E102G160/P185T4 200/224 305/344 300/340 160/185
CDI-E102G185/P200T4 224/250 344/383 340/380 182/200
CDI-E102G200/P220T4L 250/276 383/425 380/420 200/220
CDI-E102G220T4L 276 425 420 220
CDI-E102P250T4L 316 484 480 250
CDI-E102G250/P280T4L 316/355 484/543 480/540 250/280
CDI-E102G280/P315T4L 355/395 543/605 540/600 280/315
CDI-E102G315/P355T4L 395/467 605/714 600/680 315/355
CDI-E102G355/P375T4L 447/467 683/714 680/710 355/375
CDI-E102G375T4L 467 714 710 375
CDI-E102P400T4L 494 753 750 400
CDI-E102G400T4L 494 753 750 400
CDI-E102P500T4L 612 934 930 500
CDI-E102G500T4L 612 934 930 500
CDI-E102G630T4L 790 1206 1200 630
11
(2) Type configuration

CDI-E102G0R75T4B
CDI-E102G1R5T4B
CDI-E102G2R2T4B N/A
CDI-E102G3R7T4B Built-in as
standard
CDI-E102G5R5/P7R5T4B configuration
CDI-E102G018.5/P022T4 N/A
Built-in as option
CDI-E102G022/P030T4
configuration
CDI-E102G030/P037T4
CDI-E102G037/P045T4 Built-in as
CDI-E102G045/P055T4 option
CDI-E102G075/P093T4 External connection
CDI-E102G093/P110T4 as option
CDI-E102G132/P160T4
CDI-E102G160/P185T4
CDI-E102G185/P200T4
CDI-E102G220T4L
CDI-E102P250T4L
CDI-E102G250/P280T4L External
CDI-E102G280/P315T4L connection as
CDI-E102G315/P355T4L option
configuration Built-in as standard
configuration
CDI-E102G375T4L
CDI-E102P400T4L
CDI-E102G400T4L
CDI-E102P500T4L
CDI-E102G500T4L
CDI-E102G630T4L
12
Three. E180 Series

(1) Type list
Rated output
Rated capacity Rated input current Matchable Motor
Frequency inverter type current
(KVA) (A) (kW)
(A)
CDI-E180G0R4T2B 1.5 3.4 2.3 0.4
CDI-E180G0R75T2B 3 5.0 4.0 0.75
CDI-E180G1R5T2B 4 5.8 7.0 1.5
CDI-E180G2R2T2B 5.9 10.5 10 2.2
CDI-E180G3R7T2B 8.5 15.5 17 3.7
CDI-E180G5R5T2B 17 26 25 5.5
CDI-E180G7R5T2BL 21 35 32 7.5
CDI-E180G011T2 30 46.5 45 11
CDI-E180G015T2 40 62 60 15
CDI-E180G018.5T2 50 76 75 18.5
CDI-E180G022T2 60 92 90 22
CDI-E180G030T2 72 113 110 30
CDI-E180G037T2 100 157 152 37
CDI-E180G045T2 116 180 176 45
CDI-E180G055T2 138 214 210 55
CDI-E180G075T2 200 305 300 75
CDI-E180G093T2 224 344 340 93
CDI-E180G0R75T4B 1.5 3.4 2.3 0.75
CDI-E180G1R5T4B 3 5.0 3.7 1.5
CDI-E180G2R2T4B 4 5.8 5.1 2.2
CDI-E180G3R7/P5R5T4B 5.9/8.5 10.5/15.5 9.0/13 3.7/5.5
CDI-E180G5R5MT4B 8.5 15.5 13 5.5
CDI-E180G5R5/P7R5T4B 8.5/11 15.5/20.5 13/17 5.5/7.5
CDI-E180G7R5/P011T4B 11/17 20.5/26 17/25 7.5/11
CDI-E180G011MT4B 17 26 25 11
CDI-E180G011/P015T4BL 17/21 26/35 25/32 11/15
CDI-E180G015/P018.5T4BL 21/24 35/38.5 32/37 15/18.5
CDI-E180G018.5/P022T4 24/30 38.5/46.5 37/45 18.5/22
CDI-E180G022/P030T4 30/40 46.5/62 45/60 22/30
CDI-E180G030/P037T4 40/50 62/76 60/75 30/37
CDI-E180G037/P045T4 50/60 76/92 75/90 37/45
CDI-E180G045/P055T4 60/72 92/113 90/110 45/55
CDI-E180G055/P075T4 72/100 113/157 110/152 55/75
CDI-E180G075/P093T4 100/116 157/180 152/176 75/93
CDI-E180G093/P110T4 116/138 180/214 176/210 93/110
CDI-E180G110/P132T4 138/167 214/256 210/253 110/132
CDI-E180G132/P160T4 167/200 256/305 253/300 132/160
CDI-E180G160/P185T4 200/224 305/344 300/340 160/185
CDI-E180G185/P200T4 224/250 344/383 340/380 182/200
CDI-E180G200/P220T4L 250/276 383/425 380/420 200/220
CDI-E180G220T4L 276 425 420 220
CDI-E180P250T4L 316 484 480 250
CDI-E180G250/P280T4L 316/355 484/543 480/540 250/280
CDI-E180G280/P315T4L 355/395 543/605 540/600 280/315
CDI-E180G315/P355T4L 395/467 605/714 600/680 315/355
CDI-E180G355/P375T4L 447/467 683/714 680/710 355/375
CDI-E180G375T4L 467 714 710 375
CDI-E180P400T4L 494 753 750 400
CDI-E180G400T4L 494 753 750 400
13
Rated output
Rated capacity Rated input current Matchable Motor
Frequency inverter type current
(KVA) (A) (kW)
(A)
CDI-E180P500T4L 612 934 930 500
CDI-E180G500T4L 612 934 930 500
CDI-E180G630T4L 790 1206 1200 630
CDI-E180G022/P030T6 36/48 30/40 28/38 22/30
CDI-E180G030/P037T6 48/59 40/49 38/46 30/37
CDI-E180G037/P045T6 59/70 49/59 46/56 37/45
CDI-E180G045/P055T6 70/86 59/72 56/68 45/55
CDI-E180G055/P075T6 86/116 72/97 68/92 55/75
CDI-E180G075/P093T6 116/139 97/116 92/110 75/93
CDI-E180G093/P110T6 139/166 116/139 110/132 93/110
CDI-E180G110/P132T6 166/195 139/163 132/155 110/132
CDI-E180G132/P160T6L 195/227 163/190 155/180 132/160
CDI-E180G160/P185T6L 227/264 190/221 180/210 160/185
CDI-E180G185/P220T6L 264/308 221/258 210/245 185/220
CDI-E180G220/P250T6L 308/347 258/290 245/275 220/250
CDI-E180G250/P280T6L 347/383 290/321 275/305 250/280
CDI-E180G280/P315T6L 383/435 321/364 305/345 280/315
CDI-E180G315/P355T6L 435/491 364/411 345/390 315/355
CDI-E180G355/P400T6L 491/541 411/453 390/430 355/400
CDI-E180G400T6L 541 453 430 400
CDI-E180P500T6L 680 569 540 500
CDI-E180G500T6L 680 569 540 500
CDI-E180P600T6L 793 664 630 600
CDI-E180G600T6L 664 664 630 600
CDI-E180P700T6L 905 758 720 700
CDI-E180G700T6L 905 758 720 700
14
(2) Type configuration

CDI-E180G0R4T2B
CDI-E180G0R75T2B
CDI-E180G1R5T2B N/A
Built-in as
CDI-E180G2R2T2B standard
CDI-E180G3R7T2B configuration
CDI-E180G5R5T2B
Built-in as standard
CDI-E180G7R5T2BL
configuration
CDI-E180G011T2 Built-in as option
CDI-E180G015T2 configuration Option configuration
CDI-E180G018.5T2 External Built-in as option
connection as configuration
CDI-E180G022T2
option
CDI-E180G030T2 configuration
CDI-E180G037T2
CDI-E180G045T2 External
connection as External connection as
CDI-E180G055T2
option option configuration
CDI-E180G075T2 configuration
CDI-E180G093T2
CDI-E180G0R75T4B
CDI-E180G1R5T4B
CDI-E180G2R2T4B
CDI-E180G3R7/P5R5T4B
Built-in as N/A
CDI-E180G5R5MT4B
standard
CDI-E180G5R5/P7R5T4B
configuration
CDI-E180G011MT4B
CDI-E180G018.5/P022T4
Built-in as option
CDI-E180G022/P030T4
configuration
CDI-E180G030/P037T4 Built-in as option
CDI-E180G045/P055T4
CDI-E180G055/P075T4
CDI-E180G075/P093T4
CDI-E180G093/P110T4
CDI-E180G110/P132T4 External connection as
CDI-E180G132/P160T4 option configuration
External
CDI-E180G160/P185T4
connection as
CDI-E180G185/P200T4
option
configuration
CDI-E180G220T4L
CDI-E180P250T4L
CDI-E180G250/P280T4L Built-in as standard
CDI-E180G280/P315T4L configuration
CDI-E180G375T4L
15
Frequency inverter type
(KVA) (A) (A)
CDI-E180P400T4L
External
CDI-E180G400T4L
connection as Built-in as standard
CDI-E180P500T4L Option configuration
option configuration
CDI-E180G500T4L
configuration
CDI-E180G630T4L
CDI-E180G022/P030T6
CDI-E180G030/P037T6
CDI-E180G037/P045T6
CDI-E180G045/P055T6 External connection as
CDI-E180G055/P075T6 option configuration
CDI-E180G075/P093T6
CDI-E180G093/P110T6
CDI-E180G110/P132T6
External
connection as
CDI-E180G220/P250T6L Option configuration
option
configuration
Built-in as standard
configuration
CDI-E180G400T6L
CDI-E180P500T6L
CDI-E180G500T6L
CDI-E180P600T6L
CDI-E180G600T6L
CDI-E180P700T6L
CDI-E180G700T6L
NOTE: For externally-connected brake unit refers to A2.5, and for externally-connected D.C. reactor refers
to A2.2.
Order explanation:
During order, please enter type, specification of the product, and provide parameter, load type, or other
information relating to the motor as much as possible. For any special requirement, please consult with technology
department of the Company.
16
2.4 Appearance and installation size
(1) E100, E102 Series
Note: the dimension of E102 is same as E100 series
17
Note: the dimension of E102 is same as E100

Earthing series
18
19
20
(2) E180 Series
21
22
23
24
2.5 Routine maintenance

(1) Routine maintenance
Under influence of temperature, humidity, dust and vibration, internal elements of frequency inverter should
be aged, which should cause potential fault, or decrease service life of frequency inverter. Therefore, it is
significant to perform routine maintenance and regular inspection with the frequency inverter.
Routine maintenance item:
A. If running sound of motor is abnormal.
B. If vibration is created during operation of motor.
C. If installing condition of frequency inverter is changed.
D. If radiating fan of frequency inverter works normally.
E. If frequency inverter is in state of overheat.
Daily cleanness:
A. Keep cleanness of frequency inverter.
B. Remove dust from surface of frequency inverter effectively, to prevent frequency inverter from
incursion of dust, or metal dust.
C. Remove oil sludge form radiating fan of frequency inverter effectively.
(2) Regular inspection
Please inspect corner pockets of frequency inverter regularly.
Regular inspection item:
A. Inspect air flue, and clean it regularly.
B. Inspect if screw is loosened.
C. Inspect if frequency inverter is corrosive.
D. Inspect if there is arc on surface connecting terminal.
E. Insulated test of major loop
Note: Please disconnect major loop and frequency inverter while testing insulation resistance by using
megohmmeter (500V DC megohmmeter). Do not measure insulation of control loop with megohmmeter. And
high voltage test is needless (finished in ex works).
(3) Replacement of wearing parts
Wearing parts of frequency inverter includes cooling fan, filter ELCC, of which service life depend on
operating environment and maintenance condition closely.
User could confirm replacement period according to the operating time.
A. Cooling fan
Potential damage reason: Shaft abrasion and vane aging.
25
Critical standard: If there is crack on vane of fan, or if abnormal sound occurs during starting.
B. Filter ELCC
Potential damage reason: Bad input power, higher ambient temperature, frequent load switch, or aging of
electrolyte. Critical standard: If liquid leaks, if safety valve bulged out, measure of static capacitance, and measure
of insulated resistance.
(4) Storage of frequency inverter

After purchased the device, please pay attention to following points while storing it:
A. Please store it in original package as much as possible.
B. Long term storage should cause aging of ELCC, please electrify it for 5 hours above twice a year during
storing, in mode of raising voltage to rated voltage slowly via transformer.
(5) Guarantee of frequency inverter
Maintenance free is limited to the frequency inverter only.
The Company will provide guaranteed repair for fault or damage occurs during normal application. For
device sold, shall be repaired in China in reference to the bar code date, and for exported device (not included
China) shall be repaired at purchase site if the date is within six months after delivery.
For products manufactured by the Company, we will provide paid service for life anytime, or anywhere
applied it.
All sale, product, and agent units of the Company should provide products with after sale service, of which
service terms include:
A. Provide “Class Ⅲ” inspection service at site of the unit. (Include fault elimination)
B. Refer to after sell service contract concluded between the Company and agents.
C. Request for compensated after-sell service from the agent of the Company (without reference to
guaranteed repair).
Our Company should take responsibility of guaranteed repair, guaranteed exchange, and guaranteed return
for quality and accident responsibility relating to the product, but user could affect insurance for further
responsibility compensation guarantee from insurance agent.
Guarantee term of the product should be effective in 18 months after Bar code date.
For fault caused in following reason, user could obtain compensated maintenance only even guarantee term
is effective:
A. Problem caused in incorrect operation (based on user’s manual) or repair, modification without
authorization.
B. Problem caused in violation of critical requirement.
C. Damage caused in undeserved transportation after purchased.
D. Aging or fault caused in bad environment.
E. Damage caused in earthquake, fire, disaster, lightning strike, abnormal voltage or other natural disaster
and incidental disaster.
F. Damage occurs in transportation. (Note: transportation mode should be appointed by user of themselves,
the Company should assist agent to conduct transfer of goods).
G. Brand, trade mark, SN, nameplate marked by manufacturer is damaged or unjustifiable.
H. Failure to pay off fund according to purchase contract.
I. Failure to describe actual conditions relating to installation, distribution, operation, maintenance, or
other condition to the Company.
The Company should carry out responsibility of “Three guarantee” abovementioned only after received the
returned goods, and confirmed responsibility attribution.
Should it involve an unpaid or untimely settlement due to the buyer, the ownership hereof still belongs to the
supplier. In addition, the latter will assume no liability hereinabove, and the buyer shall have no disagreement.
All relevant service fees shall be calculated in accordance with the identical standards of the factory. In the
event that an agreement or a contract exist, its priority shall be performed.
26
Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter

3.1 Option of the Site and Space for Installation
Option of installing position:
1. Prevent from sunniness; Don’t use in the open air directly.
2. Don’t use in the corrosive gas and liquid environment.
3. Don’t use in the oil fog and splash environment.
4. Don’t use in the salt spray environment.
5. Don’t use in the moist and rain environment.
6. Please equip the unit with filters device if metal dust or fiber wadding existing in air.
7. Do not use the unit in mechanical shock or vibration condition.
8. It is necessary to adopt cooling measure if ambient temperature is higher than 40℃.
Warning 9. It is recommended to use the unit in temperature range of -10℃~+40℃ because fault
maybe occur in overcool or overheat condition.
10. Keep the unit away from power supply noise, high-power application, such as electric
welder should impact application of the unit.
11. Emissive material should impact application of the unit.
12. Keep the unit away from combustible material, attenuant and solvent.
For ensuring perfect performance and long-term service life, please comply with the abovementioned advices
while installing E Series Frequency inverter to prevent the unit from damage.
Option of the installation space:

For vertical installation of E Series Frequency inverters, adequate cooling room should be left, so as to ensure
effective cooling
Installation space of E frequency inverters
1. The spaces to be left above/below and on the two sides of the frequency inverter are required
both for the model with open bracket (IP00) and that with closed bracket (IP20)
2. Permissible temperature at the air inlet: -10℃ ~ +40℃
3. Adequate cooling spaces should be reserved both above and below the frequency inverter, so
as to facilitate gas admission and emission.
Attention 4. Do not drop anything into the air passage during installation. Otherwise the fan might be
damaged.
5. Mount filtering devices at the air inlet in cases of floating fiber or cotton or heavy dust.
27
3.2 Wiring of the Peripherals and Optional parts

The standard method to connect E Series Peripheral Equipment and Optional Components is as below:
Three-phase AC
power supply
Peripherals and Optional parts Description
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Be used for rapidly cutting off the fault
(MCCB) current of the frequency inverter and
preventing fault of power supply from
the frequency inverter and its line fault
Electromagnetic Contactor When the frequency inverter breaks
(MC) down, cut off main power supply and
prevent restart after power off and fault
AC Reactor Be used for improving input power
(ACL) factor, reduce upper harmonics and
restrain the power surge
Radio Noise Filter Be used for reducing radio noise filter

(NF) of the frequency inverter
When the brake torque is unable to meet

Regenerative Brake Unit the requirements, this is selected and
E Series Frequency inverter (Ub) used for occasions with large inertia
Regenerative Brake Resistance load or frequent brake or rapid stop
(Rb) (CDI-E100, E102 Series has built in
brake unit. Built-in brake unit for
CDI-E180 Series with power below
15Kw and option for the models with
power 18.5 kW ~ 30 kW)
DC Reactor Be used for improving power factor and
(DCL) restraining current peak (E100, T102
has no this connection terminal)
Radio Noise Filter Be used for reducing radio noise filter
(NF) of the frequency inverter
28
3.3 Wiring of the main circuit

3.3.1 Wiring diagram for the main circuit and precautions
This section describes connection of main circuit of E frequency inverters.
1. Do not make power supply of AC main loop connect with output terminal U, V, and W.
2. Please connect unit only after shut down the power supply.
3. Verify if the crating voltage of frequency inverter is same as the input voltage of it.
Dangerous 4. Do not perform withstand test with frequency inverter.
5. Fasten terminal screw with appointed fasten torque.
1. Please check if grounding terminal is grounded before connect main loop. (Refer to 3.5)
2. Terminal sequence should base on actual object.
3. Rated input voltage:
220V (AC single phase), frequency: 50/60Hz
220V (AC three-phase), frequency: 50/60Hz
Attention 380V (AC three-phase), frequency: 50/60Hz
690V (AC three-phase), frequency: 50/60Hz
4. Allowable fluctuation voltage: +10% (fluctuation ±15%)
Allowable fluctuation Frequency: ±2%
Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 1、2 of Machine Type E100、E102.
Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 3 of Machine Type E100、E102
Note: G018.5/G022T4 (Only Model T4B can be connected to brake resistor; it is invalid when connected to
Model T4)。
29
Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 5of Machine Type E100、E102
Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 6、7 of Machine Type E100、E102
Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 1 of Machine Type E180
Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 2、3 of Machine Type E180
30
3.3.2 Precautions for wiring the input side of the main circuit
1. Installation for Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
To protect the circuit, a MCCB or fuse should be installed between the power supply of the AC main circuit and
the input terminals of R, S, or T.
2. Residual current circuit breaker
When selecting residual current circuit breakers for connection to input terminals of R, S, or T, the one that is not
affected by Highest Frequency is preferred, in order to avoid any possible misoperation.
For example: NV series (manufactured in 1988 or later on) by Mitsubishi Electric;
EG and SG series (manufactured in 1984 or later on) by Fuji Electric;
CDM1 Series Circuit Breakers made by DELIXI Group Co., Ltd.
3. Installation of the electromagnetic contactor (MC)
The frequency inverter may be used even if no electromagnetic contactor is installed on the power supply side.
Electromagnetic contactor can take the place of MCCB for the sequence break of the main circuit. However, when
the primary side is switched off, the regeneration brake will not function and the motor will stop running.
When the primary side is closed/open, the electromagnetic contactor can cause loads to start/stop, but frequent
close/open will lead to frequency inverter fault. Therefore, while using the brake resistor unit, you can always
31
realize sequential control through the trip contact of the overload relay when the electromagnetic contactor is
switched off.
4. Phase sequence connection of the terminals
The phase lines of the input power supply can be connected to any one of the terminals R, S or T on the terminal
board, regardless of phase sequences.
5. AC reactor
When an frequency inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600KVA or beyond), or when a
phase lead capacitor (power factor compensator) is connected or disconnected, the peak current through the input
power circuit will be so strong that it will damage the rectifier-frequency inverter. Installing a DC reactor
(optional) in the frequency inverter or adding an AC reactor (optional) at the input end can effectively improve the
power factors at the power supply side.
6. Surge absorber
If a perceptual load (such as electromagnetic contactor, relay, solenoid valve, electromagnetic coil,
electromagnetic brake and so on) is connected in the adjacent area, a surge suppressor should also be used while
operating the frequency inverter.
7. Setting of a noise filter at the power supply side
Noise filter can be used to reduce the high-frequency noise flowing from the frequency inverter to the power
supply.
Wiring example 1: please use noise filters exclusively designed for frequency inverters.
It is set as follows:
Noise filter Frequency Motor
Power supply inverter
Other devices
3.3.3 Precautions for wiring the output side of the main circuit
1. Connection of the output terminals to the load
Connect the output terminals U, V and W respectively to the leading-out wires U, V and W of the motor. Use the
forward rotation instruction for verification. (CCW: observed from the load side, the motor runs
counterclockwise). If the motor is not running in the right direction, switch any two of terminals U, V and W.
2. It is absolutely forbidden to connect input power supply to terminals U, V or W!!!
3. Short circuit or grounding of the output circuit is forbidden.
Refrain from directly touching the output circuit or bringing the output wire in contact with the chassis of the
frequency inverter. Otherwise, electric shock or grounding fault might occur. In addition, always guard the output
wire against short circuit.
4. It is forbidden to connect phase-lead capacitors or LC/RC noise filters
Do not connect phase-lead capacitor or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuit.
5. Refrain from installing magnetic starter
If a magnetic starter or electromagnetic contactor is connected to the output circuit, the frequency inverter will
trigger the operation of over-current protection circuit because of the surge current resultant from the frequency
inverter’s connection to the load. The magnetic contactor should not operate until the frequency inverter has
stopped outputting.
6. Installation of thermal overload relay
The frequency inverter consists of an electronic overload protection mechanism. Admittedly, a thermal over-load
relay should be installed when an frequency inverter is used in driving several motors or when a multi-pole motor
is used. In addition, the rated current of the thermal over-load relay should be the same as the current indicated on
the nameplate of the motor.
7. Setting of noise filter on the output side
Mounting a special-purpose noise filter on the output side of the frequency inverter can reduce radio noise and
interfering noise.
Interfering noise: because of electromagnetic interference, the noise might affect the signal line and result in the
misoperation of the controller.
Radio noise: the noise can be produced from radio transmitters because of high-frequency waves emitted from the
frequency inverter or cables.
8. Countermeasures for interfering noise
Aside from using noise filters, threading all the connecting wires into a ground metal pipe can also restrain
interfering noise generated at the output terminal. If we put signal lines over 30cm away, the effect of interfering
noise will be abated.
9. Countermeasures for radio noise
Aside from input and output wires, the frequency inverter itself also emits noise. It will help to handle the problem
32
if we install noise filters at the input and output sides of the frequency inverter or apply shielded lines to the iron
case of the frequency inverter. It is also very important to make sure that the connecting wire between the
frequency inverter and the motor should be as short as possible
10. The wire distance between the frequency inverter and the motor
If the total wire length between the frequency inverter and the motor is too long or the carrier frequency of the
frequency inverter (primary IGBT switch frequency) is rather high, the harmonic leakage current from the cables
will exert negative influence on the frequency inverter and other external devices.
If connection line between the frequency inverter and the motor is too long, carrier frequency of the frequency
inverter can be reduced as below. The carrier frequency can be given by Function Code P1.0.22.
Table of wire distance between the frequency inverter and the motor
Wire distance between the frequency inverter and the Carrier frequency (P)
motor
Not exceeding 50m 10KHz or lower
Not exceeding 100m 5KHz or lower
Beyond 100m 3KHz or lower
Output reactors should be installed when the wire distance exceeds 50 meters. Otherwise, the motor may get burnt
down.
External thermal relays may cause unnecessary operations due to the Highest Frequency current from the
distributed capacitance in the output lines of the frequency inverter. As far as Low-capacity models of the 400V
Series (especially those below 7.5KW) is concerned, the ratio of their current to the rated current of the frequency
inverter will become bigger if their wiring lines are rather long (over 50m). As a result, external thermal relays
may carry out unnecessary operations.
3.3.4 Wiring and Supporting Peripherals for Main Circuits

(1) E100、E102 Series
Main Circuit Control Circuit Use-free air Electromagnetic
Type of Frequency inverter Wire Gage Wire Gage breaker contactor
(mm2) (mm2) MCCB(A) MC(A)
S2 (Single Phase 220V)
CDI-E100G0R4S2B 2.5 1.0 16 10
CDI-E100G0R75S2B 2.5 1.0 16 10
CDI-E100G1R5S2B 2.5 1.0 20 16
CDI-E100G2R2S2B 4.0 1.0 32 20
T2 (Three-phase 220V)
CDI-E100G0R4T2B 2.5 1.0 10 10
CDI-E100G0R75T2B 2.5 1.0 16 10
CDI-E100G1R5T2B 2.5 1.0 16 10
CDI-E100G2R2T2B 4.0 1.0 25 16
CDI-E100G0R75T4B 2.5 1.0 10 10
CDI-E100G1R5T4B 2.5 1.0 16 10
CDI-E100G2R2T4B 2.5 1.0 16 10
CDI-E100G3R7T4B 4.0 1.0 25 16
CDI-E100G5R5/P7R5T4B 4.0 1.0 32 25
CDI-E100G7R5/P011T4B 4.0 1.0 40 32
CDI-E100G011/P015T4BL 4.0 1.0 63 40
CDI-E100G015/P018.5T4BL 6.0 1.0 63 40
CDI-E100G018.5/P022T4 6.0 1.0 63 40
CDI-E100G022/P030T4 10 1.0 100 63
CDI-E100G030/P037T4 16 1.5 125 100
CDI-E100G037/P045T4 16 1.5 160 100
CDI-E100G045/P055T4 25 1.5 200 125
CDI-E100G055/P075T4 35 1.5 200 125
CDI-E100G075/P093T4 50 1.5 250 160
CDI-E100G093/P110T4 70 1.5 250 160
CDI-E100G110/P132T4 120 1.5 350 350
CDI-E100G132/P160T4 150 1.5 400 400
33
Main Circuit Control Circuit Use-free air Electromagnetic
Type of Frequency inverter Wire Gage Wire Gage breaker contactor
(mm2) (mm2) MCCB(A) MC(A)
CDI-E100G160/P185T4 185 1.5 500 400
CDI-E100G185/P200T4 185 1.5 500 400
CDI-E100G200/P220T4L 300 1.5 600 600
CDI-E100G220T4L 300 1.5 600 600
CDI-E100P250T4L 300 1.5 600 600
CDI-E100G250/P280T4L 370 1.5 800 600
CDI-E100G280/P315T4L 370 1.5 800 800
CDI-E100G315/P355T4L 450 1.5 800 800
CDI-E100G355/P375T4L 450 1.5 800 800
CDI-E100G375T4L 600 1.5 1000 800
CDI-E100P400T4L 600 1.5 1000 1000
CDI-E100G400T4L 600 1.5 1000 1000
CDI-E100P500T4L 600 1.5 1600 1000
CDI-E100G500T4L 600 1.5 1600 1000
CDI-E100G630T4L 600 1.5 1600 1600
Note: The peripheral configurations of E102 series inverter described in the Table above are same as those
of E100 series inverter.
(2) E180 Series

Main Control
Use-free air Electromagnetic
Circuit Circuit
Type of Frequency inverter breaker contactor
Wire Gage Wire Gage
MCCB(A) MC(A)
(mm2) (mm2)
CDI-E180G0R4T2B 2.5 1.0 10 10
CDI-E180G0R75T2B 2.5 1.0 16 10
CDI-E180G1R5T2B 2.5 1.0 16 10
CDI-E180G2R2T2B 4.0 1.0 25 16
CDI-E180G3R7T2B 4.0 1.0 32 25
CDI-E180G5R5T2B 4.0 1.0 63 40
CDI-E180G7R5T2BL 6.0 1.0 63 40
CDI-E180G011T2 10 1.5 100 63
CDI-E180G015T2 16 1.5 125 100
CDI-E180G018.5T2 16 1.5 160 100
CDI-E180G022T2 25 1.5 200 125
CDI-E180G030T2 35 1.5 200 125
CDI-E180G037T2 35 1.5 200 125
CDI-E180G045T2 70 1.5 250 160
CDI-E180G055T2 120 1.5 350 350
CDI-E180G075T2 150 1.5 400 400
CDI-E180G093T2 150 1.5 400 400
CDI-E180G0R75T4B 2.5 1.0 10 10
CDI-E180G1R5T4B 2.5 1.0 16 10
CDI-E180G2R2T4B 2.5 1.0 16 10
CDI-E180G3R7/P5R5T4B 4.0 1.0 25 16
CDI-E180G5R5MT4B 4.0 1.0 32 25
CDI-E180G5R5/P7R5T4B 4.0 1.0 32 25
CDI-E180G7R5/P011T4B 4.0 1.0 40 32
CDI-E180G011MT4B 4.0 1.0 63 40
CDI-E180G011/P015T4BL 4.0 1.0 63 40
CDI-E180G015/P018.5T4BL 6.0 1.0 63 40
CDI-E180G018.5/P022T4 6.0 1.5 100 63
CDI-E180G022/P030T4 10 1.5 100 63
34
Main Control
Use-free air Electromagnetic
Circuit Circuit
Type of Frequency inverter breaker contactor
Wire Gage Wire Gage
2 2 MCCB(A) MC(A)
(mm ) (mm )
CDI-E180G030/P037T4 16 1.5 125 100
CDI-E180G037/P045T4 16 1.5 160 100
CDI-E180G045/P055T4 25 1.5 200 125
CDI-E180G055/P075T4 35 1.5 200 125
CDI-E180G075/P093T4 50 1.5 250 160
CDI-E180G093/P110T4 70 1.5 250 160
CDI-E180G110/P132T4 120 1.5 350 350
CDI-E180G132/P160T4 150 1.5 400 400
CDI-E180G160/P185T4 185 1.5 500 400
CDI-E180G185/P2004 185 1.5 500 400
CDI-E180G200/P220T4L 300 1.5 600 600
CDI-E180G220T4L 300 1.5 600 600
CDI-E180G250/P280T4L 370 1.5 800 600
CDI-E180G280/P315T4L 370 1.5 800 800
CDI-E180G315/P355T4L 450 1.5 800 800
CDI-E180G355/P375T4L 450 1.5 800 800
CDI-E180G375T4L 600 1.5 1000 800
CDI-E180P400T4L 600 1.5 1000 1000
CDI-E180G400T4L 600 1.5 1000 1000
CDI-E180P500T4L 600 1.5 1600 1000
CDI-E180G500T4L 600 1.5 1600 1000
CDI-E180G630T4L 600 1.5 1600 1600
CDI-E180G022/P030T6 4.0 1.0 63 40
CDI-E180G030/P037T6 6.0 1.0 63 40
CDI-E180G037/P045T6 6.0 1.5 100 63
CDI-E180G045/P055T6 10 1.5 100 63
CDI-E180G055/P075T6 16 1.5 125 100
CDI-E180G075/P093T6 25 1.5 200 125
CDI-E180G093/P110T6 35 1.5 200 160
CDI-E180G110/P132T6 50 1.5 250 200
CDI-E180G132/P160T6L 50 1.5 250 200
CDI-E180G160/P185T6L 70 1.5 300 250
CDI-E180G185/P220T6L 120 1.5 350 350
CDI-E180G220/P250T6L 150 1.5 400 400
CDI-E180G250/P280T6L 150 1.5 400 400
CDI-E180G280/P315T6L 185 1.5 500 400
CDI-E180G315/P355T6L 300 1.5 600 500
CDI-E180G355/P400T6L 300 1.5 600 600
CDI-E180G400T6L 300 1.5 600 600
CDI-E180P500T6L 370 1.5 800 600
CDI-E180G500T6L 450 1.5 1000 800
CDI-E180P600T6L 450 1.5 1000 800
CDI-E180G600T6L 450 1.5 500 800
CDI-E180P700T6L 600 1.5 500 1000
CDI-E180G700T6L 600 1.5 600 1000
35
3.4 Connection of control circuit

3.4.1 Arrangement and connection of controlling circuit terminals
(1) E100 Series
J7 U
FM2 I I U
ON
VF2
1 2
CDI-E100 Series control panel
J6 U
VF1
FM1 I
J5
YO/
SG+ +10V VF2 FM1 COM DI2 DI4 DI6 FMP T1A T1B T1C
SG- VF1 GND FM2 DI1 DI3 DI5 OP P24 T2A T2B T2C
The wiring diagrams or E100 Main Circuit and Control Circuit are as below: (not connecting to L3 for Model S2)
Brake Resistance
Circuit Breaker Three-phase

+ PB Asynchronous Motor
L1 R U
CDI-E100 Series
L2 S Speed Regulator V M
L3 T W
P24V
The default is to use
24V Power Supply
OP
FM1 Analog Signal
Output 1
Digital Input 1 0~10V/0~20mA
DI1 GND
Digital Input 2
DI2
Digital Input Terminal
FM2 Analog Signal

Digital Input 3
DI3 Output 2
GND 0~10V/0~20mA
Digital Input 4
DI4
Digital Input 5
YO(P2.1.20=1):
DI5 Multi-functional Collector
YO/FMP Output
Digital Input 6
DI6 DC48V 50mA
Common Terminal （Digital Signal FMP(P2.1.20=0)

COM COM Impulse Output
Common Terminal）
External 0.01KHz～100.00KHz
Potentiometer
（Analog Signal T1A
（1K 1/2W）
+10V Relay Output 1
Power Supply）
T1B AC 250V 3A below
VF1（Analog Signal Input 1） DC 30V 3A below
T1C
VF2（Analog Signal Input 2）
（Analog Signal Ground）

GND T2A
Relay Output 2
DC 30V 3A below
SG+ T2C
RS485 Communication
Interface
SG-
P24V Digital signal power supply
can externally provide 24V
power supply and has Max.
COM Current of 300mA
36
(2) E102 Series
FM1
J6
I U CDI-E102 Series control panel
I U
ON
VF2
1 2
VF1
J5 SG+ +10V VF1 VF2 DI2 DI3 DI4
SG- FM1 GND COM DI5 DI6 P24 T1A T1B T1C
The wiring diagrams or E102 Main Circuit and Control Circuit are as below: (not connecting to L3 for Model S2)
Brake Resistance
Brake Resistance
Circuit Breaker
+ PB Three-phase
L1 R U Asynchronous
CDI-E102 Series
L3 T W
Digital Input 2
DI2
FM1 Analog Signal
Digital Input 3
DI3 Output 1
GND 0~10V/0~20m
Digital Input 4
DI4
Digital Input 5
DI5
Digital Input 6
DI6 T1A
Multi-function Relay
Common Terminal （Digital Signal Output 1
COM T1B
External Common Terminal） AC 250V 3A below
Potentiometer DC 30V 3A below
T1C
（1K 1/2W）
+10V（Analog Signal Power Supply）
（Analog Signal Input 1）

VF1
VF2（Analog Signal Input 2） Digital signal power

P24V supply can externally
GND（Analog Signal Ground） provide 24V power supply
COM and has Max. Current of
300mA
SG+
RS485 Communication
Interface
SG-
37
(3) E180 Series
J7 J6
I I
FM2 FM1
U U
CDI-E180 control panel
1 2
ON
I U
J5
YO/
+10V VF2 FM1 COM DI2 DI4 DI6 T1A T1B T1C
FMP
VF1 GND FM2 DI1 DI3 DI5 OP P24 T2A T2B T2C
The wiring diagrams or E 180 Main Circuit and Control Circuit are as below:
(standard configuration for 15 kW and

D.C. reactor Brake unit below)
(option configuration for 18.5 ~ 30 kW
and below)
Brake resistance
Circuit Breaker
P1 P+ PB - Three-phase
Asynchronous Motor
L1 R U
CDI-E180 Series
L3 T W
expansion interface
I/O communication
The default is to use P24V

built-in 24V Power
Supply OP
FM1
Analog Signal Output 1
Digital Input 1 0~10V/0~20mA
DI1 GND
Digital Input 2
DI2
FM2
Digital Input 3 Analog Signal Output 2
DI3 0~10V/0~20mA
GND
Digital Input 4
DI4
Digital Input 5 YO(P2.1.20=1):
DI5 Multi-functional Open
YO/FMP Collector Output
Digital Input 6
DI6 DC48V 50mA
FMP(P2.1.20=0)
COM（Digital Signal
Common Terminal
COM Impulse Output
Common Terminal ） 0.01 KHz ~ 100.00 KHz
External
Potentiometer
（1K 1/2W） T1A
+10V（Analog Signal Power Supply）
Output T1
（Analog Signal Input 1）
VF1 DC 30V 3A below
T1C
VF2（Analog Signal Input 2）
GND（Analog Signal Ground ） T2A

Output T2
DC 30V 3A below
PG T2C
Expansion
Interface
P24V Digital signal power supply
can externally provide 24V
power supply with max.
COM output current 300mA
38
3.4.2 Function of control circuit terminal
Following sheet summarize function of control circuit terminal, which is connected according to function
respectively.
Name of
Category Terminal Description of Function
Terminal
Take P24V short circuit by factory default.
External Power When adopting external power to drive the digital input
OP
Input terminal, disconnect OP and P24V and connect with external
power
DI1-OP(COM) Digital Input 1
Terminals are equipped on E Series Control Panel, in which
Terminal D16 can be used for high-speed Impulse Input and has
Digital Input maximum input frequency of 100kHz. Specific function refers to
Terminal the description for use of Function Code P2.0.00~P2.0.05.
Note: Terminal DI1 is not available on E102 Series.
DI7-COM Digital Input 7 Refer to the terminals on CDI-E180 Series I/0 expansion card,
DI8-COM Digital Input 8 and such terminals are not available on E100 and E102 Series.
DI9-COM Digital Input 9 Specific function refers to the description for use of Function
Code P2.0.06 and P2.0.09
DI10-COM Digital Input 10
Note: Only internal power supply is applicable
T1A Multi-functiona TA-TB is normally open
T1B l Relay T1 TA-TC is normally closed
T1C Output Drive Capability:
T2A Multi-functiona AC250V 3A below
T2B l Relay T2 DC30V 3A below
T2C Output Note: Terminal T2 is not available on E102 Series
Multi-functio
nal Output YO1 Multi-functiona
Terminal l Open
Refer to the terminal on E180 Series I/0 expansion card, and
CME Collector
such terminals are not available on E100 and E102 Series.
Output 1
Specific function refers to the description for use of Function
YO2 Multi-functiona
Code P2.0.28 and P2.0.31
l Open
Drive Capability: DC48V 50mA below
CME Collector
Output 2
10V Provide DC 10V supply voltage externally and generally adopt it
10V Power
as working power for external potentiometer
GND Output
Drive Capability: 50mA below
Analog Input
VF1-GND
Terminal 1 Be used for receiving external analog signal input, 0V~10V
Analog Input Analog Input voltage signal or 0/4mA~20mA current signal
VF2-GND
Signal Terminal 2
Refer to the terminals on E180 Series I/0 expansion card and are
controlled by J9 on expansion card. They can not be used
Analog Input together with keyboard potentiometer. E100 & E102 Series
VF3-GND
Terminal 3
don’t have these terminals. Only voltage signal: 0V～10V, the
function is same as potentiometer.
39
Category Terminal Name of Terminal Description of Function

Analog Output
FM1-GND Output 0~10V voltage or 0~20mA current
Terminal 1
Analog Output Signal Note: Terminal FM2 is not available on E102
Analog Output Series
FM2-GND
Terminal 2
Multi-functional When P2.1.20=1, this terminal is used as
YO/FMP Open Collector multi-functional collector output YO
Output and Common Drive Capability: DC48V 50mA below
Dual-purpose Terminal for Impulse
Terminal Output When P2.1.20=0, this terminal is used as Impulse
COM Note: Such terminal Output FMP
is not available on Impulse frequency: 0.01kHz~100.00kHz
E102 Series
Provide DC 24V supply voltage externally and
COM
generally adopt it digital input terminal or as
24V Power 24V Power Output working power for external low-voltage
P24 equipments
Drive Capability: Max. Output Current 300mA
Positive Signal
SG+ Terminal of RS485 E100 and E102Series directly has two terminals
Communication Communication on control panel. E180 Series are not equipped
Terminal Negative Signal with such two terminals on control panel, but on
SG- Terminal of RS485 communication expansion card
Communication
3.4.3 Wiring Instruction for Control Circuit

To avoid interfere, please distribute control loop apart from main loop and heavy current loop (relay contact, 220V
loop), the Shielded Twisted Cable or Shielded Twisted Pair should be used in wiring the control circuit; the
shielding sheath should be connected to terminal PE of the frequency inverter and the wire distance should be less
than 50 meters to prevent misoperation from interference.
1. Description for Circuit Wiring of Analog Input Terminal
J5-1 controls VF1 channel to select voltage/current signal input. When current signal input is selected, switch of
J5 is at I side; when voltage signal input is selected, switch of J5 is at U side.
J5-2 controls VF2 channel to select voltage/current signal input. When current signal input is selected, switch of
J5 is at I side; when voltage signal input is selected, switch of J5 is at U side.
2. Description for Circuit Wiring of Analog Output Terminal
J6 controls FM1 channel to select voltage/current signal input. When current signal input is selected, switch of J6
is at I side; when voltage signal input is selected, switch of J6 is at U side.
J7 controls FM1 channel to select voltage/current signal input. When current signal input is selected, switch of J7
is at I side; when voltage signal input is selected, switch of J7 is at U side.
3. Description for Circuit Wiring of Digital Input Terminal
Shielded Cable or Shielded Twisted Pair should be used for digital input at the maximum possibility to avoid
interference from external signal and the wire distance should be less than 50 meters.
(1) E100 and E180 Series
The wiring diagram on digital input circuit control panel is as below
OP
1000pF
DI1
1.2K 1.2K
1000pF
DI2
1.2K 1.2K
40
 Dry Contact Common Cathode Wiring Method
Adopt internal power Adopt external power
24V and must be 24V and disconnect
shorted with OP with OP
Frequency inverter
Frequency inverter
Control Panel
Control Panel
Internal supply
power 10V-30V
 Dry Contact Common Anode Wiring Method
External supply
inverter
power 10V-30V
inverter
Control Panel
Control Panel
Frequency
Frequency
Adopt internal power
24V and disconnect with Adopt external
OP, and OP is shorted power 24V and
with COM disconnect with OP
 Leaking-type Wiring Method

Adopt external power 24V
Adopt internal power 24V and disconnect with OP
and be shorted with OP Frequency inverter
Frequency inverter
Control Panel
External Controller
Signal Signal
External Controller
Control Panel
Internal supply
power
 Source-type Wiring Method

Adopt internal power 24V Adopt external power 24V
and P24V must be shorted and disconnect with OP
with OP
Frequency inverter
Frequency inverter
External Controller
Internal
External Controller
supply
Control Panel
power
Control Panel
Signal 10V-30V Signal
OP is shorted with
COM
41
(2) E102 Series
P24V
Frequency inverter
1000pF
DI1
1.2K 1.2K
Control Panel
1000pF
DI2
1.2K 1.2K
The wiring diagram on digital input Wiring method

circuit control panel is as below
4. Description for Circuit Wiring of Multi-functional Output Terminal

 AC Circuit
The AC Circuit can only be used for multi-functional relay output terminal. If it is to drive inductive load (e.g.
electromagnetic relay and contactor), the surge voltage absorber shall be installed, e.g. RC Absorber (the leakage
current shall be less than the holding current of controlled contactor or relay), as shown in the figure below:
Contactor or Relay Coil
Multi-functional Relay
Output Terminal
RC Resistance-capacitance
Absorption Circui
R: 100~500Ω
C:0.1~0.2μF
 DC Circuit
The DC Circuit can not only be used for multi-functional open collector output terminal (attention for wiring
polarity), but for multi-functional relay output terminal. If it is to drive DC Magnetic Circuit, the fly-wheel diode
(attention for polarity), as shown in the figure below:
Contactor or Relay Coil
Multi-functional
Output Terminal
DC Absorption
Circuit
Internal P24V Power Supply or
External P24V Power Supply
42
5. Description for Circuit Wiring of Impulse Output Terminal (E102 invalid)
When the function code is P2.1.20=0, Terminal YO/FMP is used as Impulse Output Terminal. The default circuit
is passive impulse output. If the active impulse is required to output, the users need to match the power (internal
power or external power of the frequency inverter available) and pull-up resistor. Note: allowable limit of
internal circuit: DC48V 50mA below
Dotted line is user configuration, the output

is passive pulsewithout this part.
Power supply
Power supply
Pulse output
E Series
frequency
inverter Resistor
3.5 Grounding
1. Grounding resistance value:
200V level: 100Ω or value below it
2. Prevent E frequency inverter, welding machine, motor or other huge current electrical equipment from
earthing. Ensure all earthing lines and wires of huge current electrical equipment are separately laid inside the
pipe.
3. Please use approved grounding wire of which length should be as shorter as possible.
4. When several E frequency inverters are used in parallel, please ground the device as shown by Figure (a),
instead of Figure (c) which may form a loop.
5. Grounding of frequency inverters and motor can be connected as per Figure (d).
(a) Correct (b) Incorrect (c) Non-recommended
(d) Correct (e) Non-recommended
6. Connection inspection:
Please perform following items if installation and connection are completed.
If connection is correct.
If stub or screw remains in device.
If screws are fastened firmly.
If bare conductor on terminal contacts with other terminals.
43
Chapter 4 Keyboard Operation and Running

4.1 Option of operating mode
E Series Frequency inverters provide 3 control modes, including keyboard operation, terminal operation and
communication operation. The user can select relative control mode as per onsite circumstances and working
requirements. See 7.1 for specific selection.
4.2 Test run and inspection

4.2.1 Precautions and inspection before test run
1. Input power can be connected only after front lid is installed. Do not remove external lid
when powered, otherwise it may lead to electric shock.
2. Do not get close to the frequency inverter or the load when selecting re-start because it
may suddenly restart after being stopped just a moment ago. (Even though the frequency
inverter can restart, its mechanical system can safeguard individual safety) otherwise it may
Dangerous cause hurt to human body.
3. Because function setting can defunction the stop button, it is required to install an
independent emergency button; otherwise it may cause hurt to human body.
1. Do not touch the radiator or resistor because its temperature is very high; otherwise it may
lead to burn.
2. Because low speed can be easily changed to high speed, it is required to confirm safe
working scope of the motor and mechanical equipment before operation; otherwise it may
cause hurt to human body and damage to equipment.
Attention 3. If necessary, separately install a contracting brake; otherwise it may cause hurt to human
body.
4. Do not change connection during operation; otherwise the equipment or frequency
inverter may be damaged.
For ensuring operation safety, please relieve mechanical connector before first operation to separate motor from
mechanical equipment and prevent from dangerous. Please perform following inspection before test run:
A. If connection between lead and terminal is correct.
B. If lead thrum cause short circuit.
C. If screw terminal is fastened firmly.
D. If motor is installed firmly.
4.2.2 Test run

After preparation, connect to power supply and inspect if frequency frequency inverter works normally.
After connected to power supply, indicator of number keyboard is luminous.
Please cut off power supply immediately if any problem abovementioned occurs.
4.2.3 Operating inspection

Please verify following items during operation:
A. If motor rotates smoothly.
B. If rotation direction of motor is correct.
C. If abnormal vibration or noise occurs accompanying with operation of motor.
D. If acceleration and deceleration are smooth.
E. If current match with load value.
F. If LED state indicator and number keyboard displays correctly.
44
4.3 Operating method of keyboard.

4.3.1 Keys on keyboard and their functions
(1) E100 and E102 Series LED Keyboard
Running State and Unit Display
1. Display the setting value of

When use the parameters to every function code
set the mode, read and store 2. Output monitoring value
the setting parameters Multifunction Key
1. Switch display mode Potentiometer adjusts the
2. Cancel data frequency
modification 1. Monitoring mode and scroll display of
the data
1. Function Code Option 2. When selecting and setting the
parameters, move the position of the data
2. Data +/- Setting modification
3. When presetting the
keyboard frequency, set the Stop/Fault Reset Key
frequency +/-
Run Key
Installation Dimension of Operation Keyboard Function of Indicator
NO Name Description of Function

When rotating in the forward direction,
the indicator lights up, but when
1 FWD
rotating in the backward direction, the
indicator doesn’t work,
When the parameter identification
function operates, the light flickers.
2 TUNE
The light is normally on at torque
control mode
The frequency inverter lights up under
3 RUN
running state
4 V Indicate voltage value
5 A Indicate current value
6 Hz Indicate frequency
7 V-%-A Indicate percentage
A-RPM
8 Indicate rotating speed
-Hz
Installation dimension of Keyboard Booth:99*70mm Outer dimesion of Keyboard Booth: 107*80mm
45
(2) E180 series keypad
1. Display the setting value

of every function code
2. Output monitoring value
Running State and Unit
Display
Potentiometer adjusts the

frequency
2. Cancel data modification
When use the parameters to set
the mode, read and store the
setting parameters
1. Function Code Option Run Key
2. Data +/- Setting
3. When presetting the keyboard Multifunction Key
frequency, set the frequency +/-
Stop/Fault Reset Key
1. Monitoring mode and scroll
display of the data
2. When selecting and setting the
parameters, move the position of the
data modification

When rotating in the forward direction, the
1 FWD indicator lights up, but when rotating in the
backward direction, the indicator doesn’t work,
2 RUN The frequency inverter lights up under running state
7 A-RPM-Hz Indicate rotating speed
Note: E180 series LED keypad is equipped by default on the

E180 series inverter type 1, 2 and 3.
46
(3) E180 series primary keypad
Running State and

Unit Display
1. Display the setting value

of every function code
2. Output monitoring value
Potentiometer adjusts the

1. Switch display mode frequency
when use the parameters to
set the mode, read and store
the setting parameters
Run Key
1. Function Code Option
2. Data +/- Setting Multifunction Key
3. When presetting the keyboard
frequency, set the frequency +/-
Monitoring mode and scroll
display of the data
When selecting and setting the
parameters, move the position
of the data modification

When rotating in the forward
direction, the indicator lights up,
1 FWD but when rotating in the
backward direction, the indicator
doesn’t work,
When the parameter
identification function operates,
2 TUNE the light flickers. The light is
normally on at torque control
mode
The frequency inverter lights up
3 RUN
under running state
8 A-RPM-Hz Indicate rotating speed
Note: E180 series LED primary keypad is equipped by default on the E100 and E102 series inverter type 5
and above ,and default on the E180 series inverter type 4 and above.
47
(4) E180 series LCD keypad
Running Frequency
Set Frequency Monitoring window

displays four lines at most
Running Current
Output Voltage
1. Switch display mode

2. Cancel data modification Multifunction Key
when use the parameters to set the mode,
read and store the setting parameters
1. Function Code Option
2. Data +/- Setting 1. Monitoring mode and scroll display of the data
3. When presetting the 2. When selecting and setting the parameters,
keyboard frequency, set the move the position of the data modification
frequency +/-
Multifunction Key

Run Key
Statement: the maximum four lines can be simultaneously displayed under surveillance screen. Specific displayed
contents are determined by Function Code P5.0.06~P5.0.13 (Details refer to the Description for P5.0.06~P5.0.13).
Press Key >> and select one line. If the parameter attribute is writable, press Key ENTER and directly enter into
parameter modification page, after completing the modification, press ENTER and return to surveillance screen.
Note: E180 series LCD keypad is optional on the E180 series inverter type 1, 2 and 3.
48
(5) E180 series primary keypad
Running Frequency
Set Frequency
Monitoring window
Running Current displays four lines at most
Output Voltage
When use the parameters to set the mode,

1. Switch display mode read and store the setting parameters
Multifunction Key
1. Monitoring mode and scroll
1. Function Code Option display of the data
2. Data +/- Setting 2. When selecting and setting the
3. When presetting the parameters, move the position of the
keyboard frequency, set the data modification
frequency +/-
Running Indicator
Run Key
Note: E180 series LCD primary keypad is optional on the E180 series inverter type 4 and above.
49
4.3.2 Data Monitoring Mode

1. Cycle Monitor Mode
In Monitor Mode, press Key >> per time and change one display item to check current state information of the
frequency inverter
Press Key ＞＞ Press Key ＞＞
LED Shutdown LED Shutdown
Monitoring Content 1 Monitoring Content 2
Press Key ＞＞
LED Shutdown Monitoring Content 3
. .
LED Shutdown Monitoring Content 16
In shut-down state, the contents for 16 downtimes can be cycled at most, and specific contents shown in the cycle
shall be determined by Function Code P5.0.05 (Details refer to the Description for P5.0.05)
Press Key ＞＞
LED Run Monitoring Press Key ＞＞
LED Run Monitoring Content 2
Content 1
Press Key ＞＞
. .
Under running state, the contents for 32 running surveillance can be cycled at most, and specific contents shown
in the cycle shall be determined by Function Code P5.0.02 and P5.0.03 (Details refer to the Description for
P5.0.02 and P5.0.03).
2. Fault/Alarm Monitor Mode
A. Under state of running monitor, the unit should display information relating to fault and warning if fault and
alarm occurs.
B. Reset fault by press STOP/RESET if fault disappears.
C. Please cut off power supply and reset the unit if serious fault occurs.
D. Keyboard should display fault code continuously until fault is eliminated (refer to Chapter IX).
4.3.3 Use of Multi- Function Key JOG

Upon the demand of the users, set Function Code P5.0.00 and realize the definition of the users to Function Key
JOG, and the Key JOG can choose dead and forward rotation jogging running, reverse rotation jogging running
and switch between forward rotation and reverse rotation, in which forward rotation jogging running and reverse
rotation jogging running are valid under any running control, and the switch between forward rotation and reverse
rotation is only valid under keyboard control mode.
50
4.3.4 Parameter check and set methods (using digital keyboard)

Running under monitoring
Example: the following is an example to change value
of P0.0.10 from 010.0 to 016.1:
Press down MODE key to Display set frequency 50.00Hz; Press
Parameter setting mode, the 1 50.00 MODE key to enter parameter setting
keyboard shall display mode
parameter code, like Parameter P0.0.00 appears, at the same
P0.0.00 time the pointer points to the last
2 P0.0.00 digital bit “0” and twinkles. Press >>
to select parameter code to set; press
Press>>key to move the △,▽key to move the data bit.
cursor; press △, ▽ to Press △,▽,>> to change value
change parameter code, for 3 P0.0.10
displayed to P0.0.10, the ENTER
example, change to P0.0.01 Check whether factory-set, value of
the parameter is 010.0; at the same
4 010.0
time the pointer points to the last
Press ENTER key one time digital bit “0”.
to display current value of Press △,▽,>> to change value
5 016.0
the parameter, for example: displayed to 016.1, then ENTER.
0 Data storage writes in 016.0; the
parameter displays that the
acceleration time is changed to 016.0
Press △, ▽, >> to 6 P0.0.12
from 010.0, and then it is to return to
change value of the the parameter that displays P0.0.12 at
parameter, for instance, this time
change to 1; Press ENTER If directly press MODE instead of
to confirm, if do not ENTER is step 5, the keyboard shall
change, press MODE key to 7 P0.0.10 return to display P0.0.10, and the data
return changed is not stored. acceleration
times is still 010.0.
Then press MODE again return to
Press ENTER to confirm 8 50.00 running under monitoring mode to
the change and return to display the set frequency.
parameter display state
P0.0.02 (after confirmed,
parameter code shall
automatically increase by
1); at this time, value of
parameter P0.0.01 has been
changed to 1.
Press MODE once to return

to monitoring mode.
Note: And it is impossible to modify data under following conditions.

1.It is impossible to adjust parameter during operation of frequency inverter. (Refer to function sheet)
2.Start parameter protection in P5.0.18 (parameter write-in protection)
51
4.4 Function Code Display Mode

E Series Frequency inverter provides three kinds of Function Code Display Modes: Basic Mode, User Mode and
Verification Mode.
 Basic Mode (P0.0.01=0)
In basic mode, the function code has the prefix with ‘P’. At this time, the Function Code P5.0.17 determines what
parameters of the function codes are specifically displayed. Its ones, tens, hundreds and thousands respectively
correspond to each function code group. Refer to the following table for explanation of specific meaning.
Function Code Setting scope Explanation
0 Only display basic parameter group
Ones
1 Display the menus at all levels
0 Don’t display Group P7
Tens 1 Display Group P7
Function parameter displays the
2 Reserve
Option of P5.0.17
0 Don’t display verification group
Hundreds
1 Display verification group
0 Don’t display code group
Thousands
1 Display code group
 User Mode (P0.0.01=1)

Only display customization parameters of user function and use Function Code of Group P7.0 to determine what
parameters of the function codes (with maximum quantity is 30) are specifically displayed by the frequency
inverter. In user mode, the function code has the prefix with ‘U’.
Function Code Setting scope Explanation

P7.0.00 U0.0.01 When the parameter of function code is
U0.0.00~UX.X.XX (except set, it is deemed that this function code
Function parameter ……
for group P7 and P8) is selected as user customization
displays the Option of
function code. 30 parameters of
Group P7.0 U0.0.00~UX.X.XX (except
P7.0.29 function codes can be selected and set at
for group P7 and P8)
most.
 Verification Mode (P0.0.01=2)

Only display the modified parameters (in case of any difference of function code between reference value and
factory set value, it is deemed that the parameters are changed), the function code has the prefix with ‘C in
verification mode.
52
Chapter 5 Tables of Function Parameters

Description for Tables of Function Parameters
1. Function parameters of E Series Frequency inverter are divided into 9 groups as per the functions. Each
group includes several sub-groups and each sub-group includes several function codes, which can be set with
different values.
2. P××.×× in function sheet or other section of the manual denotes “××” function code of sort “××”; For
example, “P0.0.01” denotes function code 01 of sort P0.0.
3. Content explanation of function sheet:
Column 1 “Function Code”: serial number of function code parameter; Column 2 “Function Name”: full name of
function parameter; Column 3 “Setting Scope”: scope of valid set value of function parameters; Column 4
“Factory Setting”: original set value of function parameters when delivered out of the factory; Column 5 “Change
Limit”: change property of function parameters (that is, whether change and changing conditions are allowed);
Column 6 “Reference Page”: page refers to detailed decription of function code parameters.
Modification limit of parameter is explained as below:
“☆”: Denote that the set value of the parameter is modifiable under stop or running state of the frequency
inverter;
“★”: Denote that the set value of the parameter is not modifiable under running state of the frequency inverter;
“●”: Denote that the value of the parameter is actual testing value and not modifiable;
“○”: Denote that this parameter is allowed to be modified only at P5.0.18=2
“▲”: Denote that this function in E100 Series is invalid and not allowed to be modified
“△”: Denote that this function in E102 Series is invalid and not allowed to be modified.
Explanation 1:
E102 Series is a simple version of E100. The hardware of E102 is simpfied, so the invalid function on E100 Series
is also invalid on E102. But the performance and function (without hardware support is not considered) of E102
are same as E100 Series
Explanation 2:
Please read the manual carefully while modifying parameter of frequency inverter. And contact our Company for
any problem occurs during operation. No data submits to customer modification, violation of it maybe causes
serious fault, or significant property loss, of which consequences should be born by User!
53
5.1 P0 Group - Basic Function

Refere
Function Factory set Modifica
Function name Setting scope nce
code value tion limit
page
Group P0.0 Basic Group
Type of Frequency 1. G Type (General type)
P0.0.00 Machine type ○
inverter 2. P Type (Light-load type)
0: Basic Mode (Prefix with ‘P’) ☆/○(Only the
1: User Mode (Prefix with ‘U’) above 1.54
version can be
P0.0.01 Display Mode 0
2: Verification Mode（Prefix with modified
when
‘C’） P5.0.18=2) 86
0: V/F Control Set default
1: Open-loop Vector Control (SVC) value
P0.0.02 Control Mode 2: Closed-loop Vector Control according to ★
(Invalid E100) software
3: Intelligent selection 0 or 1 (this function is
unavailable when unable to be set as 3) version
0: Keyboard Control
Option of operation
P0.0.03 1: Terminal Control 0 ☆
control mode
2: Communication Control
0: Keyboard Reference (No
Power-off Memory)
1: Keyboard Reference (Power-off
Memory)
2: Keyboard Potentiometer
Reference
3: External Terminal VF1 Reference
87
Option of A Frequency
P0.0.04 5: PULS Reference (DI6) 02 ★
Source
6: Multiplex Directive Reference
7: Simple PLC Reference
8: PID Control Reference
9: Communication Reference
10: Operation Result 1
Keyboard Frequency
P0.0.05 000.00~ maximum frequency 050.00 ☆
Reference
0: Default Direction
88
1: Negation of Direction
P0.0.06 Running Direction 0 ☆
2: Determined by multi-funtion
input terminal
P0.0.07 Maximum frequency 050.00Hz～320.00Hz 050.00 ★
Lower frequency ~ highest
P0.0.08 Upper frequency 050.00 ★ 89
frequency
P0.0.09 Lower frequency 000.00~ Upper frequency 000.00 ☆
0: Running at lower limit frequency
1: Stop
Lower frequency 2: Zero-speed Running
P0.0.10 0 ☆
operation mode 3: Standby(this function is
unavailable when unable to be set as 90
3)
P0.0.11 Acceleration Time 0000.0～6500.0s Machine type ☆
P0.0.12 Deceleration Time 0000.0～6500.0s Machine type ☆
54
Function Factory set Modificati Reference

Function name Setting scope
code value on limit page
0: Common Motor
P0.0.13 Type of Motor 1: Variable Frequency Motor 0 ★
2: Synchronous Motor
P0.0.14 Motor rated power 0000.1kW ~ 1000.0kW Machine type ★
Motor rated
P0.0.15 000.01Hz ~ Highest frequency 050.00 ★
frequency
P0.0.16 Motor rated voltage 0001V～2000V Machine type ★
000.01A ~ 655.35A (power inverter <
75kW)
P0.0.17 Motor rated current Machine ★
0000.1A ~ 6553.5A (power
inverter≥75kW)
Motor Rated Rotating
P0.0.18 00001rpm～65535rpm Machine ★
Speed
00.001  ~ 65.535  (power
Stator resistance of inverter≥75kW)
P0.0.19 Machine ★
asynchronous motor 0.0001  ~ 6.5535  (power
inverter≥75kW) 91
00.001  ~ 65.535  (power
Rator resistance of inverter≥75kW)
P0.0.20 Machine ★
asynchronous motor 0.0001  ~ 6.5535  (power
inverter≥75kW)
000.01mH ~ 655.35mH (power
Leakage inductance
inverter≥75kW）
P0.0.21 of asynchronous Machine ★
00.001mH ~ 65.535mH (power
motor
inverter≥75kW)
0000.1mH ~ 6553.5mH (power
Mutual inductance of inverter≥75kW)
P0.0.22 Machine ★
asynchronous motor 000.01mH ~ 655.35mH (power
inverter≥75kW)
000.01A～Motor rated current (power
Non-load current of inverter≥75kW)
P0.0.23 Machine ★
asynchronous motor 0000.1A～Motor rated current (power
inverter≥75kW)
00: No action
01: Static identification
02: Complete identification
Parameter
P0.0.24 11: Synchronous motor on-load 00 ★
Identification Control
identification
12: Synchronous motor non-load
92
identification
Control mode display
(this function code is 0: V/F control
1: Open loop vector control
P0.0.25 not displayed when 2: Closed loop vector control (E100、 0 ●
P0.0.02 is unable to E102 invalid)
be set as 3)
55
Modifi Refere
Function Factory set
Function name Setting scope cation nce
code value
limit page
P0.1 Group: Expansion Group
0: Frequency Source A
1: Frequency Source B
2: Frequency Source A+B
3: Frequency Source A-B
Option of 4: Max. Value of A & B
P0.1.00 0 ☆ 92
Frequency Source 5: Min. Value of A & B
6: Standby Frequency Source 1
8: Switch of Terminal among the above 8
kinds
0: Keyboard Reference (No Power-off
Memory)
1: Keyboard Reference (Power-off Memory)
2: Keyboard Potentiometer Reference
Option of 5: PULS Reference (DI6)
P0.1.01 Frequency Source 6: Multiplex Directive Reference 00 ★
B 7: Simple PLC Reference
13: Operation Result 4 93
Adjustment
Volume of:
P0.1.02 000%～150% 100% ☆
Frequency Source
B at superposition
0: Digital Reference (P0.0.08)
Upper Limit 4: PULS Reference (DI6)
P0.1.03 0 ★
Frequency Source 5: Communication Reference
Upper Limit
P0.1.04 000.00~Highest Frequency 000.00 ☆
Frequency Offset
Keyboard
Reference 94
0: No Memory
P0.1.05 frequency 0 ☆
1: Memory
Shut-down
Memory Selection
Keyboard
Reference
frequency 0: Running Frequency
P0.1.06 0 ★
Action 1: Reference frequency
Benchmark at
running 95
Benchmark
0: Highest Frequency
frequency of
P0.1.07 1: Reference frequency 0 ★
accelerating and
2: 100Hz
Deceleration time
56
Function Factory Modificatio Reference

code set value n limit page
P0.1.08 Jogging running frequency 000.00~Highest Frequency 002.00 ☆
P0.1.09 Jogging Acceleration time 0000.0s～6500.0s 0020.0 ☆
P0.1.10 Jogging Deceleration time 0000.0s～6500.0s 0020.0 ☆
Machine
P0.1.11 Acceleration time 2 0000.0s～6500.0s ☆
type
Machine
P0.1.12 Deceleration time 2 0000.0s～6500.0s ☆
type
Machine 95
type
Machine
type
Machine
type
Machine
type
Frequency Switch Point
P0.1.17 between Acceleration time 1 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 000.00 ☆
and Acceleration time 2
Frequency Switch Point
P0.1.18 between Deceleration time 000.00Hz～Highest Frequency 000.00 ☆
1 and Deceleration time 2
0: Straight Line 96
Acceleration and
P0.1.19 1: Curve S 1 0 ★
Deceleration Mode
2: Curve S 2
Percentage of Starting Phase
P0.1.20 000.0%～100.0% 030.0 ★
of Curve S
Percentage of Ending Phase
P0.1.21 000.0%～100.0% 030.0 ★
of Curve S
P0.1.22 Hopping Frequency 1 000.00Hz～Highest Frequency 000.00 ☆
P0.1.23 Hopping Frequency 2 000.00Hz～Highest Frequency 000.00 ☆
P0.1.24 Hopping Frequency scope 000.00Hz～Highest Frequency 000.00 ☆
P0.1.25 Jogging Priority 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0 ☆
0: ABZ Incremental Encoder
1: UVW Incremental Encoder
(Invalid E100、E102) 97
2: Rotary Transformer (Invalid
P0.1.26 Type of Encoder 00 △/★
E100、E102)
3~9: Reservation
10: Distance Control (Open
Collector)
P0.1.27 Line Number of Encoder 00001～65535 01024 △/★
0: Forward Direction
P0.1.28 ABZ phase sequence 0 △/★
1: Reverse Direction
Encoder Disconnection No action
P0.1.29 00.0 △/★
Testing Time 00.1s～10.0s
00.001  ～ 65.535  (inverter
Stator Resistance of power＜75kW) Machine
P0.1.30 ▲/★
Synchronous motor 0.0001  ～6.5535  type
(inverter power＜75kW)
Back EMF of Synchronous Machine
P0.1.31 0000.0V～6553.5V ▲/★ 98
motor type
0: Forward Direction Machine
P0.1.32 UVW Phase Sequence ▲/★
1: Reverse Direction type
Machine
P0.1.33 UVW Encoder Angle 000.0～359.9 ▲/★
type
Pole-pairs of Rotary Machine
P0.1.34 00001～65535 ▲/★
Transformer type
Switching frequency point
P0.1.35 of deceleration time 2 and 000.00Hz ~ max. frequency 0.00 ☆
deceleration time 3
P0.1.36 Retain -- -- --
57
Function Factory Modificatio Reference
code set value n limit page
P0.1 Group: Extension Group (Dedicated for Synchronous Motor 6.xx Version)
0.01mH ~ 655.35mH (frequency
D axis inductance of converter power ≤55 kW) Tuning
P0.1.37
synchronous motor 0.01mH~655.35mH (frequency Parameter ★
converter power > 55 kW)
0.01mH~655.35mH (frequency
Q axis inductance of converter power ≤55 kW) Tuning
P0.1.38
synchronous motor 0.01mH~655.35mH (frequency Parameter ★
converter power > 55 kW)
Max. output current of
P0.1.39
frequency converter
100.0%~200.0% 180.0 ★
99
P0.1.40 Flux-weakening method 0~3 1 ★
Max. flux-weakening
P0.1.41
current
0.0%~300.0% 110.0 ★
P0.1.42 Over-modulation coefficient 100%~120% 110 ★
P0.1.43 Voltage margin 0%~100% 5 ★
Flux-weakening
P0.1.44
proportionality coefficient
0~50 0 ★
Flux-weakening integral
P0.1.45
coefficient
0~50 5 ★
P0.1.46 Manufacturer parameters ★
Magnetic pole position 0: Identification before each run
P0.1.48 identification method before 1: Identification before first run 0 ★
the operation 2: No identification
Identification current of
P0.1.49
magnetic pole position
30%~150% 80 ★
Low-speed carrier wave for
P0.1.52 open loop vector control of 0.5-max. carrier wave 1.5 ★ 100
synchronous motor
Switching frequency for
low-speed carrier wave of
P0.1.53
open loop vector of
0%~100% 50 ★
synchronous motor
Influence current
P0.1.54 compensation of dead-time 0%~100% 30 ★
compensation
P0.1.55 Velocity filtering coefficient 0~1000 100 ★
5.2 Group P1 - Motor Control Parameter
Sort P1.0: Basic Group
0: Straight Line
1: Multi-point Broken Line
P1.0.00 V/F Curve Mode 2: Square V/F Curve 1 0 ★ 100
3: Square V/F Curve 2
00.0% (Automatic Torque
Machine
P1.0.01 Torque Boost Boost) ☆
type
00.1%~30.0% 101
Cutoff Frequency of 000.00Hz~Highest
P1.0.02 050.00
Torque Boost Frequency
58
V/F Slip Compensation
P1.0.03 000.0%～200.0% 000.0 ☆ 101
Gain
Velocity Loop
P1.0.04 001～100 030 ☆
Proportional Gain 1
Velocity Circulation
P1.0.05 00.01～10.00 00.50 ☆
Integral Time 1
P1.0.06 Switching Frequency 1 000.00Hz～P1.0.09 005.00 ☆
Velocity Loop
P1.0.07 001～100 020 ☆
Proportional Gain 2
Velocity Circulation
P1.0.08 00.01～10.00 01.00 ☆
Integral Time 2 102
P1.0.09 Switching Frequency 2 P1.0.06~Highest Frequency 010.00 ☆
0: Direct Start
P1.0.10 Start Mode 1: Speed Tracking Mode 0 ☆
2: Brake and Restart
0: Start from Shutdown
Frequency
P1.0.11 Speed Tracking Mode 1: Start from Zero Speed 0 ★
2: Start from Highest
Frequency
P1.0.12 Start Frequency 00.00Hz～10.00Hz 00.00 ☆
Hold Time of Start
P1.0.13 000.0s～100.0s 000.0 ★
Frequency
Starting DC Brake
P1.0.14 000%～100% 000 ★
Current
P1.0.15 Starting DC Brake Time 000.0s～100.0s 000.0 ★
0: Stop by Deceleration
P1.0.16 Stop Mode 0 ☆ 103
1: Free Stop
Stop DC Braking Initial 000.00Hz ～ Highest
P1.0.17 000.00 ☆
Frequency Frequency
Stop DC Braking Waiting
P1.0.18 000.0s～100.0s 000.0 ☆
Time
P1.0.19 Stop DC Braking Current 000%～100% 000 ☆
P1.0.20 Stop DC Braking Time 000.0s～100.0s 000.0 ☆
P1.0.21 Braking Use Rate 000%～100% 100 ☆
Machine
P1.0.22 Carrier Frequency 00.5kHz～16.0kHz ☆
type
0: Rotate at running
1: Continuous Running
P1.0.23 Fan Control 0 ★
2: Control based on
Temperature
0: Prohibition 104
1: Curve 1
P1.0.24 Motor Overload Protection 1 ☆
2: Curve 2
3: Curve 3
Motor Overload Protection
P1.0.25 00.20～10.00 01.00 ☆
Level
Motor Overload Alarm
P1.0.26 050%～100% 080 ☆
System
Group P1.1: Extension Group
Broken Line V/F Point 1
P1.1.00 000.00Hz～P1.1.02 000.00 ★
Frequency
P1.1.01 000.0%～100.0% 000.0 ★
Voltage
P1.1.02 P1.1.00～P1.1.04 000.00 ★
Frequency
105
P1.1.03 000.0%～100.0% 000.0 ★
Voltage
P1.1.04 P1.1.02~Motor rated frequency 000.00 ★
Frequency
P1.1.05 000.0%～100.0% 000.0 ★
Voltage
P1.1.06 V/F Overexcited Gain 000～200 120 ☆ 106
59
Function Factory Modification Reference

code set value limit page
3: Multiplex Directive Terminal
Reference
4: PULS Reference (DI6)
Vector Control Torque Upper
P1.1.07 5: Communication Reference 00 ☆ 106
Frequency
6: MIN (VF1, VF2)
7: MAX (VF1, VF2)
P1.1.08 Torque Upper Limit Reference 000.0%～200.0% 150.0 ☆
P1.1.09 Inversion Control Enable 0: Allow 1: Prohibit 0 ☆
P1.1.10 Forward and Reverse Dead Time 0000.0s～3000.0s 0000.0 ☆ 107
0: Running
P1.1.11 Power-on Running Selection 0 ☆
1: Not Running
P1.1.12 Droop Control 00.00Hz～10.00Hz 00.00 ☆
Speed/Torque Control Mode 0: Speed Control 108
P1.1.13 0 ★
Selection 1: Torque Control
1: External Terminal VF1
Reference
Reference
Reference
P1.1.14 Torque Reference Source 5: Communication Reference 00 ★ 108
6: MIN (VF1, VF2)
7: MAX (VF1, VF2)
12: Standby Torque Source 1
P1.1.15 Torque Digital Reference -200.0%～200.0% 150.0 ☆
Torque Control FWD
P1.1.16 000.00Hz～Highest Frequency 050.00 ☆ 109
Frequency Limit
Torque Control REV
P1.1.17 000.00Hz～Highest Frequency 050.00 ☆
Frequency Limit
P1.1.18 Torque Acceleration Time 0000.0s～6500.0s 0000.0 ☆
P1.1.19 Torque Deceleration Time 0000.0s～6500.0s 0000.0 ☆
P1.1 Group: Extension Group (Dedicated for Asynchronous Motor 1.5x Version)
VF oscillation suppression
P1.1.20
mode
1~4 1 ★
Response time of VF slip
P1.1.21
compensation
0-10.0s 0.5 ★
110
VF online torque
P1.1.22
compensation gain
0~200 150 ★
P1.1.23 Flux closed loop bandwidth 0-5.00HZ 2.00 ☆
P1.1.24 Manufacturer parameters ☆
P1.1.27 Retain
60
P1.1.28 Manufacturer parameters
Velocity filtering of open loop
P1.1.29
vector
0~100ms 15 ☆
P1.1.30 Over-modulation coefficient 100%~120% 105 ☆
P1.1.31 Manufacturer parameters ☆ 110
Response mode of open loop
P1.1.32
vector
0~2 1 ☆
P1.1.33 Retain ☆
P1.1.34 Tuning KP coefficient 1~200 100 ☆
P1.1.35 Tuning KI coefficient 1~200 100 ☆ 111
P1.1 Group: Extension Group (Dedicated for Asynchronous Motor 121.xx Version)
P1.1.20 Overcurrent stalling point 50%~200% 150 ★
0: Disable
P1.1.21 Overcurrent stalling enabling
1: Enable
1 ★
P1.1.22 Overcurrent stalling gain 0~100 20 ☆
Compensation coefficient of
P1.1.23
overcurrent stalling current
50%~200% 50 ★
Related
P1.1.24 Overvoltage stalling point 200.0V-800.0V to ★
model
0: Disable
P1.1.25 Overvoltage stalling enabling
1: Enable
1 ★
Overvoltage stalling
P1.1.26
frequency gain
0~100 30 ☆
Overvoltage stalling voltage
P1.1.27
gain
0~100 30 ☆
Upper limit of overvoltage
P1.1.28 stalling frequency 0-50Hz 5 ★
adjustment
P1.1.29 Oscillation suppression mode 1-4 1 ★
Response time of VF slip
P1.1.30
compensation
0-100 40 ★
VF online torque
P1.1.31
compensation gain
0-200 100 ★
61
5.3 Group P2 - Input/Output Terminal Function
Function Function name Setting scope Factory set Modificatio Refere
nce
code value n limit page
Group P2.0: Basic Group
P2.0.00 DI1Terminal O: No Function 01 △/★
Function 1: Forward (FWD)
P2.0.01 DI2 Terminal2: Reverse (REV) 02 ★
Function 3: Three-wire Running Control
DI3 Terminal4: Forward Jogging
P2.0.02 Function 5: Reverse Jogging 09 ★
DI4 Terminal6: Terminal UP
P2.0.03 Function 7: Terminal DOWN 10 ★
DI5 Terminal8: Free Stop
P2.0.04 Function 9: Multiplex Directive Terminal 1 11 ★
DI6 Terminal10: Multiplex Directive Terminal 2
P2.0.05 Function 11. Multiplex Directive Terminal 3 08 ★
DI7 Terminal12: Multiplex Directive Terminal 4
P2.0.06 Function 13: Fault Reset (RESET) 00 ▲/★
DI8 Terminal14: Running Pause
P2.0.07 Function 15: External Fault Input 00 ▲/★
DI9 Terminal16: Acceleration & Deceleration
P2.0.08 Function Time Selection Terminal 1 00 ▲/★
17: Acceleration & Deceleration 00 ▲/★
Time Selection Terminal 2
18: Frequency Source Selection
Terminal 1
Terminal 2
Terminal 3
21: Running Command Selection
Terminal 1
22: Running Command Selection
Terminal 2
23: UP/DOWN Reference Reset
24: Prohibition of Acceleration &
Deceleration
25: PID Pause
26: PLC State Reset
27: Wobbulating Pause 111
28: Counter Input
29: Counter Reset
30: Length Counting Input
31: Length Reset
32: Torque Control Prohibition
33: PULS Impulse Input
34: Immediate DC Brake
35: External Fault Normally-closed
P2.0.09 DI2 Terminal Input
Function 36: Frequency Modification Enable
37: PID Action Direction Negation
38: External Stop Terminal 1
39: External Stop Terminal 2
40: PID Integral Stop
41: PID Parameter Switch
42: Speed Control/Torque Control
Switch
43: Emergency Stop
44: Deceleration DC Brake
45: User-Defined Fault 1
46: User-Defined Fault 2
47: Running Time Reset
48: Timer Input Terminal 1
49: Timer Input Terminal 2
50: Timer Reset Terminal 1
51: Timer Reset Terminal 2
52: Encoder Phase A Input
53: Encoder Phase B Input
54: Distance Reset
55: Integral Computation Reset
56: User Function 1
57: User Function 2
58: User Function 3
59: User Function 4
60: Start by tracing its rpm is
prohibitied
62
Function Factory Modifica Reference

code set value tion limit page
P2.0.10 DI Filtering time 0.000s～1.000s 0.010 ☆
0: Two-line Type 1
External Terminal Running 1: Two- line Type 2
P2.0.11 0 ★
Control Mode 2: Three- line Type 1
3: Three-line Type 2
P2.0.12 UP/DOWN Terminal Change Rate 00.001Hz/s～65.535Hz/s 01.000 ☆
P2.0.13 Minimum Input of Curve 1 00.00V～P2.0.15 00.00 ☆ 115
Corresponding reference for
P2.0.14 -100.0%～100.0% 000.0 ☆
Minimum Input of Curve 1
P2.0.15 Maximum Input of Curve 1 P2.0.13～10.00V 10.00 ☆
P2.0.16 -100.0%～100.0% 100.0 ☆
Maximum Input of Curve 1
P2.0.17 VF1 Filtering time 00.00s～10.00s 00.10 ☆
P2.0.18 Minimum Input of Curve 2 00.00V～P2.0.20 00.00 ☆
P2.0.19 -100.0%～100.0% 000.0 ☆
Minimum Input of Curve 2
P2.0.20 Maximum Input of Curve 2 P2.0.18～10.00V 10.00 ☆
P2.0.21 -100.0%～100.0% 100.0 ☆
Maximum Input of Curve 2
P2.0.22 VF2 Filtering time 0.00s～10.00s 00.10 ☆
P2.0.23 Minimum Input of PULS 0.00kHz～ P2.0.25 000.00 ☆
P2.0.24 -100.0%～100.0% 000.0 ☆
Minimum Input of PULS
P2.0.25 Maximum Input of PULS P2.0.23～100.00kHz 050.00 ☆
P2.0.26 -100.0%～100.0% 100.0 ☆
Maximum Input of PULS
P2.0.27 PULS Filtering time 00.00s～10.00s 00.10 ☆
Expansion Card YO1 Function O: No Function
P2.0.28 00 ▲/☆
Selection 1: Frequency inverter under
P2.0.29 T1 Relay Function Selection Running 01 ☆
P2.0.30 T2 Relay Function Selection 2: Fault Stop Output 02 △ /☆
Expansion Card YO2 Function 3: Frequency Level Testing
P2.0.31 FDT1 Output 00 ▲/☆ 116
Selection
4: Frequency Reached
5: Zero-speed Running (no
output when shut down)
6: Motor Overload Pre-alarm
7: Frequency inverter
Overload Pre-alarm
8: Reference Count Value
Reached
9: Designated Count Value
YO Function Selection Reached
P2.0.32 (Use Terminal YO/FMP as 10: Length Reached 00 △ /☆
YO,i.e.P2.1.20=1) 11: PLC circulation cycle
completed
12: Accumulative Running
Time Reached
13: Frequency Limit
14: Torque Limit
15: Ready for Running
16: VF1>VF2
17: Upper Frequency Reached
63
Function Function name Setting scope Factory set Modificat Reference
code value ion limit page
18: Lower Frequency Reached (no output when
shut down)
19: Undervoltage state output
21: VF1 Output less than Lower Limit
22: VF1 Output more Upper Limit
23: Zero-speed Running 2 (also output when
shut down)
24: Accumulative Power-on Time Reached
25: Frequency Level Testing FDT2 Output
26: Frequency 1 Reaches Output
27: Frequency 2 Reaches Output
28: Current 1 Reaches Output
29: Current 2 Reaches Output
30: Timing Reaches Output
31: VF1 Input Overlimit
32: In Off-load
33: In Reverse Running
34: Zero-current State
35: Module Temperature Reached
36: Output Current Overlimit
37: Lower Frequency Reached (also output
when shut down) 117
38: Alarm Output
39: PLC Phase Completed
40: Current Running Time Reached
41: Fault Output (Not Output for Undervoltage)
42: Time of Timer 1 Reached
43: Time of Timer 2 Reached
44: Time of Timer 1 Reached but Time of Timer
2 not Reached
45: User Function 1
46: User Function 2
47: User Function 3
48: User Function 4
49: User Function 5
50: Synchronization Intermediate Relay M1
55: Distance over Zero
56: Distance Set value 1 Reached
57: Distance Set value 2 Reached
58: Operation Result 2 greater than 0
59: Operation Result 4 greater than 0
P2.0.33 Analog Output FM1 0: Running Frequency 00 ☆
Reference 1: Reference frequency
P2.0.34 Analog Output FM2 2: Output Current 01 △ /☆
Reference 3: Output Torque (Absolute Value of Torque)
4: Output Power
5: Output Voltage
6: Impulse Input
7: VF1 Voltage
8: VF1 Voltage
9: Keyboard Potentiometer Voltage
FMP Output Reference 10: Actual Length Value
11: Actual Counting Value
119
(Use Terminal △ /☆
P2.0.35 YO/FMP as FMP, 12: 13:
Communication Reference
Motor Speed
00
i.e.P2.1.20=0) 14: Output Current
15: Bus line voltage
16: Output Torque
P2.0.36 Analog FM1 Output -100.0%～100.0% 000.0 ☆
Offset
P2.0.37 Analog FM1 Output -10.00～10.00 01.00 ☆
Gains 120
P2.0.38 Analog FM2 Output -100.0%～100.0% 000.0 △ /☆
Offset
P2.0.39 Analog FM2 Output -10.00～10.00 01.00 △ /☆
Gains
64
Group P2.1: Extension Group
0: Active High Level
1: Active Low Level
Valid Model Selection Ones: DI1 (E102 invalid)
P2.1.00 1 of Terminal DI 1 Tens: DI2 00000 ★
Hundreds: DI3
Thousands: DI4
Ten Thousands: DI5 121
1: Active Low Level
Valid Model Selection Ones: DI6
P2.1.01 2 of Terminal DI Tens: DI7 (Invalid E100) 00000 ★
Hundreds: DI8 (Invalid E100)
Thousands: DI9 (Invalid E100)
Ten Thousands: DI10 (Invalid E100)
Ones: Curve selected for VF1
Tens: Curve selected for VF2
1: Curve 1 2: Curve 2
3: Curve 3 4: Curve 4
Hundreds: VF1 Input resolution
P2.1.02 Analog Input Curve Thousands: VF2 Input resolution 00021 ☆
Selection Ten Thousands: Keyboard Potentiometer input
resolution 121
0:00.01Hz 1:00.02Hz
2:00.05Hz 3:00.10Hz
4:00.20Hz 5:00.50Hz
6:01.00Hz(Keyboard Potentiometer is invalid)
Selection for Curve 0: Corresponding Min. Input Reference
P2.1.03 less than Min. 1: 0.0% H.00 ☆
Reference Ones: VF1
Tens: VF2
P2.1.04 Min. Input of Curve 3 00.00V～P2.1.06 00.00 ☆
Corresponding
P2.1.05 reference for Min. -100.0%～100.0% 000.0 ☆
Input of Curve 3
P2.1.06 Curve 3 Inflection P2.1.04～P2.1.08 03.00 ☆
Point 1 Input
Corresponding
P2.1.07 reference for Curve 3 -100.0%～100.0% 030.0 ☆
Inflection Point 1 Input
Point 2 Input
Corresponding
P2.1.10 Max. input of Curve 3 P2.1.08～10.00V 10.00 ☆
Corresponding
P2.1.11 reference for Max. -100.0%～100.0% 100.0 ☆
input of Curve 3
P2.1.12 Min. Input of Curve 4 00.00V～P2.1.14 00.00 ☆
Corresponding
P2.1.13 reference for Min. -100.0%～100.0% -100.0 ☆ 122
Input of Curve 4
Point 1 Input
Corresponding
P2.1.15 reference for Curve 4 -100.0%～100.0% -030.0 ☆
Point 2 Input
Corresponding
P2.1.18 Max. input of Curve 4 P2.1.16～10.00V 10.00 ☆
Corresponding
P2.1.19 reference for Max. -100.0%～100.0% 100.0 ☆
input of Curve 4
P2.1.20 YO/FMP Terminal 0: Impulse output (FMP) 1 △ /☆
Function 1: Open Collector Output (YO)
P2.1.21 Highest Frequency of 000.01KHz～100.00KHz 050.00 △ /☆ 123
FMP Output
65
0: Positive Logic
1: Negative Logic
Ones: YO(E102 invalid)
P2.1.22 Valid Sate of Multi-functional Tens: T1
Hundreds: T2(E102 invalid) 00000 ☆
Output Terminal Thousands: Expansion Card YO1 (Invalid
E100)
Ten Thousands: Expansion
Card YO2 (Invalid E100)
P2.1.23 VF1 Terminal Function as 00: Use as Normal Analog 00 ★
Digital Input 01 ~ 59: Digital Input Terminal Function 123
P2.1.24 VF2 Terminal Function as 00: Use as Normal Analog 00 ★
Digital Input 01~59: Digital Input Terminal Function
P2.1.25 Valid State Option of VF 1: Active Low Level 00 ★
Ones: VF1
Tens: VF2
P2.1.26 DI1 Delay (Invalid E102) 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 △ /☆
P2.1.27 DI2 Delay 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
P2.1.28 DI3 Delay 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
P2.1.29 YO Delay(Invalid E102) 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 △ /☆
P2.1.30 T1 Delay 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆ 124
P2.1.31 T2 Delay(Invalid E102) 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 △ /☆
P2.1 Group: Extension Group (asynchronous motor 1.35 version has this function)
DI1 ineffective delay (this
P2.1.32 function is unavailable when 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0 △/☆
unable to be set)
P2.1.33 function is unavailable when 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0 ☆ 124
unable to be set)
P2.1.34 function is unavailable when 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
unable to be set)
Group P2.2 Auxiliary Group
Accumulative Power-on
P2.2.00 00000h～65000h 00000 ☆
Reaches Reference Time
Accumulative Running
P2.2.01 00000h～65000h 00000 ☆ 124
Reaches Reference Time
The reference frequency
P2.2.02 000.0%～100.0% 000.0 ☆
reaches test width
P2.2.03 Frequency Test FDT1 000.00Hz～Highest Frequency 050.00 ☆
P2.2.04 FDT1 Lagged Value 000.0%～100.0% 005.0 ☆
125
P2.2.05 Frequency Test FDT2 000.00Hz～Highest Frequency 050.00 ☆
P2.2.06 FDT2 Lagged Value 000.0%～100.0% 005.0 ☆
Any reached frequency tested
value 1
Any reached frequency 1 test
P2.2.08 000.0%～100.0% 000.0 ☆
width
Any reached frequency tested
value 2
Any reached frequency 2 test 126
P2.2.10 000.0%～100.0% 000.0 ☆
width
000.0%～300.0%
P2.2.11 Zero Current Test Level (100.0% correspond to rated current of 005.0 ☆
motor)
Delay Time for Zero Current
P2.2.12 000.01s～600.00s 000.10 ☆
Test
Output Current Overlimit 00.0: No Test
P2.2.13 200.0 ☆
Value 000.1%～300.0%
Delay Time for Current
P2.2.14 000.00s～600.00s 000.00 ☆ 127
Overlimit Test
P2.2.15 Current Level Test 1 000.0%～300.0% 100.0 ☆
P2.2.16 Test Width of Current Level 1 000.0%～300.0% 000.0 ☆
66
P2.2.17 Current Level Test 2 000.0%～300.0% 100.0 ☆
P2.2.18 Test Width of Current Level 2 000.0%～300.0% 000.0 ☆
P2.2.19 VF1 Input Lower Limit 00.00V～P2.2.20 03.10 ☆
P2.2.20 VF1 Input Upper Limit P2.2.19～11.00V 06.80 ☆
128
Model Temperature Reaches
P2.2.21 000℃～100℃ 075 ☆
Reference
Current Running Reaches
P2.2.22 0000.0 min～6500.0 min 0000.0 ★
Reference Time
5.4 Group P3 - Programmable Function

0: End of Single Running and Stop
1: End of Single Running and Save
Simple PLC Running
P3.0.00 Final Value 0 ☆
Mode
3: Cycle N Times
P3.0.01 Cycle number(s), N 00000～65000 00000 ☆
129
Ones: Option of Power-off Memory
0: No Power-off Memory
Option of PLC Power-off 1: Power-off Memory
P3.0.02 00 ☆
Memory Tens: Stop Memory Selection
0: No Stop Memory
1: Stop Memory
P3.0.03 Phase Directive 0 -100.0%～100.0% 000.0 ☆
P3.0.04 Phase O Running Time 0000.0s～6500.0s 0000.0 ☆
P3.0.06 Phase 1 Running Time 0000.0s～6500.0s 0000.0 ☆
130
67
130
P3.0.35 Phase 0 attribution Ones: Acceleration & Deceleration Time H.000 ☆
P3.0.36 Phase 1 attribution Selection (Invalid Multiplex Directive) H.000 ☆
P3.0.37 Phase 2 attribution 0: Acceleration & Deceleration Time 1 H.000 ☆
P3.0.41 Phase 6 attribution Tens: Frequency Source Selection (Valid H.000 ☆
P3.0.42 Phase 7 attribution Multiplex Directive) H.000 ☆
P3.0.43 Phase 8 attribution 0: Current Phase Directive H.000 ☆
P3.0.44 Phase 9 attribution 1: Keyboard Potentiometer H.000 ☆
P3.0.45 Phase 10 attribution 2: Keyboard Frequency Reference H.000 ☆
3: VF1 Input
P3.0.46 Phase 11 attribution H.000 ☆
4: VF2 Input 131
P3.0.47 Phase 12 attribution 5: PULS Reference (DI6) H.000 ☆
P3.0.48 Phase 13 attribution 6: PID Reference H.000 ☆
P3.0.49 Phase 14 attribution 7: Operation Result 1 H.000 ☆
P3.0.50 Phase 15 attribution A: Operation Result 4 H.000 ☆
Hundreds unit: running direction
0: Default direction
1: Reversed direction
0: Second
Simple PLC Running
P3.0.51 1: Hour 0 ☆
Time Unit
2: Minute
Group P3.1: Expansion Group
0: Ineffective 1: Effective (min)
Timing Function
P3.1.00 2: Effective (h) (this function is 0 ★
Selection
unavailable when unable to be set as 2)
Fixed Running Time
P3.1.01 2: External Terminal VF2 Reference 0 ★
Selection
(Analog input range corresponds to
P3.1.02)
0000.0min/h~6500.0min/h (unit depends 131
P3.1.02 Fixed Running Time 0000.0 ★
on P3.1.00)
Wobbulating Reference 0: Relative to Reference frequency
P3.1.03 0 ☆
Mode 1: Relative to Highest Frequency
P3.1.04 Wobbulating Range 000.0%~100.0% 000.0 ☆
P3.1.05 Kicking Range 00.0%~50.0% 00.0 ☆
P3.1.06 Wobbulating Cycle 0000.1s~3000.0s 0010.0 ☆
Rise Time of
P3.1.07 Wobbulating Triangular 000.1%~100.0% 050.0 ☆
Wave
P3.1.08 Reference Length 00000m~65535m 01000 ☆
P3.1.09 Actual Length 00000m~65535m 00000 ☆
P3.1.10 Impulse Count per meter 0000.1~6553.5 0100.0 ☆
P3.1.11 Reference Count Value 00001~65535 01000 ☆
P3.1.12 Designated Count Value 00001~65535 01000 ☆ 132
P3.1.13 Distance Set value 1 -3200.0~3200.0 0000.0 ☆
P3.1.14 Distance Set value 2 -3200.0~3200.0 0000.0 ☆
Impulse Count per 000.00~600.00
P3.1.15 000.00 ☆
Distance
68
Function Factory set Modification Reference

code value limit page
Group P3.2: Built-in Logic PLC Function Group
0: the input of this relay is
determined by this Relay Control
Word A
1: the input of this relay is
determined by this Relay Control
Word B
Intermediate Delay Relay 2: the input of this relay is
P3.2.00 00000 ★
Control determined by this Relay Control
Word C
Ones: Relay 1 (M1)
Tens: Relay 2 (M2) 132
Hundreds: Relay 3 (M3)
Thousands: Relay 4 (M4)
Ten Thousands: Relay 5(M5)
0: Reference 0
1: Reference 1
Ones: M1
Intermediate Relay Control
P3.2.01 Tens: M2 00000 ☆
Word A
Hundreds: M3
Thousands: M4
Ten Thousands: M5
Intermediate Delay Relay Ones: Control Logic
P3.2.02 00000 ★
M1 Control Word B 0: Input 1
Intermediate Delay Relay 1: Input 1 and NOT
P3.2.03 2: Input 1 and Input 2 AND 00000 ★
M2 Control Word B
Intermediate Delay Relay 3: Input 1 and Input 2 OR
P3.2.04 4: Input 1 and Input 2 XOR 00000 ★
M3 Control Word B
Intermediate Delay Relay 5: the valid reference of Input 1 is
P3.2.05 valid 00000 ★
M4 Control Word B
the valid Reference of Input 2 is
invalid
6. Valid reference of Input 1 Rise
Edge is valid
Valid reference of Input 2 Rise
Edge is invalid
7: Reverse valid signal of Input 1
Rising Edge
8: Input 1 Rise Edge is valid and
output a impulse signal with
width of 200ms
9: Input 1 Rise Edge and Input
2 AND 133
Hundreds Tens：set the option for Input

1
Intermediate Delay Relay 0～9：DI1～DI10
P3.2.06 00000 ★
M5 Control Word B 10～14：M1～M5
15～16：VF1，VF2
17～19：Standby
20 ～ 79 ： Output Function 00~59
Corresponding to Multi-functional
Output Terminal
Ten Thousands Thousands ： set the
option for Input 2
0～9：DI1～DI10
10～14：M1～M5
15～16：VF1，VF2
17～19：Standby
20 ～ 59 ： Output Function 00~39
Corresponding to Multi-functional
Output Terminal
69
Function Factory set Modificatio Referenc
code Function name Setting scope value n limit e page
Intermediate Delay Relay
P3.2.07 M1 Control Word C Tens Ones:00~59 0000 ★
Intermediate Delay Relay Output Function 00~59
P3.2.08 M2 Control Word C Corresponding to Digital Input 0000 ★
Intermediate Delay Relay Terminal
P3.2.09 M3 Control Word C 0000 ★ 133
Thousands Hundreds
P3.2.10 Intermediate Delay Relay Output Function 00~59 0000 ★
M4 Control Word C Corresponding to
P3.2.11 Intermediate Delay Relay Multi-functional Output Terminal 0000 ★
M5 Control Word C
P3.2.12 M1 Connection Delay 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
Time
M2 Connection Delay
P3.2.13 Time 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
M3 Connection Delay
P3.2.14 Time 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
M4 Connection Delay
P3.2.15 Time 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
P3.2.16 M5 Connection Delay 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆

Time
P3.2.17 M1 Disconnection Delay 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
Time
M2 Disconnection Delay
P3.2.18 Time 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
P3.2.19 Time 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
P3.2.20 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
Time
P3.2.21 Time 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
0: Not Negation
1: Negation
Valid State Option of Ones: M1
P3.2.22 Intermediate Relay Tens: M2 00000 ☆
Hundreds: M3 134
Thousands: M4
Ten Thousands: M5
Ones: Timing Control 1 of Timer
Tens: Timing Control 2 of Timer
0: Timer Running
1: Controlled by Timer Input
Terminal 1
2: Negation Control of Timer
Input Terminal 1
3: Controlled by Timer Input
Terminal 2
4: Negation Control of Timer
P3.2.23 Internal Timer Control Input Terminal 2 00000 ☆
Word Hundreds: Timer 1 Reset Control
Thousands: Timer 2 Reset
Control
0: Controlled by Timer Reset
Terminal 1
1: Controlled by Timer Reset
Terminal 2
Ten Thousands: Timing Unit
0: Second
1: Minute
2: Hour
P3.2.24 Timing Time of Timer 1 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆
P3.2.25 Timing Time of Timer 2 0.0s～3600.0s 0000.0 ☆ 135
70
Function Function Factory set Modification Reference

Setting scope
code name value limit page
0: No Operation
1: Add Operation
2: Subtraction Operation
3: Multiply Operation
4: Division Operation
5: Greater than Judgment
Operation 6: Equal to Judgment
P3.2.26 H.0000 ☆
Module 7: Equal to or Greater than Judgment
8: Integration
9~F: Reservation
Ones: Operation 1
Tens: Operation 2
Hundreds: Operation 3
Thousands: Operation 4
0: Operate the Setting Coefficient by
multiplication without decimal
multiplication with one decimal
multiplication with two decimals
multiplication with three decimals
multiplication with four decimals
5: Operate the Setting Coefficient by 135
division without decimal
division with one decimal
Operation division with two decimals
Setting 8: Operate the Setting Coefficient by
P3.2.27 Coefficient division with three decimals H.0000 ☆
Property 9: Operate the Setting Coefficient by
division with four decimals
A: Operate the Setting Coefficient by
division without decimal
B: Operate the Setting Coefficient by
division with one decimal
C: Operate the Setting Coefficient by
division with two decimals
D: Operate the Setting Coefficient by
division with three decimals
E: Operate the Setting Coefficient by
division with four decimals
(The setting coefficient of A, B, C, D, E
is the address number of function code)
Ones: Operation 1
Tens: Operation 2
Thousands, Hundreds, Tens and Ones:
express address of Input A of Operation 1
Input A of Ten Thousands: express input operation
P3.2.28 00000 ☆ 136
Operation 1 model
0: Input is operation by unsigned number
1: Input is operation by signed number
71
Refere
Function Factory Modification
Function name Setting scope nce
code set value limit
page
express address of Input B of Operation 1
Input B of Operation Ten Thousands: express input operation
P3.2.29 00000 ☆
1 model
136
Setting Coefficient of
P3.2.30 00000～65535 00001 ☆
Operation 1
Input A of Operation Ten Thousands: express input operation
P3.2.31 00000 ☆
2 model
P3.2.32 00000 ☆
2 model
P3.2.33 00000～65535 00001 ☆
Operation 2
P3.2.34 00000 ☆
3 model
137
P3.2.35 00000 ☆
3 model
P3.2.36 00000～65535 00001 ☆
Operation 3
P3.2.37 00000 ☆
4 model
P3.2.38 00000 ☆
4 model
P3.2.39 00000～65535 00001 ☆
Operation 4
72
5.5 Group P4 - PID Control And Communication Control

Factory
Function Modification Referenc
Function name Setting scope set
code limit e page
value
Group P4.0: PID Control Group
Reference
P4.0.00 PID Reference Source 00 ☆ 138
Reference
P4.0.01 PID Value Reference 000.0%～100.0% 050.0 ☆
2: VF1-VF2
3: VF1+VF2
6: MAX[VF1, VF2] 139
P4.0.02 PID Feedback Source 00 ☆
7: MIN[VF1, VF2]
8: Switch of Multiplex Directive
Terminal on the above conditions
0: Direct Action
P4.0.03 PID Action Direction 0 ☆
1: Reverse Action
PID Reference Feedback
P4.0.04 00000～65535 01000 ☆
Range 140
P4.0.05 Proportional Gains KP1 000.0～100.0 020.0 ☆
P4.0.06 Integral Time TI1 00.01s～10.00s 02.00 ☆
P4.0.07 Derivative Time TD1 00.000s～10.000s 00.000 ☆
P4.0.08 PID Deviation Limit 000.0%～100.0% 000.0 ☆
P4.0.09 PID Feedback Filtering time 00.00s～60.00s 00.00 ☆
P4.0.10 Proportional Gains KP2 000.0～100.0 020.0 ☆
P4.0.11 Integral Time TI2 00.01s～10.00s 02.00 ☆
P4.0.12 Derivative Time TD2 00.000s～10.000s 00.000 ☆
141
0: No Switch
P4.0.13 PID Switch Conditions 1: Switch through Terminals 0 ☆
2: Switch through Deviation
P4.0.14 PID Switch Deviation 1 000.0%～P4.0.15 020.0 ☆
P4.0.15 PID Switch Deviation 2 P4.0.14～100.0% 080.0 ☆
P4.0.16 PID Initial Value 000.0%～100.0% 000.0 ☆
P4.0.17 PID Initial Value Hold Time 000.00～650.00s 000.00 ☆
000.0%: No Judgment on Feedback
P4.0.18 PID Feedback Loss Test Loss 000.0 ☆
000.1%～100.0% 142
PID Feedback Loss Test
P4.0.19 00.0s～20.0s 00.0 ☆
Time
0: No Operation
P4.0.20 PID Stop Operation 0 ☆
1: Operation
73
Group P4.1: Communication Group
Ones unit: MODBUS baud rate
0: 1200
1: 2400
2: 4800
3: 9600
4: 19200
P4.1.00 Baud Rate 5: 38400 3 ☆
6: 57600
Tens unit: PROFIBUS baud rate
0: 115200
1: 208300
2: 256000
3: 512000
0: No Verification (8-N-2)
1: Even Parity Verification (8-E-1)
P4.1.01 Data Format 0 ☆
2: Odd Parity Verification (8-O-1)
3: No Verification (8-N-1) 143
000: Broadcast Address
P4.1.02 Local Machine Address 001 ☆
001～249
P4.1.03 Response Delay 00～20ms 02 ☆
00.0 (Invalid)
P4.1.04 Communication Timeout 00.0 ☆
00.1s～60.0s
Ones unit: MODBUS data format
0: ASCII Mode (Reservation)
1: RTU Mode
Data Transmission Tens unit: PROFIBUS data format
P4.1.05 1 ☆
Format 0: PPO1
1: PPO2
2: PPO3
3: PPO5
P4.1.06 MODBUS 0: Reply 1: No reply 0 ☆
communication data
reply or not
P4.1.07 Troubleshooting of 0: Bypassed
1: Shutdown 0 ☆
communication error 2: Communication fault
74
5.6 Group P5 - Keyboard Display

0: Invalid
Keyboard JOG Key 1: Forward Jogging
P5.0.00 1 ★
Function Reference 2: Reverse Jogging
3: Forward and Reverse Switch 143
0: Only valid in Keyboard Operation
Keyboard STOP Key
P5.0.01 Mode 1 ☆
Stop Function
1: Valid for any Mode
H.0001~H.FFFF
Bit00: Running Frequency (Hz)
Bit01: Reference frequency (Hz)
Bit02: Output Current (A)
Bit03: Output Voltage (V)
Bit04: Bus line voltage (V)
Bit05: Output Torque (%)
Bit06: Output Power (kW)
LED Running
P5.0.02 Bit07: Input Terminal State H.001F ☆
Display Parameter 1
Bit08: Output Terminal State
Bit09: VF1 Voltage (V)
Bit11: Customized Display Value
Bit12: Actual Count Value
Bit13: Actual Length Value
Bit14: PID Reference
Bit15: PID Feedback
H.0000~H.FFFF
Bit00: Impulse frequency (0.01kHz)
Bit01: Feedback Speed (Hz)
Bit02: PLC Phase
Bit03: VF1 Voltage before
Correction (V) 144
Bit04: VF2 Voltage before
Correction (V)
Bit05: Line Speed
Bit06: Current Power-on Time (min)
Bit07: Current Running Time (min)
LED Running Bit08: Residual Running Time (min)
P5.0.03 H.0000 ☆
Display Parameter 2 Bit09: Frequency of Frequency
Source A(Hz)
Bit10: Frequency of Frequency
Source B(Hz)
Bit11: Communication Set value
(Hz)
Bit12: Impulse frequency (Hz)
Bit13: Encoder Feedback Speed
(r/min)
Bit14: Actual Distance Value
Bit15: User Standby Monitoring
Value 1
Automatic Time
Switch of LED 000.0: No Switch
P5.0.04 000.0 ☆
Running Display 000.1s~100.0s
Parameter
75

H.0001~H.FFFF
Bit00: Reference frequency (Hz)
Bit01: Bus line voltage (V)
Bit02: Input Terminal State
Bit03: Output Terminal State
Bit06: Actual Count Value
LED Stop Display
P5.0.05 Bit07: Actual Length Value H.0033 ☆
Parameter
Bit08: PLC Phase
Bit09: Customized Display Value
Bit10: PID Reference
Bit11: PID Feedback
Bit12: Impulse frequency (Hz)
Bit13: User Standby Monitoring Value 1
Bit14: Reservation
Bit15: Reservation
LCD Line 1 Display
P5.0.06 0000～9399 9001 ☆ 145
at Running
LCD Line 2 Display
P5.0.07 0000～9399 9000 ☆
at Running
LCD Line 3 Display
P5.0.08 0000～9399 9002 ☆
at Running
LCD Line 4 Display
P5.0.09 0000～9399 9003 ☆
at Running
LCD Line 1 Display
P5.0.10 0000～9399 9001 ☆
at Stop
LCD Line 2 Display
P5.0.11 0000～9399 9000 ☆
at Stop
LCD Line 3 Display
P5.0.12 0000～9399 9004 ☆
at Stop
LCD Line 4 Display
P5.0.13 0000～9399 0000 ☆
at Stop
LCD
P5.0.14 Chinese/English 0: Chinese 1: English 0 ☆
Display Switch
Customized Display
P5.0.15 0.0001～6.5000 1.0000 ☆
of Coefficient
Ones unit: user-defined decimal place displaying
0: zero decimal place
1: one decimal place
2: two decimal places
3: three decimal places
Tens unit: source of user-defined display value
0: determined by hundreds place of user-defined
display control word.
1: determined by set value of P5.0.15, and 0.0000～
0.0099 corresponds to P9.0.00 ～ P9.0.99 of P9 146
User-defined display Group.
P5.0.16 001 ☆
control word. Hundreds unit: selection of user-defined displaying
coefficient
0: user-defined displaying coefficient is P5.0.15.
1: user-defined displaying coefficient is calculation
result 1
result 2
result 3
result 4
76

Ones:
0: Only display basic group
1: Display the menus at all
levels
Tens
0: Don’t display Group P7
1: Display Group P7
Selection Display of 2: Reservation
P5.0.17 Function Parameter Hundreds: 00011 ☆
Group 0: Don’t display correction
parameter group
1: Display correction parameter
group
Thousands:
0: Don’t display code group
1: Display code group
Ten Thousands: Reservation
0: Modifiable
Function Password 1: Non-modifiable 147
P5.0.18 0 ☆
Protection 2: Allowable Modification to GP
Type
00: No Operation
01: Clearance of Record
Information
09: Recover Factory set value,
excluding motor parameter,
correction group, password
group
19: Recover Factory set value,
P5.0.19 Parameter Initialization 000 ★
excluding motor parameter,
password group
30: Users Current Parameter
Backup
60: User Backup Parameters
Recovery
100~999: User factory set
values recovery
P5.0.20 User Password 00000～65535 00000 ☆ 148
Group P.5.1 Expansion Group
Accumulative Running
P5.1.00 00000h～65000h ●
Time
Accumulative Power On
P5.1.01 00000h～65000h ●
Time
Accumulative Power
P5.1.02 00000℃～65000℃ ●
Consumption 148
P5.1.03 Module Temperature 000℃～100℃ ●
P5.1.04 Hardware Version No. 180.00 ●
P5.1.05 Software Version No. 001.00 ●
Program Nonstandard
P5.1.06 0000～9999 ●
Label
77
5.7 Group P6 - Fault Display and Protection
Group P6.0: Fault Display Group
Fault Record 1 (Last 0: No Fault
P6.0.00 ●
Time) 1: Constant Overcurrent
P6.0.01 Fault Record 2 2: Accelerated Overcurrent ●
3: Decelerated Overcurrent
4: Constant Overvoltage
5: Accelerated Overvoltage
6: Decelerated Overvoltage
7: Module Fault
8: Undervoltage
9: Frequency inverter Overload
10: Motor Overload
11: Input Default Phase
12: Output Default Phase
13: External Fault
14: Communication Abnormity
15: Frequency inverter Overheat
16: Frequency inverter
Hardware Fault
17: Motor-to-ground Short
Circuit
18: Motor Identification Error
19: Motor Off-load 148
20: PID Feedback Loss ●
P6.0.02 Fault Record 3 21: User Customerized Fault 1
22: User Customerized Fault 2
23: Power-on Time Reached
24: Running Time Reached
25: Encoder Fault
26: Parameter Read-Write
Abnormity
27: Motor Overheat
28: Larger Speed Deviation
29: Motor Overspeed
30: Initial Position Error
31: Current Test Fault
32: Contactor
33: Abnormity of Current Test
34: Fast Current-limiting
Timeout
35: Motor Switch at Running
36: 24V Power Fault
37: Driving power supply fault
38～39: Reservation
40: Buffer Resistance Fault
78
Function Setting Factory set Modification

Function name Reference page
code scope value limit
P6.0.03 Fault Frequency 1 ●
P6.0.04 Fault Current 1 ●
P6.0.05 Bus line voltage 1 when at Fault ● 148
P6.0.06 Input Terminal State 1 when at fault ●
P6.0.07 Output Terminal State 1 when at fault ●
P6.0.08 Frequency inverter State 1 when at fault ●
P6.0.09 Power-on Time 1 when at fault ●
P6.0.10 Running Time 1 when at fault ●
P6.0.13 Bus line voltage 2 when at Fault ●
P6.0.17 Power-on Time 2 when at fault ● 149
P6.0.21 Bus line voltage 3 when at Fault ●
P6.0.25 Power-on Time 3 when at fault ●
Group 6.1: Protection Control Group
0:
Prohibite
P6.1.00 Input Default Phase Protection 1 ☆
d 1:
Allowed
0:
Prohibite 149
P6.1.01 Output Default Phase Protection 1 ☆
d 1:
Allowed
P6.1.02 Overvoltage Stall Protection Sensitivity 0～100 5 ☆
120% ～
P6.1.03 Overvoltage Stall Protection Voltage Point 130 ☆
150%
P6.1.04 Overcurrent Stall Protection Sensitivity 0～100 020 ☆
100% ～
P6.1.05 Overcurrent Stall Protection current 150 ☆
200%
150
P6.1.06 Fault Auto Reset Number 0～20 00 ☆
0.1s ～
P6.1.07 Waiting Interval Time of Fault Auto Reset 001.0 ☆
100.0s
79

0: Free Stop
1: Stop by its Mode
Ones: Motor Overload
Fault Protective Action
P6.1.08 Tens: Input Default Phase 00000 ☆
Selection 1
Hundreds: Output Default Phase
Thousands: External Default
Ten Thousands: Communication
Abnormality
0: Free Stop
1: Stop by its Mode
Ones: Motor Overload
Tens: Feedback Loss
Fault Protective Action
P6.1.09 Hundreds: User Customerized Fault 00000 ★
Selection 2
1
Thousands: User Customerized Fault
2
Ten Thousands: Power-on Time 150
Reached
Ones: Running Time Reached
0: Free Stop
1: Stop by its Mode
Tens: Encoder Abnormality
0: Free Stop
Hundreds: Parameter Read-Write
Abnormity
Fault Protective Action 0: Free Stop
P6.1.10 00000 ☆
Selection 3 1: Stop by its Mode
Thousands: Motor Overhear
0: Free Stop
1: Stop by its Mode
Ten Thousands: Fault of 24V Power
Supply
0: Free Stop
1: Stop by its Mode
0: Free Stop
1: Stop by its Mode
Fault Protective Action Ones: Larger Speed Deviation
P6.1.11 00000 ☆ 151
Selection 4 Tens: Motor Overspeed
Hundreds: Initial Position Error
Thousands: Reservation
80

0: Running at Current Frequency
Continuous
1: Running at Reference frequency
Running
2: Running at Upper Frequency
P6.1.12 Frequency 0 ☆
3: Running at Lower Frequency
Selection when at
4: Running at Back Frequency for 151
Fault
Abnormality
Backup
P6.1.13 Frequency for 000.0%～100.0% 100.0 ☆
Abnormality
Action Selection 0: Invalid
P6.1.14 for Momentary 1: Deceleration 0 ☆
Interruption 2: Stop by Deceleration
Judgment Time
of Momentary
P6.1.15 000.00s～100.00s 000.50 ☆
Interruption
Voltage Recovery
Voltage Judgment 152
for Momentary 60.0%~100.0% (Standard Bus line
P6.1.16 080.0 ☆
Interruption voltage)
Action
Voltage Judgment
for Suspension of 80.0%~100.0% (Standard Bus line
P6.1.17 090.0 ☆
Momentary voltage)
Action
Off-load
P6.1.18 Protection 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0 ☆
Selection
Off-load Test
P6.1.19 000.0%～100.0% 010.0 ☆
Level
Off-load Test
P6.1.20 00.0s～60.0s 01.0 ☆
Time
P6.1.21 Overspeed Test 00.0%～50.0% 20.0 ☆
Overspeed Test 00.0: No Test
P6.1.22 01.0 ☆
Time 00.1s～60.0s
Speed Deviation
P6.1.23 greater than Test 00.0%～50.0% 20.0 ☆ 153
Value
Speed Deviation 00.0: No Test
P6.1.24 greater than Test 05.0 ☆
00.1s～60.0s
Time
Fault Output
Terminal Action
0: No Action
P6.1.25 Selection during 0 ☆
1: Action
Fault Auto Reset
Period
Input Default
01~10 (The smaller it is, the more
P6.1.26 Phase Protection 05 ☆
sensitivity it is)
Sensitivity
81
5.8 Group P7 - User Function Customization
P7.0.00 User Function 0 U0.0.01 U0.001 ●
P7.0.01 User Function 1 U0.0.00~UX.X.XX (exclude P7, P8) U0.002 ☆
154
82
5.9 Group P8 - Manufacturer Function

Function Factory set Reference
Function name Setting scope Modification limit
code value page
Group P8.0: Manufacturer Function Group
P8.0.00 Manufacturer Code 00000~65535 00000 ☆ 155
Sort P8.1: Parameter Correction Sort
Voltage Input of Potentiometer
P8.1.00 00.00V~P8.1.02 00.00 ☆
Correction Point 1
Corresponding reference of
P8.1.01 -100.0%~100.0% 000.0 ☆
Potentiometer Correction Point 1
Voltage Input of Potentiometer
P8.1.02 P8.1.00~10.00V 10.00 ☆
Correction Point 2
Corresponding reference of
P8.1.03 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0 ☆
Potentiometer Correction Point 2
P8.1.04 Filtering time of potentiometer 00.00s~10.00s 00.10 ☆ 155
P8.1.05 VF1 actual voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V 2.000 ☆
P8.1.06 VF1 indicated voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V 2.000 ☆
P8.1.13 FM1 target voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V 2.000 ☆
P8.1.14 FM1 actual voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V 2.000 ☆
156
P8.1.17 FM2 target voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V 2.000 △ /☆
83
5.10 Group P9 - Monitoring Parameter
P9.0 Basic Monitoring Parameter
P9 Parameter Group is used to monitor running state information of the frequency inverter, the users can set
corresponding parameter as required, which can not only be rapidly viewed through panel for easy debugging and
maintenance on site, but also read through communication for monitoring of upper computer.
Function
Function Name Description Unit
code
P9.0.00 Running Frequency Output frequency when the frequency inverter runs 0.01Hz
P9.0.01 Reference frequency Reference frequency of the frequency inverter 0.01Hz
P9.0.02 Output Current Output current when the frequency inverter runs 0.01A
P9.0.03 Output Voltage Output current when the frequency inverter runs 1V
P9.0.04 Bus line voltage Voltage on DC Bus of the frequency inverter 0.1V
When the frequency inverter runs, the output torque is the
P9.0.05 Output Torque 0.1%
percentage of rated torque of the motor
P9.0.06 Output Power Output frequency when the frequency inverter runs 0.1kW
P9.0.07 Input Terminal Status Check whether the input terminal has signal input
P9.0.08 Output Terminal Status Check whether the output terminal has signal output
P9.0.09 VF1 Voltage Check the voltage between VF1 and GND 0.01V
Display coefficient P5.0.15 and the value after conversion of
P9.0.11 Custom Display Value
Decimal Point P5.0.16 through customerization
View actual counting value of the frequency inverter for
P9.0.12 Actual Counting Value 1
counting function
P9.0.13 Actual Length Value 1m
fixed-length function
Product of PID reference value and PID reference feedback
P9.0.14 PID Reference
quantity
Product of PID feedback value and PID reference feedback
P9.0.15 PID Feedback
rang
PULS Impulse
P9.0.16 View the frequency of PULSE Impulse Input 0.01kHz
frequency
P9.0.17 Feedback Speed Actual output frequency when the frequency inverter runs 0.1Hz
P9.0.18 PLC Phase Display which stage the Simple PLC runs at 1
Voltage before VF1
P9.0.19 Voltage between VF1 and GND before VF1 correction 0.001V
Correction
Voltage before VF2
Correction
The sampling line speed of DI6 impulse is equal to the
P9.0.21 Line Speed 1m/min
acquisition of impulse count per minute/ per meter
P9.0.22 Current Power-on Time Length of current power-on time 1min
P9.0.23 Current Running Time Length of current running time 0.1min
P9.0.24 Residual Running Time Residual running time at Timing Function of P3.1.00 0.1min
Frequency of
P9.0.25 View the frequency given by Frequency A 0.01Hz
Frequency Source A
Frequency of
P9.0.26 View the frequency given by Frequency B 0.01Hz
Frequency Source B
Communication Set The value set by corresponding communication address A001
P9.0.27 %
value is the percentage of the highest frequency
P9.0.28 Impulse frequency View the frequency of PULSE Impulse Input 1Hz
Encoder Feedback Actual running frequency of the motor from feedback of the
P9.0.29 0.01Hz
Speed encoder
View actual distance value of the distance value of the
P9.0.30 Actual Distance Value
frequency inverter
P9.0.31~
Reservation
P9.0.45
P9.0.46 Operation Result 1 Check the value of operation result 1
84
Function
Function Name Description Unit
code
User Standby
P9.0.50 Check the value of user special function
Monitoring Value 1
User Standby
Monitoring Value 2
User Standby
Monitoring Value 3
User Standby
Monitoring Value 4
User Standby
Monitoring Value 5
85
Chapter 6. Description of Parameters

6.1 Group 0 - Basic Function
P0.0 Group – Basic Group
Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory set value
1:G Type (General type)
P0.0.00 Type of Frequency inverter Type
2:P Type (Light-load type)
This function code is only for the users to check the factory type of the frequency inverter and is generally not
allowed to be modified by the users. If modification is required, the function code P5.0.18 must be first changed
to 2.
1: G Type Applies to general type

2: P Type Apples to light-load type

0:Basic Mode (Prefix with ‘P’)
P0.0.01 Display Mode 1:User Mode (Prefix with ‘U’) 0
2:Verification Mode (Prefix with ‘C’）
This function code is used for confirming what a kind of display modes is selected for inventor
0: Basic Mode (Prefix with ‘P’)
The frequency inverter specifically displays what parameters of the function codes are determined by Function
Code P5.0.17 (Refer to the description for Function Code P5.0.17 for more details)
1: User Mode (Prefix with ‘U’)
Only display customization parameters of user function and use Function Code of Group P7.0 to determine what
parameters of the function codes are specifically displayed by the frequency inverter (Refer to the description for
Group P7.0 for more details). In user mode, the function code has the prefix with ‘U’.
2: Verification Mode (Prefix with ‘C’)
Only display the modified parameters (in case of any difference of function code between reference value and
factory set value, it is deemed that the parameters are changed), the function code has the prefix with ‘C at this
time.
Note: no matter what the prefix is, ‘P’ or ‘U’ or ‘C’, the meaning of their relative parameters
is the same and the prefix is only for distinguishing the display mode.

0:V/F Control
1: Open-loop Vector Control (SVC)
2: Closed-loop Vector Control (Invalid Set default value
P0.0.02 Control Mode E100、E102) according to
3 ： Intelligent selection 0 or 1 (this software version
function is unavailable when unable to
be set as 3)
0:V/FC control
Be applicable for the occasions without high requirements to load or where one set of frequency inverter drives
more than one set of motor.
1: SVC
Don’t need to externally connect the encoder as speed feedback and be applicable for general and high-powered
occasions, one set of frequency inverter only drives one set of motor.
2: VC
Need to externally connect the encoder as speed feedback and be applicable for occasions with high-precision
speed control or torque control, one set of frequency inverter only drives one set of motor. This function is not
available on E100 and E102 Series, and a connected-externally encoder expansion card is required for E180
Series.
3：Intelligent selection 0 or 1 (this function is unavailable when unable to be set as 3)
86
If the load motor is permanent magnet synchronous motor, the VC shall be selected.
Note: if the vector control mode is selected, it is better to identify the parameters of the motor, only precise
parameters of the motor can give play to the advantages of VC Mode.
Function code Function Name Setting scope

Factory set value
0: Keyboard Control
P0.0.03 Option of operation control mode 1: Terminal Control 0
0: Keyboard Control
Key RUN, STOP and JOG on operating panel control start, stop and FWD& REV switch of the frequency inverter
1: Terminal Input
Use the digital input terminal to control FWD, REV and stop of the frequency inverter
Use the principal computer to control l FWD, REV, stop, jog and reset (Refer to Chapter VIII for more details)
Detailed methods for the above three kinds of control methods refer to 7.1.1
0: Keyboard Reference (No

Power-off Memory）
1: Keyboard Reference (Power-off
Memory)
Reference
Reference
P0.0.04 Option of A Frequency Source 4:External Terminal VF2 Reference 02
5:PULS Reference (DI6)
7:Simple PLC Reference
8:PID Control Reference
9:Communication Reference
10:Operation Result 1
0:Keyboard Reference (No Power-off Memory)
The initial value of the reference frequency is the value set by Function Code P0.0.05, and it can be changed
through Key▲&▼ on the keyboard or Terminal UP/DOWN, which can be set by Function Code P0.1.05 to save
such shut-down change (keyboard reference frequency shut-down memory selection). After the frequency inverter
powers on again after power off, the reference frequency is set to value set by P0.0.05.
1: Keyboard Reference (Power-off Memory)

The initial value of the reference frequency is the value set by Function Code P0.0.05, and it can be changed
through Key▲ &▼ on the keyboard or Terminal UP/DOWN, which can be set by Function Code P0.1.05 to save
such shut-down change (keyboard reference frequency shut-down memory selection). After the frequency inverter
powers on again after power off, the reference frequency is the frequency at the time of power off, and it can be
saved through Key▲ &▼ on the keyboard or Terminal UP/DOWN.

The reference frequency is given by the potentiometer on operation panel. The impact of zero-offset or voltage
attenuation caused by overlong keyboard lines can be adjusted through Function Code P8.1.00~P8.1.04.

87
The reference frequency is given by the analog input terminal. E Series Frequency inverter provides 2-way analog
input terminal (VF1, VF2). VF1 and VF2 can input 0V~10V voltage or 0/4mA~20mA current. As for
corresponding relation curve between the input of VF1 and VF2 and the reference frequency, the users can freely
choose from four kinds of the relation curves through function code P2.1.02, in which Curve 1 and Curve 2 are
linear relationship able to be set through Function Code P2.0.13~P2.0.22, and Curve 3 and Curve 4 are broken
line relationship with two inflection points able to be set through Function Code P2.1.04~P2.1.19. The deviation
between actual voltage and sampling voltage of the analog input terminal can be adjusted through Function Code
P8.1.05~P8.1.12.

The frequency reference is given by high-speed impulse frequency of digital input terminal D16 (the terminal
function is not defined). The corresponding relationship between high-speed impulse frequency and torque upper
limit value can be set through Function Code P2.0.23~P2.0.26, that is, line relationship.
6: Multiplex Directive Terminal Reference

The reference frequency is given by different composite state of Multiplex Directive Terminal. E Series Frequency
inverter is able to set four Multiplex Directive Terminals (Terminal Function 9~12, refer to the Description for
Multiplex Directive Terminal Function of P2.0.00~P2.0.09 for more details)

The reference frequency is given by Simple PLC Function, the running frequency of the frequency inverter can
be switched among 1~16 arbitrary frequency directives, the sources, hold time and acceleration & deceleration
time of each frequency directive can be set through Function Code 3.0.03~P3.0.50.

The reference frequency is given by the frequency calculated from PID Control. When setting the frequency
calculated from PID Control, it is required to setting related parameters of “PID Control Group”
(P4.0.00~P4.0.20).
The reference frequency is given by the principal computer through communication mode (Refer to Chapter VIII
for more details)
The reference frequency is determined by the operation results after setting calculation of the internal operation
module. Refer to the Description of Function Code P3.2.26~P3.2.39 for more details of the operation module. The
operation results can be viewed through Function Code 9.0.46~P9.0.49.
Function code Function name Setting scope Factory set value

P0.0.05 Keyboard Frequency Reference 000.00~ maximum frequency 050.00
When the Function Code P0.0.04 or P0.1.01 is set to 0 or 1, the initial value of the reference frequency is given by
this function code.

1: Negation of Direction
P0.0.06 Running Direction 0
2: Determined by multi-function
input terminal
88
The modification on this function code can realize the purpose of changing the motor steering without changing
the connection of the motor and its role is equivalent to adjust any two lines of Motor U, V and W to realize the
shifting of the steering direction of the motors. This function code is valid in any running control mode. When
P0.0.06 is set to 2, the running direction is determined by multi-function input terminal. The function code of
multi-function input terminal is 37, and if the terminal signal is valid and the reversed direction is adopted.
Note: Recover Factory set values, the running direction of the motor can restore to original state. It should
be used with caution for occasions that forbid from changing the motor steering after completing the
debugging of the system.

P0.0.07 Maximum frequency 050.00Hz~320.00Hz 050.00
The highest frequency refers to the maximum frequency that the frequency inverter allows to output.
When the analog input, PULS Impulse Input, multiplex directive input and simple PLC in E Series Frequency
inverter are adopted as frequency source, each percentage is set based on the value given by corresponding
function code.
Note: the modification to this set value can change the data which takes the set value of this function code
as calibration.

P0.0.08 Upper frequency Lower frequency ~ highest frequency 050.00
P0.0.09 Lower frequency 000.00~ Upper frequency 000.00
The upper limit frequency is the Highest Frequency allowed to run set by the users. At P0.1.03=0, the set value of
Function Code P0.0.08 determines the Highest Frequency that the frequency inverter allows to run.
The lower limit frequency is the minimum frequency allowed to run set by the users.
The relationship among Highest Frequency, Upper Limit Frequency and Lower Limit Frequency are shown in the
figure below:
Output frequency
Frequency Directive
HF: Highest Frequency UF:Upper Frequency LF:Lower Frequency
89
Factory set
Function code Function name Setting scope
value
0:Running at lower limit frequency
1: Stop
P0.0.10 Lower frequency operation mode 2: Zero-speed Running 0
3：Standby(this function is unavailable
when unable to be set as 3)
0: Run at lower limit frequency
When the reference frequency is less than the lower limit frequency (value set by P0.0.09), the frequency inverter
runs at lower limit frequency
1: Stop
When the reference frequency is less than the lower limit frequency, the frequency inverter stops
2: Zero-speed Running
When the reference frequency is less than the lower limit frequency, the frequency inverter runs at 0Hz
3：Standby(this function is unavailable when unable to be set as 3)

The frequency converter will enter standby status if the set frequency is lower than lower limit frequency, or enter
running status if it is higher than the lower limit frequency.
Note: when running at 0Hz, the frequency inverter can output a certain voltage, so special attention shall be
paid when in use.
If no voltage output when inverter runs at 0 Hz, should set function code P0.0.09=000.05, P3.2.00=00002,
and P3.2.07=3714.

P0.0.11 Acceleration Time 0000.1s~6500.0s Machine type
P0.0.12 Deceleration Time 0000.1s~6500.0s Machine type
The acceleration time refers to time required to raise the frequency inverter from zero frequency to reference
frequency of the acceleration and deceleration time (set by Function Code P0.1.07).
The deceleration time refers to time required to reduce the frequency inverter reference frequency of the
acceleration and deceleration time to zero frequency.
See the Description of the Figure below:
Output frequency
Reference frequency of acceleration
and deceleration time
Set frequency
Time
Actual acceleration time Actual deceleration time
Actual acceleration time Actual deceleration time
90
Factory set
value
0:Common motor
P0.0.13 Type of Motor 1:Varible frequency motor 0
This function code is used to set the type of the load motor equipped with the frequency inverter.
0: Common motor
Because heat radiation effect of the common motor becomes worse when running at low speed, relative electronic
thermal protection value should be adjusted properly; low speed compensating performance of motor protection
mode is to lower protection threshold of motor overload when running frequency is less than 30Hz.
1: Variable frequency motor

Variable frequency motor uses forced air cooling, so that radiating effect is not affected by the rotating speed.
Hence, it is not required to lower protection threshold when running at low speed.
If it is synchronous motor, the control mode is set to closed-loop vector control (i.e. P0.0.02=2).
Function Function Name Setting scope Factory set

code value
Machine
P0.0.14 Motor rated power 0000.1kW ~ 1000.0kW
type
P0.0.15 Motor rated frequency 000.01Hz ~ Highest frequency 050.00
Machine
P0.0.16 Motor rated voltage 0001V ~ 2000V
type
000.01A ~ 655.35A (inverter power < 75kW Machine
P0.0.17 Motor rated current
0000.1A ~ 6553.5A (inverter power≥75kW) type
Machine
P0.0.18 Motor Rated Rotating Speed 00001rpm ~ 65535rpm
type
Stator resistance of asynchronous 00.001  ~ 65.535  (inverter power < 75kW) Machine
P0.0.19
motor 0.0001  ~ 6.5535  (inverter power≥75kW) type
Rator resistance of asynchronous 00.001  ~ 65.535  (inverter power < 75kW) Machine
P0.0.20
motor 0.0001  ~ 6.5535  (inverter power≥75kW) type
000.01mH ~ 655.35mH (inverter power <
Leakage inductance Machine
P0.0.21 75kW)
of asynchronous motor type
00.001mH ~ 65.535mH (inverter power≥75kW)
0000.1mH ～ 6553.5mH (inverter power <
Mutual inductance Machine
P0.0.22 75kW)
of asynchronous motor type
000.01mH ~ 655.35mH (inverter power≥75kW)
000.01A ~ Motor rated current (inverter power <
No-load current of asynchronous 75kW) Machine
P0.0.23
motor 0000.1A ~ Motor rated current (inverter power ≥ type
75kW)
Function code P0.0.14～P0.0.23 are intrinsic parameters of AC asynchronous motor, no matter what is adopted,
V/F control or vector control, all have certain requirements to the parameters of the motor, especially for vector
control, it requires that value of P0.0.19~P0.0.23 must be very close to the intrinsic parameters of the motor, the
more the precision of the value is , the better the performance of the vector control is, therefore, when using the
vector control, it is better to identify the motor through Function Code P0.0.24. If the identification cannot be
made on site, according to the parameters provided by the motor manufacturer, it is to input them into the above
corresponding function code.
91
00: No action
Parameter Identification
P0.0.24 11: Synchronous machine on-load 00
Control
identification
12: Synchronous machine non-load
identification
Refer to 7.1.20 for more details (Parameter Identification)
P0.1: Expansion Group

4: Max. Value of A & B
P0.1.00 Option of Frequency Source 0
5: Min. Value of A & B
8: Switch of Terminal among the
above 8 kinds
The reference frequency is given by Frequency Source A (P0.0.04).
The reference frequency is given by Frequency Source B (P0.1.01).

The reference frequency is given by Frequency Source A+B.

The reference frequency is given by A-B Frequency, if A-B Frequency is negative value; the frequency inverter
runs in opposite direction
4: Max. Value of A & B

The reference frequency is determined by the maximum value between Frequency Source A and B.
5: Min. Value of A & B

The reference frequency is determined by the minimum value between Frequency Source A and B.

Standby Frequency Source 1 and Standby Frequency Source 2 are reserved by the manufacturer as frequency
sources used for special occasions in future, so the users may ignore them as usual.
8: Switch of Terminal among the above 8 kinds

The reference frequency is switched among the above 8 kinds of frequency sources by selecting different
composite state of the terminals. E Series Frequency inverter can set 3 kinds of frequency sources to choose the
terminals (Terminal Function 18~20, refer to the instruction for Terminal Selection Function of Frequency Source
P2.0.00~P2.0.09 for more details)
92

0:Keyboard Reference (No
Power-off Memory)
1:Keyboard Reference (Power-off
Memory)
2:Keyboard Potentiometer
Reference
Reference
4:External Terminal VF2 Reference
P0.1.01 Option of Frequency Source B 00
5:PULS Reference (DI6)
7:Simple PLC Reference
8:PID Control Reference
9:Communication Reference
This function case has the same function with “Option of Frequency Source A” (P0.0.04), if it is needed to use,
please refer to the setting method for Function Code P0.0.04 to set.

Adjustment Volume of: Frequency
P0.1.02 000%~150% 100
Source B at superposition
When the reference frequency of frequency inverter is given by Frequency Source A+B and Frequency Source
A-B, it defaults A to main reference and B to auxiliary Reference. This function code determines the regulation
size of Frequency Source B, which is the percentage relative to the scope of Frequency Source B (set by Function
Code P0.2.01)
At P0.2.01=0, the frequency of Frequency Source B is regulated relative to Highest Frequency.
At P0.2.01=1, the frequency of Frequency Source B is regulated relative to frequency of Frequency Source A.

P0.1.03 Upper Limit Frequency Source 0
This function code determines the source of the upper limit frequency.

The upper limit frequency is determined by the value set by Function Code P0.0.08.

The upper limit frequency is given by the analog input terminal. E Series Frequency inverter provides 2-way
analog input terminal (VF1, VF2). VF1 and VF2 can input 0V~10V voltage or 0/4mA~20mA current. As for
corresponding relation curve of the input of VF1 and VF2 and the upper limit frequency, the users can freely
93
P8.1.05~P8.1.12.

The upper limit frequency is set by different composite state of Multiplex Directive Terminal. E Series Frequency
4: PULS Reference
The upper limit frequency is set by high-speed impulse frequency of digital input terminal D16 (the terminal
function is not defined). The corresponding relationship between high-speed impulse frequency and upper limit
frequency can be set through Function Code P2.0.23~P2.0.26, that is, linear relationship.
The upper limit frequency is set by the upper computer through communication mode (refer to Chapter VIII for
more details).
The upper limit frequency is determined by data after setting calculation of the internal operation module. Refer to
the Description of Function Code P3.2.26~P3.2.39 for more details of the operation module. The operation results
can be viewed through Function Code 9.0.46~P9.0.49.
Note: the upper limit frequency cannot be set to negative value, but if it is the negative value, the upper
limit frequency is invalid.

P0.1.04 Upper Limit Frequency Offset 000.00~Highest Frequency 000.00
The set value of this function code is the offset of the upper frequency, and the superposition of this offset and
upper frequency set by Function Code P0.1.03 is adopted as final set value of upper frequency.

Keyboard Reference frequency 0: No Memory
P0.1.05 0
Shut-down Memory Selection 1: Memory
0: No Memory
After the frequency inverter stops, the reference frequency is recover the value given by Function Code P0.0.05,
and the frequency allowance, which is conducted through Key▲&▼on the keyboard or Terminal UP/DOWN, is
cleared .
1: Memory
After the frequency inverter stops, the reference frequency is the frequency set before stop, and the frequency
allowance, which is conducted through Key▲&▼on the keyboard or Terminal UP/DOWN, is saved.
Note: this function code is valid only when the frequency source is set by the keyboard.
94
Factory set value
Keyboard Reference frequency 0: Running Frequency
P0.1.06 0
Action Benchmark at running 1: Reference frequency
When this function code is adopted to determine the action of Key▲&▼on the keyboard or Terminal UP/DOWN,
it is to confirm what a kind of mode is adopted to correct the frequency and the increase & decrease shall be done
on the basis of running frequency or reference frequency .
0: Running Frequency
The regulation shall be made on the basis of running frequency
1: Reference frequency
The regulation shall be made on the basis of reference frequency
The difference between two settings is obvious when the frequency inverter is in the process of acceleration and
deceleration, namely, when the running frequency differs from the reference frequency, different Option of
parameters leads to great difference.
Note: this function code is valid only when the frequency source is set by the keyboard.

Benchmark frequency of 0: Highest Frequency
P0.1.07 accelerating and Deceleration 1: Reference frequency 0
time 2: 100Hz
0: Highest Frequency
The acceleration and deceleration time refers to the time from frequency 0 to highest frequency, and it can change
with the change of the highest frequency at this time.
1: Reference frequency
The acceleration and deceleration time refers to the time from frequency 0 to highest frequency, and it can change
with the change of the reference frequency at this time.
2: 100Hz
The acceleration and deceleration time refers to the time from frequency 0 to 100Hz, and it is a fixed value at this
time.
Note: the jogging acceleration and deceleration time is also subject to its control.

P0.1.08 Jogging running frequency 000.00~Highest Frequency 002.00
P0.1.09 Jogging Acceleration time 0000.0s~6500.0s 0020.0
P0.1.10 Jogging Deceleration time 0000.0s~6500.0s 0020.0
The function codes above define the reference frequency and acceleration and deceleration time when the
frequency inverter is at jogging running.
P0.1.11 Acceleration time 2 0000.0s~6500.0s Machine type
P0.1.12 Deceleration time 2 0000.0s~6500.0s Machine type
The function codes above have the same definitions with P0.0.11 and P0.0.12; refer to the Description of P0.0.11
and P0.0.12 for more details
E Series Frequency inverter totally provides 4 groups of acceleration and deceleration time of the straight line,
which can switch among 4 groups of acceleration and deceleration time through different composite state of
acceleration and deceleration time selection terminals. It can set 2 acceleration and deceleration time selection
terminals (terminal function 16~17, refer to the Description of Code P2.0.00~P2.0.09 for Acceleration and
Deceleration Time Selection Terminal Function of Function for more details)
95
Frequency Switch Point between
P0.1.17 Acceleration time 1 and 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 000.00
Acceleration time 2
Frequency Switch Point between
P0.1.18 Deceleration time 1 and 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 000.00
Deceleration time 2
The function codes above are adopted to set the frequency of the switch point of acceleration and deceleration
time 1 and acceleration and deceleration time 2. When the running frequency of the frequency inverter is less than
the set value of these two function codes, the acceleration and deceleration time 2 is adopted, otherwise the
acceleration and deceleration time 1 is adopted.
Note: when using this function, the acceleration and deceleration time 1 and acceleration and deceleration
time 2 cannot be set to 0s.

0:Straight Line
P0.1.19 Acceleration and Deceleration Mode 1:Curve S 1 0
2:Curve S 2
0: Acceleration and Deceleration of the Straight Line

The output frequency increases or decreases by the straight line. E Series Frequency inverter provides 4 groups of
acceleration and deceleration time of the straight line, namely, P0.0.11 and P0.0.12, P0.1.11 and P0.1.12, P0.1.13
and P0.1.14 and P0.1.15 and P0.1.16. The switch can be selected through different composite state of acceleration
and deceleration time selection terminals.
1: Curve S 1
The output frequency increases or decreases by Curve S 1. Curve S 1 is used for occasions required for gradual
start or stop. Parameter P0.1.20 and P0.1.21 respectively defines the time scale of starting point and ending point
of Curve S 1.
2: Curve S 2
In the Curve S 2, the rated frequency of the motor is always the inflection point of Curve S, as shown in the figure
below. Generally, it applies for the occasions that the high-speed area above the rated frequency requires to rapidly
accelerate and decelerate.
Output Frequency
When the set frequency is below rated frequency,
Set Frequency
the acceleration and deceleration time is as below:
Rated Frequency t= (4/9 X (Set Frequency/Rated Frequency)2 + 5/9) XT
Run Time

Percentage of Starting Phase of
P0.1.20 000.0%~100.0% 030.0
Curve S
Percentage of Ending Phase of Curve
P0.1.21 000.0%~100.0% 030.0
S
Parameter P0.1.20 and P0.1.21 respectively defines the time scale of starting point and ending point of Curve S 1.
These two parameters need to meet P0.1.20+P0.1.21≤100.0%, refer to the Description for the figure below:
Output Frequency
Rated Frequency
Run Time
96
T1 is the value set by Function Code P0.1.20, the slope of the output frequency gradually increases from zero
within this period of time.
T2 is the value set by Function Code P0.1.21, the slope of the output frequency gradually decreases to zero within
this period of time.
Within the time between T1 and T2, the change on slope of the output frequency keeps constant.
Factory set
value
P0.1.22 Hopping Frequency 1 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 000.00
P0.1.23 Hopping Frequency 2 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 000.00
P0.1.24 Hopping Frequency scope 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 000.00
The hopping frequency function is set so that running frequency of the frequency inverter can avoid load
resonance band of the driving system. E Series Frequency inverter can set two hopping frequency points, after
setting, even the reference frequency is within load resonance band, the output frequency of the frequency
inverter will also be automatically adjusted out of load resonance band to avoid running on resonant frequency,
refer to the Description for the figure below:
Output Frequency
Hoping Frequency 1 Range of 1/2 Hoping Frequency
Range of 1/2 Hoping Frequency
Hoping Frequency 2 Range of 1/2 Hoping Frequency
Range of 1/2 Hoping Frequency
Reference Frequency
Function Code Function name Setting Scope

Factory set value
P0.1.25 Jogging Priority 0:Invalid 1:Valid 0
This function code is used to set whether the priority of the jogging function is the highest. The jogging function
includes Keyboard Jogging Function and Terminal Jogging Function.
When at P0.1.25=1, if the jogging command occurs in the running process, the switch of frequency inverter is the
jogging running state. The target frequency is the jogging frequency and the acceleration and deceleration time is
the jogging acceleration and deceleration time.

0: ABZ Incremental Encoder
1: UVW Incremental Encoder (E100、E102
Invalid)
P0.1.26 Type of Encoder 0
2: Rotary Transformer (E100、E102 Invalid）
3~9: Reservation
10: Distance Control (Open Collector)
This function code is used to set the selected type of the Encoder.
CDI-E180 Series Frequency inverter supports various types of the encoders. Different encoder needs to configure
different encoder expansion card, when in use, the correct encoder expansion card shall be selected and ordered.
The synchronous motor may select any one of three types of the encoders in the table above, while the
asynchronous motor generally selects and uses ABZ incremental encoder and rotary transformer.
After completing the installation of the encoder, the value of Function Code P0.1.27 shall be correctly set based
on actual conditions, or the frequency inverter may not run normally.
Note: when the open collector-type encoder is adopted to realize the distance control, the function code
must be set to P0.1.26=10.

P0.1.27 Line Number of Encoder 00001~65535 01024
97
This function code is used for the number of pulses per revolution to set ABZ or UVW incremental encoder.
In closed-type vector control mode, the line number of the encoder must be correctly set, or the frequency inverter
will not run normally.
Factory set
value
P0.1.28 ABZ phase sequence 0
This function code is only valid for ABZ incremental encoder, namely, it is valid at P0.1.26=0, and used to set the
phase sequence of ABZ Incremental Encoder AB Signal. It is valid for synchronous motor and asynchronous
motor, when the asynchronous motor is completely tuned or the synchronous motor is tuned, the AB Phase
Sequence is acquired for ABZ Encoder.

00: No action
P0.1.29 Encoder Disconnection Testing Time 00.0
00.1s~10.0s
When the test time of the encoder disconnection fault is set to 00.0, the frequency inverter can’t detect the
disconnection fault of encoder. When the frequency inverter has been detected with disconnection fault and the
duration is over the time set by Function Code P0.1.29, then the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err25.
Factory
Function
Function Name Setting scope set
code
value
00.001  ~ 65.535  (inverter power < 75kW) Machine
P0.1.30 Stator resistance of synchronous motor
0.0001  ~ 6.5535  (inverter power ≥ 75kW) type
Machine
P0.1.31 Back EMF of Synchronous motor 0000.0V ~ 6553.5V
type
The above parameters are intrinsic parameters of synchronous motor, the load motor equipped with the frequency
inverter refers to synchronous motor, it requires that value of P0.1.30~P0.1.31 must be very close to the intrinsic
parameters of the motor, the more the precision of the value is , the better the performance of the vector control is.
The motor parameters are identified through Function Code P0.0.24. If the identification cannot be made on site,
according to the parameters provided by the motor manufacturer, it is to input them into the above corresponding
function code.
P0.1.32 UVW Phase Sequence Machine type
P0.1.33 UVW Encoder Angle 000.0~359.9 Machine type
The above function codes are only valid when the synchronous motor adopts UVW incremental encoder.
These two parameters are more important for the running of the synchronous motor, so it is better to acquire these
two parameters of the synchronous motor through identification by Function Code P0.0.24 after completing initial
installation.

P0.1.34 Pole-pairs of Rotary Transformer 00001~65535 Machine type
When the encoder is rotary transformer (i.e. P0.1.26=2), this function code is used to set its pole-pairs.

Switching frequency point of deceleration 000.00Hz ~ max.
P0.1.35 000.00
time 2 and deceleration time 3 frequency
The function code above is used for setting the frequency of switch point between deceleration time 2 and 3;
deceleration time 3 will be used if the frequency converter’s running frequency is lower than the set value of this
function code; otherwise, the deceleration time 2 will be used.
98
0.01mH ~ 655.35mH (frequency converter
D axis inductance of power ≤55 kW) Tuning
P0.1.37
synchronous motor 0.01mH~655.35mH (frequency converter Parameter
power > 55 kW)
0.01mH~655.35mH (frequency converter power
Q axis inductance of ≤55 kW) Tuning
P0.1.38
synchronous motor 0.01mH~655.35mH (frequency converter Parameter
power > 55 kW)
The parameters above are the intrinsic parameters of synchronous motor; when frequency converter is fitted with
synchronous motor, the value of P0.1.37~P0.1.38 should be close to the intrinsic parameters of motor, and the
control performance will be improved along with the increasing accuracy of parameter. The motor parameters can
be identified through the function code P0.0.24. If no identification is required, enter the parameters provided by
motor manufacturer to the function codes above.
P0.1.39 Max. output current of frequency converter 100.0%～200.0% 180.0
When synchronous motor is under vector control, the frequency converter’s max. output line current; its torque
and line current are respectively restricted by P1.1.08 and P0.1.39.

0: No weak magnetism
Flux-weakening
P0.1.40 1：Flux-weakening method 1 1
method
2：Flux-weakening method 2
Selection of weak magnetism method of synchronous motor: 0: No weak magnetism; the target frequency will be
adjusted automatically based on the voltage saturation to avoid no weak magnetism; the normal weak magnetism
of synchronous motor can be realized by both weak magnetism method 1 and 2.

P0.1.41 Max. flux-weakening current 0.0%～300.0% 110.0
When the synchronous motor is under weak magnetism, the max. exciting current will be restricted based on the
percentage of motor rated current. It may lead to motor demagnetization if speed is too high, or fail to reach the
target frequency if speed is too low.

P0.1.42 Over-modulation coefficient 100%～120% 110
This function code can control the synchronous motor and adjust the overmodulation coefficient; both voltage
utilization rate and current harmonic will increase along with the increasing overmodulation coefficient.

P0.1.43 Voltage margin 0%～100% 5
Calculate the coefficient of the max. output voltage and the output voltage will decrease along with the increase of
margin.

P0.1.44 Flux-weakening proportionality coefficient 0～50 0
P0.1.45 Flux-weakening integral coefficient 0～50 5
When weak magnetism method is selected as 0 and 1, the adjustment speed may increase and oscillation may
occur when the weak magnetism parameter PI increases; the adjustment speed may decrease and no modification
is required if the parameter decreases.
99
Magnetic pole position 0: Identification before each run
P0.1.48 identification method before 1: Identification before first run 0
the operation 2: No identification
When SVC control is entered, select 0 to identify the magnetic pole angle prior to running; select 1 to identify the
first running after power-on; select 2 to skip identification. When FVC control is entered and the non-absolute
value encoder (ABZ encoder) is used for the first time after power-on, select 0 or 1 to have identification in the
first running after power on, or select 2 to skip identification; if the absolute value encoder (rotary transformer,
UVW encoder), this function code will become invalid.

P0.1.49 Identification current of magnetic pole position 30%～150% 80
This function code can modify the identified current at the magnetic pole position of synchronous motor; the
identified current and sound will increase along with the increase of coefficient; or the identification can be
inaccurate if the coefficient is too low.

Low-speed carrier wave for open loop vector
P0.1.52 0.5-max. carrier wave 1.5
control of synchronous motor
Set the carrier wave at low speed of synchronous motor; the electromagnetic sound may increase when carrier
wave is decreased, or it may lead to low-speed capacity and poor control effects if carrier wave is too high.

Switching frequency for low-speed carrier wave
P0.1.53 0%～100% 50
of open loop vector of synchronous motor
This function code can control the frequency point of carrier wave of P0.1.55 and P1.0.22 based on the percentage
of motor rated frequency.

Influence current compensation of dead-time
P0.1.54 0%～100% 30
compensation
This function code can set the increase percentage of exciting current at low speed; it may increase the current if
exciting current is too high; otherwise, it may affect the low-speed control effects and no modification is required.

P0.1.55 Velocity filtering coefficient 0～1000 100
This function code can set the speed feedback filtering parameter; when this parameter increases, the filtering will
increase but response speed will decrease; when this parameter decreases, the filtering will decrease, response
speed with increase, but it may affect the oscillation.
6.2 Group P1 - Motor Control Parameter

Group P1.0 - Basic Group
0: Straight Line
P1.0.00 V/F Curve Mode 2: Square V/F Curve 1 0
0: Straight Line V/F

Applicable for common constant torque load
100
VF Relation Curve of any broken lines can be acquired through setting Function Code P1.1.00 ~ P1.1.05.
2: Square V/F
It applies to light-load centrifugal load.
Refer to relation curve between straight line V/F and square V/F
Each curve is shown in the figure below:
Output Voltage Multi-pint Broken Line
Straight Line
Square V/F Curve.1

Square V/F Curve.2
Square V/F Curve.3
Output Frequency

00.0% (Automatic Torque Boost)
P1.0.01 Torque Boost Machine type
00.1%~30.0%
Cutoff Frequency of Torque
P1.0.02 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 050.00
Boost
In order to compensate the property of controlling the lower frequency torque by V/F, the boosting compensation
is conducted for output voltage in low-frequency working area. Under normal circumstances, the factory set value
can meet the requirements, if the compensation is too great, the current fault may occur. When the load is heavier
and the low-frequency torque of the motor is not enough, it suggests increasing this parameter. When the load is
lighter, this parameter can be reduced.
The frequency inverter is automatic torque boost when the torque boost is set at 00.0%, the frequency inverter can
automatically calculate the required torque boost value based on the parameters of the motor as stator, resistance,
etc.
Torque Boost Cut-off Frequency: when the output frequency is below this set value, the torque boost is valid, in
case of exceeding this set value, the torque boost is invalid

P1.0.03 V/F Slip Compensation Gain 000.0%~200.0% 000.0
This function code is only valid for asynchronous motor and the percentage relative to rated slip of motor. When it
is the slip that is compensated by the motor for rated load, the rated slip of the motor can be calculated and
acquired based on rated frequency of the motor and rated speed. V/F Slip Compensation can compensate
asynchronous motor for the speed deviation of the motor occurred from load increase so as to make the speed able
to basically keep stable.
101
Factory set
value
P1.0.04 Velocity Loop Proportional Gain 1 001~100 030
P1.0.05 Velocity Circulation Integral Time 1 00.01~10.00 00.50
P1.0.06 Switching Frequency 1 000.00Hz~P1.0.09 005.00
P1.0.07 Velocity Loop Proportional Gain 2 001~100 020
P1.0.08 Velocity Circulation Integral Time 2 00.01~10.00 01.00
P1.0.09 Switching Frequency 2 P1.0.06~Highest Frequency 010.00
The above parameters can realize that the frequency inverter may select the parameters of different Velocity Loop
PI at different running frequency. When the running frequency is less than the switch frequency 1(P1.0.06), the
parameters of Velocity Loop PI are adjusted to P1.0.04 and P1.0.05.
When the running frequency is greater that the switch frequency 2 (P1.0.09), the parameters of Velocity Loop are
P1.0.07 and P1.0.08.
The parameters of Velocity Loop PI between switch frequency 1 and switch frequency 2 are the linear switch of
two groups of PI parameters.
PI Parameter
Velocity Loop Proportional Gain 1
Velocity Circulation Integral Time 1
Velocity Loop Proportional Gain 2

Velocity Circulation Integral Time 2 Running Frequency
Switching Frequency.1 Switching Frequency.2
The increase of proportional gain P can speed up the dynamic response of the system, but if P is too great, it may
easily vibrate. The decrease of integration time I can speed up the dynamic response of the system, but if I is too
small, it may have large overshoot and easily vibrate. Generally, the proportional gain P is first adjusted so as to
increase P as possible under the preconditions of ensuring non-vibration of the system, and then it is to adjust the
integration time I to make the system not only have rapid response property, but small overshoot.

0: Direct Start
P1.0.10 Start Mode 1: Speed Tracking Mode 0
2: Brake and Restart
0: Direct Start
The frequency inverter starts running from start frequency.
1: Rotating Speed before Start

The frequency inverter shall first judge the rotating speed and direction of the motor and then track down the start
frequency of motor, the rotating motor smoothly starts without any surge. It is applicable for momentary
interruption restart of the high inertia loads. In order to ensure the performance of rotating speed before start,
accurate setting of the motor parameters is required.
2: Brake before Start

First conduct DC braking and them start running from start frequency.

0: Start from Shutdown Frequency
P1.0.11 Speed Tracking Mode 1: Start from Zero Speed 0
2: Start from Highest Frequency
0: Start from Stop Frequency

Track down from the frequency at the moment of stop and adopt this method as usual.
102
1: Start from Zero Speed
Track up from zero frequency and adopt this method when start after longer stop time.
2: Start from Highest Frequency

Track down from highest frequency
Note: this function code is only valid when the start mode is speed tracking start (i.e. P1.0.10=1)

P1.0.12 Start Frequency 00.00Hz~10.00Hz 00.00
P1.0.13 Hold Time of Start Frequency 000.0s~100.0s 000.0
Start Frequency: refer to running frequency when the frequency inverter starts.
In order to ensure that the motor has a certain start torque, proper start frequency shall be given. If the setting is
too great, the overcurrent may occur. When the reference frequency is less than start frequency, the frequency
inverter cannot start and is at ready mode (when jogging, it is not subject to the impact of start frequency).
Hold Time of Start Frequency: refer to the running time of starting the frequency during the process of start.

P1.0.14 Starting DC Brake Current 000%~100% 000
P1.0.15 Starting DC Brake Time 000.0s~100.0s 000.0
Starting DC Brake Current: refer to the output current in the process of starting DC brake, which is the percentage
relative to rated current of the motor, the larger the starting DC brake current, the greater the braking force is.
Starting DC Brake Time: refer to duration time of outputting the start DC brake current in the process of starting
the frequency inverter.

0: Reducing speed to shut down
P1.0.16 Shutdown mode 0
1: Shut down freely
0: Stop by Speed Deceleration

After the stop command is effective, the frequency inverter reduces the output frequency based on deceleration
time and stops after the frequency is reduced to 0.
1: Free Stop
After the stop command is effective, the frequency inverter immediately stops outputting and the motor stops
freely based on mechanical inertia at this time.

P1.0.17 Stop DC Braking Initial Frequency 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 000.00
P1.0.18 Stop DC Braking Waiting Time 000.0s~100.0s 000.0
P1.0.19 Stop DC Braking Current 000%~100% 000
P1.0.20 Stop DC Braking Time 000.0s~100.0s 000.0
When the output frequency is reduced to the frequency set by P1.0.17 in the stopping process by reducing the
speed, after Stop DC Braking Waiting Time set by P1.0.18, it starts to output braking current set by P1.0.19 and
conduct DC brake process, until satisfy DC brake time set by P1.0.20 and the inverter stops DC brake.
Properly set Stop DC Braking Waiting Time (P1.0.18) to prevent the faults as overcurrent arising from start DC
brake at higher speed. Stop DC Braking Current (P1.0.19) refers to the percentage relative to rated current of the
motor. The higher the stop DC braking current is, the larger the brake force is. When Stop DC Braking Waiting
Time is set at 000.0, the stop DC brake function is invalid.
Note: P1.0.17 and P1.0.18 also have climbing function. It can improve the instability of braking. During the
process of braking, after reducing speed to the frequency set by P1.0.17 and pausing the time set by P1.0.18,
deacceleration continues until braking. Generally, P1.0.17 is set as 0.05Hz and P1.0.18 is set as 0.1s.
103

P1.0.21 Braking Use Rate 000%~100% 100
This function code is only valid for the frequency inverter of the built-in brake unit. CDI-E100, E102 Series has
complete built-in brake units, but CDI-E180 Series 15Kw and below has built-in brake units. but it is option
configuration for E180 Series 18.5～30kW.
As for duty ratio of adjusting the brake units, the higher the brake usage rate is, the higher the duty ratio of the
brake unit action is and the stronger the brake effect is, but the Bus line voltage fluctuation of the frequency
inverter is greater in the brake process.

P1.0.22 Carrier Frequency 0.50kHz~16.0kHz Machine type
This function code is used to regulate the carrier frequency of the frequency inverter. The regulation of the carrier
frequency can lower the noise of the motor and reduce the line-to-ground leakage current and the interference
arising from the frequency inverter. When the carrier frequency is lower, the high-order harmonic components of
output current increase, the losses of motor increase and the temperature of the motor rises. When the carrier
frequency is higher, the losses of motor are reduced and the temperature rise of the motor decreases, but the losses
of the frequency inverter increase and the temperature of the frequency inverter rise, so the interference is
enhanced.
The regulation of the carrier frequency can influence the following performance:
Carrier Frequency Low → High

Noise of Motor Large → Small
Output Current Waveform Bad → Good
Temperature Rise of Motor High → Low
Temperature Rise of Frequency inverter Low → High
Current Leakage Small → Large
External Radiation Interference Small → Large
Factory set
value
0: Rotate at running
P1.0.23 Fan Control 1: Continuous Running 0
2: Control based on Temperature
Refer to action mode used for selecting the cooling fan.
When at P1.0.23=0, the fans of the frequency inverter run at running state and can’t run at stop state.
When at P1.0.23=1, the fans keep running after power on.
When at P1.0.23=2, the fans run when the temperature of the radiator is higher than 35℃, but can’t run when
lower than 35℃.

0: Prohibition
1 :Curve 1
P1.0.24 Motor Overload Protection 1
2 :Curve 2
3 :Curve 3
Motor Overload Protection
P1.0.25 00.20~10.00 01.00
Level
P1.0.26 Motor Overload Alarm System 050%~100% 080
When at 1.0.24=0, the frequency inverter hasn’t had overload protection function to the motor, it suggests heating
the relay between frequency inverter and motor.
104
When at P1.0.24=1,2 or 3, the frequency inverter shall judge whether the motor is overload or not based on
inverse-time characteristic curve of the overload protection of the motor.
The users need to correctly set the value of P1.0.25 based on actual overload capability and load conditions of the
motor, if the set value is too small, it is easy to report the motor overload fault (Err10), while the set value is too
large, the motor may have the risk of being burnt, especially for the conditions that the rated current of the
frequency inverter is larger than the rated current of the motor. When at P1.0.25=01.00, it means that the motor
overload protection level is 100% rated current of the motor.
Function Code P1.0.26 is used to define when the early alarm is given before overload fault protection of the
motor. The larger the value is, the smaller the early alarm lead is. When the accumulative output current of the
frequency inverter is larger than product of multiplying overload inverse time curve by P1.0.26, the
multi-functional output terminal of the frequency inverter outputs Signal ON, and the corresponding
multi-functional output terminal is overload pre-alarm of the motor (6).
The overload inverse-time characteristic curve of E Series Frequency inverter is shown in the figure below:
Time
4mins
2mins
1mins Curve 1
30s Curve 2
Output
10s Curve 3
Current
Overload inverse-time characteristic curve
Group P1.1 - Expansion Group

Factory set
value
P1.1.00 Broken Line V/F Point 1 Frequency 000.00Hz~P1.1.02 000.00
P1.1.01 Broken Line V/F Point 1 Voltage 000.0%~100.0% 000.0
P1.1.02 Broken Line V/F Point 2 Frequency P1.1.00~P1.1.04 000.00
P1.1.04 Broken Line V/F Point 3 Frequency P1.1.02~Motor rated frequency 000.00
The above functions define V/F Curve with multi-point broken line, and the voltage of the above broken points is
the percentage relative to the rated voltage of the motor. V/F Curve with multi-point broken line is given based on
the load characteristics of the motor, but attention shall be paid that the relationship between three voltage points
and frequency points must meet: P1.1.00<P1.1.02<P1.1.04, P1.1.01<P1.1.03<P1.1.05, refer to the Description in
the figure below:
105
Voltage％
Frequency
Rated Frequency
Note: the voltage cannot be set too large when at low frequency, or the frequency inverter may have
overcurrent fault or its motor may be burnt.

P1.1.06 V/F Overexcited Gain 000~200 064
In the deceleration process of the frequency inverter, the pumping voltage can make DC Bus line voltage rise, the
overexcited control can restrain the rise of DC Bus line voltage to avoid occurrence of overvoltage fault. The
larger the overexcited gain is, the stronger the restraint effect is, but if the overexcited gain is too large, it is easy
to lead to increase of the output current, even overcurrent fault. As for the occasions where the rise of DC Bus line
voltage is not great or have brake resistance, it suggests setting the overexcited gain at 0.
Note: this function code is only valid when the control mode is V/F Control (i.e. P0.0.02=0).

Vector Control
P1.1.07 Torque Upper 0
6: MIN (VF1, VF2)
Frequency
7: MAX (VF1,VF2)

The upper limit of the vector control torque is given by the value at based on Function Code P1.1.08.

The vector control torque is given by the analog input terminal. E Series Frequency inverter provides 2-way
analog input terminal (VF1, VF2). VF1 and VF2 can input 0V~10V voltage or 0/4mA~20mA current. As for
corresponding relation curve between the input of VF1 and VF2 and the upper limit of torque, the users can freely
P8.1.05~P8.1.12.
106
The vector control is given by different composite state of Multiplex Directive Terminal. E Series Frequency

The vector control is set by high-speed impulse frequency of digital input terminal D16 (the terminal function is
not defined). The corresponding relationship between high-speed impulse frequency and torque upper limit value
can be set through Function Code P2.0.23~P2.0.26, that is, linear relationship.
The upper limit of vector control torque is set by the upper computer through communication mode (refer to
Chapter VIII for more details).
6: MIN (VF1, VF2)
The upper limit of vector control torque is set by the input value of VF1 and VF2, whichever is lower.
7: MAX (VF1, VF2)
The upper limit of vector control torque is set by the input value of VF1 and VF2, whichever is larger.
The reference frequency is determined by the operation results after setting calculation of the internal operation

Standby Torque Source 1 and Standby Torque Source 2 are reserved by the manufacturer as frequency sources
used for special occasions in future, so the users may ignore them as usual.
Note: when the upper limit of the vector control torque is set by VF1 &VF2, multiplex directive, PULSE,
communication and operation results, the corresponding range is the value set by P1.1.08.

P1.1.08 Torque Upper Limit Reference 000.0%~200% 150.0
When at P1.1.07=0, the set value of this function code determines the upper limit of the vector control torque,
which is the percentage relative to the rated torque of the motor.

P1.1.09 Inversion Control Enable 0: Allow 1: Prohibit 0
This function code is used to set whether the frequency inverter is allowed to run at reverse state.
When at P1.1.09=0, the frequency inverter is allowed to run at reversal state.
When at P1.1.09=1, the frequency inverter is prohibited to run at reversal state, which is mainly used for the
occasions that the load is unable to reverse.
Note: the director of this function code is defined by the set value relative to running direction (P0.0.06)

P1.1.10 Forward and Reverse Dead Time 0000.0s~3000.0s 0000.0
This function code is used to set the duration time of outputting OHz when the frequency inverter is in the process
of forward and reverse switch

P1.1.11 Power-on Running Selection 0: Running 1: Not Running 0
107
This function code is used to set when the frequency inverter runs in response to valid running command at the
moment of power-on.
When at P1.1.11=0, the frequency inverter directly responds to the running

When at P1.1.11=1, frequency inverter can’t respond to the running. It cannot run until the running command is
valid again after it is cancelled.

P1.1.12 Droop Control 00.00Hz~10.00Hz 00.00
When more than one motor drive the same load, the uneven distribution of the load may occur. The droop control
decreases the output frequency along the increase of the load so as to realize even load of more than one motor.
The set value of this function code is the frequency value declined at rated load.

0: Speed Control
P1.1.13 Speed/Torque Control Mode Selection 0
1: Torque Control
This function code is used to set what kind of running mode of the frequency inverter is adopted, speed control
mode or torque control mode.
When at P1.1.13=0, the speed control mode is adopted
When at P1.1.13=1, the torque control mode is adopted

6: MIN (VF1,VF2)
P1.1.14 Torque Reference Source 00
7: MAX (VF1,VF2)

The upper limit of the vector control torque is given by the value at based on Function Code P1.1.15.

The torque Reference is given by the analog input terminal. E Series Frequency inverter provides 2-way analog
input terminal (VF1, VF2). VF1 and VF2 can input 0V~10V voltage or 0/4mA~20mA current. As for
corresponding relation curve between the input of VF1 and VF2 and the torque set value, the users can freely
P8.1.05~P8.1.12.

The torque reference is given by different composite state of Multiplex Directive Terminal. E Series Frequency
108
The torque reference is given by high-speed impulse frequency of digital input terminal D16 (the terminal
function is not defined). The corresponding relationship between high-speed impulse frequency and torque upper
limit value can be set through Function Code P2.0.23~P2.0.26, that is, line relationship.
The torque reference is given by the upper computer through communication mode (refer to Chapter VIII for more
details).
6: MIN (VF1, VF2)

The torque reference is given by the input value of VF1 and VF2, whichever is lower.
7: MAX (VF1, VF2)

The torque reference is given by the input value of VF1 and VF2, whichever is larger.

The torque reference is determined by the operation results after setting calculation of the internal operation
module. Refer to the Description for Function Code P3.2.26~P3.2.39 for more details of the operation module.
The operation results can be viewed through Function Code 9.0.46~P9.0.49.
Standby Torque Source 1 and Standby Torque Source 2 are reserved by the manufacturer as frequency sources
used for special occasions in future, so the users may ignore them as usual.
Note: when the torque is set by VF1 &VF2, multiplex directive, PULSE, communication and operation
results, the corresponding range is the value set by P1.1.15.

P1.1.15 Torque Digital Reference -200.0%~200.0% 150.0
When at P1.1.14=0, the set value of this function code determines the torque reference, which is the percentage
relative to the rated torque of the motor.
Factory set
value
P1.1.16 Torque Control FWD Frequency Limit 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 050.00
P1.1.17 Torque Control REV Frequency Limit 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 050.00
This function code is used to set the highest frequency in forward and reverse running when the frequency inverter
runs in torque control mode (i.e. P1.1.13=1).

P1.1.18 Torque Acceleration Time 0000.0s~6500.0s 0000.0
P1.1.19 Torque Deceleration Time 0000.0s~6500.0s 0000.0
These two function codes are used to set the acceleration time of the torque rise and the deceleration time of the
torque decline when running in torque control mode (i.e. P1.1.13=1). They may be set to 0 for the occasions
requiring rapid response.
Group P1.0：Extension Group (Dedicated for Asynchronous Motor 1.5x Version)
Function code Function Name Setting scope Factory set
109
value
P1.1.20 VF oscillation suppression mode 1～4 1
When VF oscillation suppression mode is entered and the motor has oscillation, the different oscillation
suppression effects will be realized along with the changes of oscillation suppression methods.
Factory set
value
P1.1.21 Response time of VF slip compensation 0-10.0s 0.5
When slip compensation function P1.0.03 is enabled, this function code P1.1.21 can adjust the response time of
slip compensation; the compensation response will increase along with the time decrease. Decrease this function
code when there’s oscillation.
Factory set
value
P1.1.22 VF online torque compensation gain 0～200 150
This function code can improve the torque compensation during auto lifting of torque (P1.0.01=0); no
modification of this function code is required when stator resistance is identified. It may lead to low compensation
torque if this function code is too low, or lead to high compensation torque if this function code is too high. It is
suggested to set this function code as 150 when parameters are identified.
Factory set
value
P1.1.23 Flux closed loop bandwidth 0-5.00HZ 2.00
When control of asynchronous motor is entered, the closed-loop intensity of magnetic flow will increase along
with the increase of closed-loop bandwidth of magnetic flow and it may also lead to oscillation.
Factory set
value
P1.1.29 Velocity filtering of open loop vector 0～100ms 15
Set the feedback filtering coefficient of open-loop vector speed of asynchronous motor; the response speed
willdecrease along with the increase of filtering, or the response speed will increase along with the decrease of
filtering, and it may also lead to oscillation.
Factory set
value
P1.1.30 Over-modulation coefficient 100%～120% 105
Set the max. output voltage of vector control of asynchronous motor; the output voltage will increase along with
the value and the current harmonic in weak magnetism will also increase.
Factory set
value
P1.1.32 Response mode of open loop vector 0～2 1
In speed response mode of open-loop vector control of asynchronous motor, the response speed will increase
along with the increase of set value; otherwise, the response speed will decrease. Increase this value to increase
the speed response.
Factory set
value
P1.1.34 Tuning KP coefficient 1～200 100
When oscillation occurs, decrease the KP parameter used in parameter identification by 20, until oscillation is
stopped. It may lead to inaccurate identification is this parameter is too low, or it may lead to oscillation and
wrong identification if this parameter is too high; generally, no adjustment is required.
Factory set
value
P1.1.35 Tuning KI coefficient 1～200 100
110
When oscillation occurs, decrease the KI parameter used in parameter identification by 20, until oscillation is
stopped. It may lead to inaccurate identification is this parameter is too low, or it may lead to oscillation and
wrong identification if this parameter is too high; generally, no adjustment is required.
6.3 Group P2 - Input/Output Terminal Function

The input and output terminals of CDI-E100 Series, E102 Series and E180 Series are configured as below:
CDI-E100 Series CDI-E102 Series CDI-E180 Series
6-way digital input terminal 5-way digital input terminal 6-way digital input terminal (DI1~DI6), in
(DI1~DI6), in which D16 can (DI1~DI6), in which D16 can which DI6 can connect high-speed
connect high-speed Impulse Input connect high-speed Impulse Input Impulse Input. Additional 4-way digital
input terminal (DI7~DI10) is added
through externally connected I/O
expansion card
2-way Analog Input (VF1 & VF2) 2-way Analog Input (VF1 & VF2) Additional 1-way (VF3) is added through
externally connected IO expansion card
for 2-way analog imput (VF1, VF2)
2-way Analog Input (FM1 & 1-way Analog Input FM1 2-way Analog Input (FM1 & FM2)
FM2)
One-way Collector Output (YO) N/A One-way Collector Output (YO) (Use
(Use Terminal YO/FMP as YO) Terminal YO/FMP as YO) can add
additional 2-way (YO1 and YO2) through
externally connected I/O expansion card
Two-way Relay Output (T1 &T2) 1-way Relay Output (T1 &T2) 2-way Relay Output (T1 &T2)
One-way Impulse Output One-way Impulse Output Terminal (FMP)
Terminal FMP) N/A (Use Terminal YO/FMP as FMP)
(Use Terminal YO/FMP as FMP)
Note: YO/FMP Terminal is common terminal of YO and FMP, but only one can be used at the same time
(select through function code P2.1.20).

P2.0.00 DI1Terminal Function 0~59 01 ( FWD Running)
P2.0.01 DI2 Terminal Function 0~59 02 (Reverse Running)
P2.0.02 DI3 Terminal Function 0~59 09 (Multiplex Directive Terminal 1)
P2.0.05 DI6 Terminal Function 0~59 08 (Free Stop)
P2.0.06 DI7 Terminal Function 0~59 00
The above function codes are used to set the functions of digital input terminals and the functions for option are
shown in the table below:
Set value Function Description

0 No Function Define the not in-service terminals as “Unused” to prevent malfunctions.
1 Forward Running (FWD) Control FWD and REV of the frequency inverter through these two
2 Reverse Running (REV) terminals.
Confirm that the running mode of the frequency inverter is three-line
3 3-line Running Control control mode through this terminal. Refer to the Description for Terminal
Control in 7.1.1.
4 Forward Jogging Control FWD Jogging and REV Jogging through of the frequency
inverter through these two terminals and be valid for any running control
5 Reverse Jogging mode. The running frequency and acceleration & deceleration time of the
inching refer to the description for0.1.08,P0.1.09 and P0.1.10 .
111
6 Terminal UP When the reference frequency is given by the keyboard, increase or
7 Terminal DOWN decreases the reference frequency through these two terminals.
When the terminal state is valid, the frequency inverter is blocked to
output, the shut-down of the motor is not subject to the control of the
8 Free Stop
frequency inverter at this moment. This mode has same meaning of free
stop described in P1.0.16.
Multiplex Directive
9
Terminal 1
Multiplex Directive
10
Terminal 2 Realize the references of 16 kinds of the directive through 16 kinds of
Multiplex Directive states of these four terminals.
11
Terminal 3
Multiplex Directive
12
Terminal 4
Realize remote fault reset through this terminal and have same function
13 Fault Reset (RESET)
with RESET Key on Keyboard.
When this terminal state is valid, the terminal slows down and stops, but
14 Running Pause all running parameter are memorized. When this terminal state is invalid,
the frequency inverter is resets to running state before stop.
When this terminal state is valid, the frequency inverter gives an alarm of
15 External Fault Input Err13, and then the fault is handled based on fault protection action
mode.
Acceleration &
16 Deceleration Time
Selection Terminal 1
Realize the switch among four groups of straight acceleration and
Acceleration & deceleration time, refer to Appendix 3 for more details.
17 Deceleration Time
Frequency Source
18
When at P0.1.00=8, the functions of these terminals are valid. Realize
Frequency Source
19 the switch among 8 kinds of frequency sources through 8 kinds of state
of these three terminals.
Frequency Source
20
Running Command
21
Selection Terminal 1 Realize the switch among running control modes through close/open
Running Command state of these two terminals
22
When the reference frequency is given by the keyboard, this terminal
UP/DOWN Reference can remove the frequency allowance adjusted by Terminal UP/DOWN or
23
Reset Key▲ &▼ on Keyboard to reset the reference frequency to the value
given by P0.0.05.
Prohibition of Acceleration When this terminal state is valid, the output frequency of the frequency
24
& Deceleration inverter is not impacted by the signal (except for stop command)
PID Control fails temporarily, the frequency inverter maintains the
25 PID Pause running of current output frequency and can’t conduct PID Regulation of
the frequency source.
During executing process of PLC, the frequency inverter is reset the
26 PLC State Reset
frequency inverter to initial state of Simple PLC through this terminal
The frequency inverter outputs in central frequency and the wobbulating
27 Wobbulating Pause
function suspends.
Be used for defining the output terminal of count impulse. If it is
28 Counter Input
high-speed pulse, connect Terminal DI6.
29 Counter Reset Conduct reset handling to counter.
Be used for defining the output terminal of length count impulse. If it is
30 Length Counting Input
high-speed pulse, connect Terminal D16.
31 Length Reset Conduct reset handling to length.
112
Prohibit the frequency inverter from running in torque control mode, and
32 Torque Control Prohibition
the frequency inverter only can run in speed control mode.
33 PULS Impulse Input Define PULS Impulse Input Terminal and connect Terminal DI6.
When this terminal state is valid, the frequency inverter is directly
34 Immediate DC Brake
switched to DC Switch State.
When this terminal state is invalid, the frequency inverter gives an alarm
External Fault
35 of Err13, and then the fault is handled based on fault protection action
Normally-closed Input
mode.
When this terminal state is invalid, the frequency inverter cannot respond
Frequency Modification the modification to frequency.
36
Enable When this terminal state is valid, the frequency inverter responds the
modification to frequency.
When this terminal state is valid, the direction of PID Action is opposite
PID Action Direction
37 to the direction given by P4.0.03. Additionally, when P0.0.06=2, the
Negation
terminal is valid and the running direction adopts reversed direction.
When the running control mode is keyboard control (P0.0.03=0), the
38 External Stop Terminal 1
terminal can stop through this terminal.
In any of running control modes, the frequency inverter can slow down
39 External Stop Terminal 2
and stop at deceleration time 4 through this terminal.
When the units digit of P4.2.08 is 1 (i.e. the integral separation is valid
and this terminal is valid, the functions of integral regulation of PID
40 PID Integral Stop
stops temporarily, but the functions of proportional regulation and
integral regulation of PID are still valid.
When the switch conditions of PID parameters are the terminal
41 PID Parameter Switch (P4.0.13=1), this terminal state is invalid, adopt PID Parameter 1.
When this terminal state is valid, adopt PID Parameter 2.
Realize the switch of the frequency inverter between torque control
mode and speed control mode. This terminal state is invalid, the
Speed Control/Torque
42 frequency inverter runs in setting mode of P1.1.13 (Speed/Torque
Control Switch
Control Mode), when this terminal state is valid, it is switched to another
mode.
When this terminal is valid, the frequency inverter outputs the voltage in
43 Emergency Stop
enclosed mode and freely stops by inertia.
When the terminal state is valid, the frequency inverter slows down to
44 Deceleration DC Brake Start Frequency of Stop DC Brake and then is switched to Stop DC
Brake State.
When: User-Defined Fault 1 and 2 are valid, the frequency inverter
45 User-Defined Fault 1 respectively give an alarm of Err21 and Err22 and then the faults are
handled based on fault protection action mode.
46 User-Defined Fault 2
During the running process, it is to conduct reset handling for current
47 Running Time Reset running time, current running time can be viewed through Function Code
P9.0.23.
When internal timer is controlled by this terminal, this terminal controls
48 Timer Input Terminal 1 the start or stop of the timer, refer to the Description of Function Code
P3.2.23.
When internal timer is controlled by this terminal, this terminal controls
49 Timer Input Terminal 2 the start or stop of the timer, refer to the Description of Function Code
P3.2.23.
When internal timer reset is controlled by this terminal, this terminal
50 Timer Reset Terminal 1 state is valid, the timer resets, refer to the Description of Function Code
P3.2.23.
When internal timer reset is controlled by this terminal, this terminal
51 Timer Reset Terminal 2 state is valid, the timer resets, refer to the Description of Function Code
P3.2.23.
113
Encoder Phase A Define the signal input terminal of Encoder A and B. Terminal D15 and
52
Input D16 of CDI-E100 Series can connect high-speed impulse of the encoder,
the impulse frequency of the encoder of other terminals is not greater
Encoder Phase B
53 than 200Hz. The impulse frequency of CDI-E180 Series encoder must
Input
be less than 200Hz.
54 Distance Reset Conduct reset handling to the distance
Integral Computation
55 Reset the integral computation in operation module
Reset
56~59 User Function 1~4 Reservation
Start by tracing its When setting as starting by tracing its rpm(P1.0.10=1), the terminal is
60
rpm is prohibited effective and switches to start directly.
Appendix 1 Description for Functions of Multiplex Directive Terminals

Corresponding
Terminal 4 Terminal 3 Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Multiplex Directive Reference
parameter
OFF OFF OFF OFF Multiplex Directive 0 P3.0.03
OFF OFF OFF ON Multiplex Directive 1 P3.0.05
OFF OFF ON OFF Multiplex Directive 2 P3.0.07
OFF OFF ON ON Multiplex Directive 3 P3.0.09
OFF ON OFF OFF Multiplex Directive 4 P3.0.11
OFF ON OFF ON Multiplex Directive 5 P3.0.13
OFF ON ON OFF Multiplex Directive 6 P3.0.15
OFF ON ON ON Multiplex Directive 7 P3.0.17
ON OFF OFF OFF Multiplex Directive 8 P3.0.19
ON OFF OFF ON Multiplex Directive 9 P3.0.21
ON OFF ON OFF Multiplex Directive 10 P3.0.23
ON OFF ON ON Multiplex Directive 11 P3.0.25
ON ON OFF OFF Multiplex Directive 12 P3.0.27
ON ON OFF ON Multiplex Directive 13 P3.0.29
ON ON ON OFF Multiplex Directive 14 P3.0.31
ON ON ON ON Multiplex Directive 15 P3.0.33
Explanation: when the multiplex directive corresponds to frequency, the corresponding parameter is the
percentage relative to highest frequency.
When the multiplex directive corresponds to torque, the corresponding parameter is the percentage relative
to digital reference torque.
When the multiplex directive corresponds PID, the corresponding parameter is the percentage relative to
PID Reference Feedback range.
Appendix 2 Description for Functions of Frequency Source Selection Terminals

Terminal 3 Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Option of frequency source
OFF OFF OFF Frequency source A (correspond to P0.1.00=0)
OFF OFF ON Frequency source B (correspond to P0.1.00=1)
OFF ON OFF Frequency source A+B (correspond to P0.1.00=2)
OFF ON ON Frequency source A-B (correspond to P0.1.00=3)
ON OFF OFF Max. value of A & B (correspond to P0.1.00=4)
ON OFF ON Min. value of A & B (correspond to P0.1.00=5)
ON ON OFF Backup frequency source 1 (correspond to P0.1.00=6)
ON ON ON Backup frequency source 2 (correspond to P0.1.00=7)
Appendix 3 Description for Functions of Acceleration and Deceleration Time Selection Terminals
Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Option of acceleration/ deceleration time Corresponding parameters
OFF OFF Acceleration/ deceleration time 1 P0.0.11, P0.0.12
OFF ON Acceleration/ deceleration time 2 P0.0.11, P0.0.12
ON OFF Acceleration/ deceleration time 3 P0.1.13, P0.1.14
ON ON Acceleration/ deceleration time 4 P0.1.15, P0.1.16
114
Appendix 4 Description for Functions of Running Command Selection Terminals
Current Running Control Mode Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Running Control Mode
OFF ON Terminal Control
Keyboard Control
ON OFF Communication Control
(P0.0.03=0)
ON ON Communication Control
OFF ON Keyboard Control
Terminal Control
ON OFF Communication Control
(P0.0.03=1)
ON ON Keyboard Control
OFF ON Keyboard Control
Communication Control
ON OFF Terminal Control
(P0.0.03=2)
ON ON Keyboard Control
Note: when Terminal 1 and Terminal 2 are OFF, it is the running control mode set by Function Code
P0.0.03

P2.0.10 DI Filtering time 0.000s~1.000s 0.010
This function code is used to set the software filtering time of terminal DI input state. If the occasions, which use
Terminal DI Input, are easily to lead to false operation by interference, this parameter can be increased to enhance
the anti-interference ability, but the increase of the filtering time may cause slow response of Terminal DI.

0: Two-line Type 1
External Terminal Running 1: Two- line Type 2
P2.0.11 0
Control Mode 2: Three- line Type 1
3: Three-line Type 2
This function code defines that when the control running mode is terminal control (i.e. P0.0.03=1), there are four
different modes to control the running of the frequency inverter. Refer to Terminal Control in 7.1.1 for more
details.

P2.0.12 UP/DOWN Terminal Change Rate 00.001Hz/s~65.535Hz/s 01.000
The function code defines that when Terminal UP/DOWN is used to regulate the reference frequency , set the rate
of frequency variation.
When P0.2.04 (Decimal Point of Frequency) is 2, the value range is 00.001Hz/s~65.535Hz/s.
When P0.2.04 (Decimal Point of Frequency) is 1, the value range is 000.01Hz/s~655.35Hz/s.

P2.0.13 Minimum Input of Curve 1 00.00V~P2.0.15 00.00
Corresponding reference for Minimum
P2.0.14 -100.0%~100.0% 000.0
Input of Curve 1
P2.0.15 Maximum Input of Curve 1 P2.0.13~10.00V 10.00
Corresponding reference for Maximum
P2.0.16 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0
Input of Curve 1
P2.0.17 VF1 Filtering time 00.00s~10.00s 00.10
The above function codes are used to set the relation between analog input and corresponding reference value,
that is, straight line relationship.
When the voltage of analog input is greater than the given “Max. Input of Curve 1” (P2.0.15), the analog is
calculated at “Max. Input of Curve 1”; similarly when the voltage of analog input is lower than the given “Min.
Input of Curve 1” (P2.0.13), the calculation shall be at min. input or 0.0% according to the setting of “ Curve
below Mix. Input Reference Selection”.
VF1 Input Filtering Time is used to set the software filtering time of VF1, when the on-site analog is easily to be
disturbed, the filtering time shall be increased to make the tested analog input to be stable, but the greater filtering
time makes the response speed of the analog test become slow, so how to balanceset needs is based on actual
situations of the applications.
115
Explanation: when the analog inputs corresponding frequency, the corresponding given value is the
percentage relative to highest frequency.
When the analog inputs corresponding torque, the corresponding given value is the percentage relative to
digital reference torque.
When the analog inputs corresponding PID, the corresponding reference value is the percentage relative to
PID Reference Feedback range.
When the analog inputs corresponding time, the corresponding given value is the percentage relative to
running time (P3.1.02).
NOTE: The default value of inverter’s analog input is 0V ~ 10V. If the input is 0mA ~ 20mA, it will remain
0V ~ 10V; if the input is 4mA ~ 20mA, it will remain 2V ~ 10V.
Factory set
value
P2.0.18 Minimum Input of Curve 2 00.00V~P2.0.20 00.00
Corresponding reference for Minimum Input of
P2.0.19 -100.0%~100.0% 000.0
Curve 2
P2.0.20 Maximum Input of Curve 2 P2.0.18~10.00V 10.00
Corresponding reference for Maximum Input of
P2.0.21 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0
Curve 2
P2.0.22 VF2 Filtering time 00.00s~10.00s 00.10
The functions and use methods of Curve 2 refer to the Description of Curve 1.
Factory set
value
P2.0.23 Minimum Input of PULS 0.00kHz~ P2.0.25 000.00
P2.0.24 Corresponding reference for Minimum Input of PULS -100.0%~100.0% 000.0
P2.0.25 Maximum Input of PULS P2.0.23~100.00kHz 050.00
P2.0.26 Corresponding reference for Maximum Input of PULS -100.0%~100.0% 100.0
P2.0.27 PULS Filtering time 00.00s~10.00s 00.10
The above function codes are used to set the relation between PULS Impulse Frequency and corresponding
reference value, that is, straight line relationship.
When the input impulse frequency is greater than the given “Max. PULS Input”(P2.0.25),the impulse frequency is
calculated at “Max. PULS Input”; similarly, when the input impulse frequency is lower than the given “Min.
PULS Input”(P2.0.23),the impulse frequency is calculated at “Min. PULS Input”.
PULS Input Filtering time is used to set the software filtering time of PULS Impulse Frequency, when the on-site
impulse is easily to be disturbed, the filtering time shall be increased to make the tested impulse frequency trend
to be stable, but the greater filtering time makes the response speed of detecting the impulse frequency become
slow, so how to balanceset needs is based on actual situations of the applications.
Note: when the PULS Impulse Frequency inputs corresponding frequency, the corresponding given value is
the percentage relative to highest frequency.
When the PULS Impulse Frequency inputs corresponding torque, the corresponding given value is the
percentage relative to digital reference torque.
When the PULS Impulse Frequency inputs corresponding PID, the corresponding given value is the
percentage relative to PID Reference feedback range.
Factory set
value
P2.0.28 Expansion Card YO1 Function Selection (Invalid E100) 00
P2.0.29 T1 Relay Function Selection 01
P2.0.30 T2 Relay Function Selection (Invalid E102) 02
0~59
P2.0.31 Expansion Card YO2 Function Selection (Invalid E100) 00
YO Function Selection (Use Terminal YO/FMP as
P2.0.32 00
YO,i.e.P2.1.20=1) (Invalid E102)
The above five function codes are used to select the functions of five multi-functional output terminals.
116
The Descriptions of multi-functional output terminals are as below:
0 No Function Multi-functional output terminals have no any functions.
Frequency inverter under When the frequency inverter is at running state, have output
1
Running frequency (able to be zero) and output Signal ON.
When the frequency inverter breaks down and shuts down, output
2 Fault Stop Output
Signal ON.
Frequency Level Testing FDT1
3 Refer to the Description for Function Code P2.2.03 and P2.2.04.
Output
4 Frequency Reached Refer to the Description for Function Code P2.2.02.
Zero-speed Running (no output When the frequency inverter is at running state and the output
5
when shut down) frequency is 0Hz, output Signal ON.
Before overload protection action of the motor, the judgment can
be made according to the threshold value of early alarm to
6 Motor Overload Pre-alarm overload, after exceeding the threshold value of early alarm,
output Signal ON. Refer to the Description for Function Code
P1.0.25 and P1.0.26.
Frequency inverter Overload The frequency inverter outputs Signal ON 10s prior to occurrence
7
Pre-alarm of overload protection.
When actual accounting value reaches the set value of Function
8 Reference Count Value Reached
Code P3.1.11, output Signal ON.
When actual accounting value reaches the set value of Function
9 Designated Count Value Reached
When actual length（P9.0.13） reaches the length set by Function
10 Length Reached
Code P3.1.08,output Signal ON.
When simple PLC running completes a cycle, output the impulse
11 PLC circulation cycle completed
signal with the width of 250ms.
Accumulative Running Time When the accumulative running time of the frequency inverter
12
Reached reaches the time set by Function Code P2.2.01, output Signal ON.
When the output frequency of the frequency inverter reaches
13 Frequency Limit
upper frequency or lower frequency, output Signal ON.
When the output torque of frequency inverter reaches limit value
14 Torque Limit
of the torque in speed control mode, output Signal ON.
When main circuits and control circuit power of the frequency
inverter have been stable and the inventor hasn’t defected out any
15 Ready for Running
fault information, and the frequency inverter is in running state,
output Signal ON.
When the input value of VF1 is greater than the input value of
16 VF1>VF2
VF2, output Signal ON.
When the output frequency reaches upper frequency, output
17 Upper Frequency Reached
Signal ON.
Lower Frequency Reached (no When the output frequency reaches lower frequency and the
18
output when shut down) frequency inverter is in running state, output Signal ON.
When the frequency inverter is in undervoltage state, output
19 Undervoltage state output
Signal ON.
20 Communication Reference Refer to the Description of Chapter 8.
When the value of the Analog VF1 Input is less than the value set
VF1 Output less than Lower
21 by Function Code P2.2.19 (Lower Limit of VF1 Input), output
Limit
Signal ON.
When the value of the Analog VF1 Input is greater than the value
22 VF1 Output more Upper Limit set by Function Code P2.2.20 (Upper Limit of VF1 Input), output
Signal ON.
117
Zero-speed Running 2 (also output when When the output frequency of the frequency inverter is
23
shut down) 0Hz, output Signal ON. In Stop Mode, this signal is ON.
When the accumulative power-on time of the frequency
24 Accumulative Power-on Time Reached inverter reaches the time set by Function Code P2.2.00,
output Signal ON.
Refer to the Description of Function Code P2.2.05 and
25 Frequency Level Testing FDT2 Output
P2.2.06.
26 Frequency 1 Reaches Output
P2.2.08
27 Frequency 2 Reaches Output
P2.2.10.
28 Current 1 Reaches Output
P2.2.16.
29 Current 2 Reaches Output
P2.2.18.
When the timing function selection (P3.1.00=1) is valid,
this running time reaches the given timing time, the
30 Timing Reaches Output
frequency inverter automatically shuts down, output
Signal ON in the process of shutdown and stop.
When the value of the analog input is greater than the
value (Upper Limit of VF1 Input)set by Function Code
31 VF1 Input Overlimit
P2.2.20 or less than the value (Lower Limit of VF1
Input)set by Function Code P2.2.19, output Signal ON
In off-load state, the frequency inverter outputs Signal
32 In Off-load
ON.
In reverse running state, the frequency inverter outputs
33 In Reverse Running
Signal ON.
34 Zero-current State
P2.2.12.
When the radiator temperature of the module of the
35 Module Temperature Reached frequency inverter reaches the temperature set by
Function Code P2.2.21, output Signal ON.
36 Output Current Overlimit
P2.2.14.
When the output frequency reaches lower frequency or
Lower Frequency Reached (also output
37 the reference frequency is less than the lower frequency
when shut down)
in stop state, output Signal ON.
When the frequency inverter fails, if the fault handling
mode is continuous running, output Signal ON. If the
38 Alarm Output fault handling mode is shutdown by speed reduction,
output Signal ON in the process of shutdown by speed
reduction.
When each phase of simple PLC is completed, output an
39 PLC Phase Completed
impulse signal with the width of 200ms.
When current running time of the frequency inverter
40 Current Running Time Reached exceeds the value set by Function Code P2.2.22, output
Signal ON and the frequency inverter cannot shut down.
When the frequency inverter fails and shuts down, output
41 Fault Output (Not Output for Undervoltage)
Signal ON. Output Signal OFF in undervoltage state.
When the time of Timer 1 reaches the time set by
42 Time of Timer 1 Reached
118
When the time of Timer 2 reaches the time set by Function
43 Time of Timer 2 Reached
When the time of Timer 1 reaches the time set by Function
Time of Timer 1 Reached but Time
44 Code P3.2.24 and the time of Timer 2 fails to reach the time set
of Timer 2 not Reached
by Function Code P3.2.25, output Signal ON.
45 User Function 1 Reservation
Synchronization Intermediate Relay
50 Have the same action with M1
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
When actual distance (P9.0.30) is greater than 0, output Signal
55 Distance over Zero
ON.
When actual distance (P9.0.30) reaches the distance set by
56 Distance Set value 1 Reached
When actual distance (P9.0.30) reaches the distance set by
57 Distance Set value 2 Reached
When the result 2 of the operation module is greater than 0,
58 Operation Result 2 greater than 0
output Signal ON.
When the result 4 of the operation module is greater than 0,
59 Operation Result 4 greater than 0
output Signal ON.

P2.0.33 Analog Output FM1 Reference 00
P2.0.34 Analog Output FM2 Reference (E102 invalid) 01
0~20
FMP Output Reference (Use Terminal YO/FMP
P2.0.35 00
as FMP, i.e. P2.1.20=0) (E102 invalid)
Function Code P2.0.33 and P2.0.34 respectively define the functions of Analog Output FM1 and FM2. Function
Code P2.0.35 defines FMP Impulse Output Function.
The output range of Analog Output FM1 and FM2 is 0V~10V voltage signal or 0mA~20mA current signal. The
deviation between actual output voltage and target output voltage of the analog output terminal can be adjusted
through Function Code P8.1.13~P8.1.20.
The range of FMP Output Impulse Frequency is 0.01kHz~P2.1.21 (Highest Frequency of FMP Output ), P2.1.21
can be set among 0.01kHz~100.00kHz.
The calibration relation between range of impulse output or analog output and corresponding functions are shown
in the table below:
119
Corresponding Function of Impulse or Analog Output
Set value Function
0.0%~100.0%
0 Running Frequency 0~Max. Output Frequency
1 Output Current 0~Max. Output Frequency
Output Torque (Absolute Value of
2 0~2 Times of Rated Current of the Motor
Torque)
3 Output Torque 0~2 Times of Rated Torque of the Motor
4 Output Power 0~2 Times of Rated Power
5 Output Voltage 0~1.2 Times of Rated Voltage of the Frequency inverter
6 PULSE Impulse Input 0.01kHz~100.00kHz
7 VF1 Voltage 0V~10V (or 0/4mA~20mA)
8 VF2 Voltage 0V~10V (or 0/4mA~20mA)
9 Keyboard Potentiometer Voltage 0V~10V
0~Reference Length Value (Set value of Function Code
10 Actual Length Value
P3.1.08)
0~Designated Count Value (Set value of Function Code
11 Actual Counting Value
P3.1.12)
12 Communication Reference Refer to the Description of Chapter VIII.
13 Motor Speed 0~Corresponding Speed of Max. Output Frequency
14 Output Current 0.0A~1000.0A
15 Bus line voltage 0.0V~1000.0V
-2 Times of Rated Torque of the Motor ~ 2 Times of Rated
16 Output Torque
Torque of the Motor
17 Operation Result 1 -1000~1000
18 Operation Result 2 0~1000
19 Operation Result 3 -1000~1000
20 Operation Result 4 0~1000

P2.0.36 Analog FM1 Output Offset -100.0%~100.0% 000.0
P2.0.37 Analog FM1 Output Gains -10.00~10.00 01.00
P2.0.38 Analog FM2 Output Offset (E102 invalid) -100.0%~100.0% 000.0
P2.0.39 Analog FM2 Output Gains (E102 invalid) -10.00~10.00 01.00
The above function codes are generally used for correcting zero drift of analog output and deviation of output
amplitude, but also can be used to customize the required analog output curve.
Actual Analog Output= Standard Analog Output ×Analog Output Gain+ Analog Output Offset
Standard Analog Output refers to the output analog value without offset and gain correction. Namely, voltage
output is 0 ~ 10V and cureent output is 0 ~ 20mA
The analog output bias is percentage of the max. voltage 10 V or current 20mA of standard analog output
For example: if output current signal is 4 ~ 20mA, analog output bias is set to 20% and analog output gain is set to
0.8.
120
Group P2.1 Expansion Group
1: Active Low Level
Ones: DI1 (E102 invalid)
Valid Model Selection 1 of
P2.1.00 Tens: DI2 00000
Terminal DI
Hundreds: DI3
Thousands: DI4
Ten Thousands: DI5
1: Active Low Level
Ones: DI6
Valid Model Selection 2 of
P2.1.01 Tens: DI7 (Invalid E100) 00000
Terminal DI
Hundreds: DI8 (Invalid E100)
Thousands: DI9 (Invalid E100)
Ten Thousands: DI10 (Invalid E100)
Be used for setting valid state mode of digital input terminal.
When selecting active high level, it is not valid until corresponding Terminal DI is connected, and the
disconnection is invalid.
When selecting active low level, it is not valid until corresponding Terminal DI is connected, and the
disconnection is invalid.
Note: DI7~DI10 are the terminals of CDI-E180 Series on Expansion Card I/0, but invalid for CDI-E100 and
E102 Series.
DI1 is invalid for E102 Series.

Ones: Curve Selected for VF1
Tens: Curve Selected for VF2
1: Curve 1
2: Curve 2
3: Curve 3
4: Curve 4
Hundreds: VF1 input resolution
Thousands: VF2 input resolution
Analog Input Curve
P2.1.02 Ten Thousands: Keyboard Potentiometer 00021
Selection
input resolution
0:00.01Hz
1:00.02Hz
2:00.05Hz
3:00.10Hz
4:00.20Hz
5:00.50Hz
6:01.00Hz(Keyboard Potentiometer is invalid)
The ones and tens of this function code are respectively used to select corresponding given curve of analog. Two
analog inputs can respectively select any one of four kinds of the curves. Curve 1 and Curve 2 are linear
relationship, refer to the setting of P2.0.13~P2.0.22 for more details, while Curve 3 and Curve 4 are broken line
relationship with two inflection points, refer to the setting of P2.1.04~P2.1.19 for more details. Hundreds,
thousands and ten thousands are used to select the input frequency resolution, minimum fluactuation value, of
VF1, VF2 and keyboard potentionmeter.
0: Corresponding Min. Input Reference
Selection for Curve less than Min.
P2.1.03 1: 0.0% H.00
Reference
Ones: VF1 Tens: VF2
This function code is used to set how to determine the corresponding reference of the analog when the analog
input is less than the given “Min. Input”.
The ones and tens of this function code respectively correspond to VF1 and VF2. If it is 0, when VF input is lower
121
than“ Min. Input”, this corresponding reference of this analog is “Corresponding reference of Min. Input”
(P2.0.14, P2.0.19, P2.1.05, P2.1.13) of the selected curve. If it is 1, when VF input is lower than “Min. Input”, this
corresponding reference of this analog is 0.0%.
Factory set
value
P2.1.04 Min. Input of Curve 3 00.00V~P2.1.06 00.00
P2.1.05 Corresponding reference for Min. Input of Curve 3 -100.0%~100.0% 000.0
P2.1.06 Curve 3 Inflection Point 1 Input P2.1.04~ P2.1.08 03.00
Corresponding reference for Curve 3 Inflection Point 1
P2.1.07 -100.0%~100.0% 030.0
Input
P2.1.08 Curve 3 Inflection Point 2 Input P2.1.06~ P2.1.10 06.00
Corresponding reference for Curve 3 Inflection Point 2
P2.1.09 -100.0%~100.0% 060.0
Input
P2.1.10 Max. Input of Curve 3 P2.1.08~10.00V 10.00
P2.1.11 Corresponding reference for Max. Input of Curve 3 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0
The functions and use methods of Curve 3 is roughly the same with Curve 1 and Curve 2 (refer to the Description
of Curve 1), the difference is that Curve 1 and Curve 2 are linear relationship without inflection point, but curve 3
is broken line relationship with two inflection point in the middle, refer to the Description in the figure below:
Corresponding Set
VF Input

P2.1.12 Min. Input of Curve 4 00.00V~P2.1.14 00.00
Corresponding reference for Min. Input of Curve
P2.1.13 -100.0%~100.0% -100.0
4
P2.1.14 Curve 4 Inflection Point 1 Input P2.1.12~P2.1.16 03.00
Corresponding reference for Curve 4 Inflection
P2.1.15 -100.0%~100.0% -030.0
Point 1 Input
P2.1.16 Curve 4 Inflection Point 2 Input P2.1.14~P2.1.18 06.00
Corresponding reference for Curve 4 Inflection
P2.1.17 -100.0%~100.0% 030.0
Point 2 Input
P2.1.18 Max. Input of Curve 4 P2.1.16~10.00V 10.00
Corresponding reference for Max. Input of Curve
P2.1.19 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0
4
As for the functions and use methods of Curve 4, refer to the Description of Curve 3.
YO/FMP Terminal Function (E102 0: Impulse output (FMP)
P2.1.20 1
invalid) 1: Open Collector Output (YO)
This function code is used to define that the Terminal YO/FMP is used as impulse output function or open
collector function.
If it is used as impulse output (i.e.P2.1.20=0), specific function refers to the Description for Function Code
P2.0.35, and the high frequency of the output impulse is determined by the set value of Function Code P2.1.21 at
122
the moment.
If it is used as open collector function (i.e.P2.1.20=1), specific function refers to the Description for Function
Code P2.0.32.
Function Code Function name Setting Scope Factory set value

Highest Frequency of FMP Output (E102
P2.1.21 000.01kHz~100.00kHz 050.00
invalid)
This function code is used to set the highest frequency of output impulse when Terminal YO/FMP is used as
impulse output (i.e.P2.1.20=0)

0: Positive Logic
1: Negative Logic
Valid Sate of Ones: YO (Invalid E102)
P2.1.22 Multi-functional Tens: T1 00000
Output Terminal Hundreds: T2 (Invalid E102)
Thousands: Expansion Card YO1 (Invalid E100)
Ten Thousands: Expansion Card YO2 (Invalid E100)
The ones, tens, hundreds, thousands and ten thousands of this function code respectively define the output logic of
Output Terminal YO, T1, T2, Expansion Card YO1 and YO2.
0: Positive Logic
When the output signal is valid, the multi-functional output terminal is connected. But When the output signal is
invalid, the multi-functional output terminal is disconnected.
1: Negative Logic
When the output signal is invalid, the multi-functional output terminal is connected. But when the output signal is
valid, the multi-functional output terminal is disconnected.

VF1 Terminal Function as 00: Use as Normal Analog
P2.1.23 00
VF2 Terminal Function as 00: Use as Normal Analog
P2.1.24 00
This group of function codes is used to set the functions when the analog input terminal VF is used as digital input
terminal DI. When VF is used as DI, VF and 10V are connected, VF Terminal State is high level, when VF and
10V are disconnected, and VF Terminal State is low level. the setting refers to the use and Description of the
functions refer to Function Code P2.0.00~P2.0.09.

1: Active Low Level
P2.1.25 Valid State Option of VF 00
Ones: VF1
Tens: VF2
This function code is used to confirm that the analog input terminal VF is used as digital input terminal DI , VF
Terminal State is active high level or active low level. Ones and Tens respectively represent VF1 and VF2.
Active High Level: the connection of VF and 10V is valid, but disconnection is invalid.
Active Low Level: the connection of VF and 10V is valid, but disconnection is invalid.

P2.1.26 DI1 Delay (E102 invalid) 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0
P2.1.27 DI2 Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0
P2.1.28 DI3 Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0
The above functions are used to set the delayed time arising from the impact of the signal on frequency inverter
when changes occur in signal DI1, DI2 and DI3.
123
P2.1.29 YO Delay (E102 invalid) 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0
P2.1.30 T1 Delay 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0
P2.1.31 T2 Delay (E102 invalid) 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0
The above function codes are used to set the delayed time of the frequency inverter from generating signal YO, T1
and T2 to output signal YO, T1 and T2.

P2.1.32 DI1 ineffective delay (this function is unavailable 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0
when unable to be set)
The function code above is used to set the delay of action time of signal to frequency converter when signal DI1,
DI2 and DI3 are invalid.
Group P2.2 - Auxiliary Group

P2.2.00 Accumulative Power-on Reaches Reference Time 0h~65000h 00000
This function code is used to set accumulative power-on time of the frequency inverter from the date of leaving
the factory. When actually accumulative power-on time reaches the value set by Function Code P2.2.00, the
multi-functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON. The corresponding function of
multi-functional output terminals is accumulative power-on Time Reached (24). The frequency inverter gives an
alarm of Fault Err23. If the setting is 0, the accumulative power-on time is not limited. Actually accumulative
power-on time can be viewed through Function Code P5.1.01.
Note: Only when actually accumulative power-on time (P5.1.01) is less than the value set by Function Code
P2.2.00, the frequency inverter can enter into normal running, if the setting is 0, the accumulative power-on
time is not limited.

P2.2.01 Accumulative Running Reaches Reference Time 0h~65000h 00000
This function code is used to set accumulative running time of the frequency inverter. When actually accumulative
running time reaches the value set by Function Code P2.2.01, the multi-functional output terminals of the
frequency inverter output Signal ON and the frequency inverter shuts down automatically. The corresponding
function of multi-functional output terminals is accumulative running Time Reached (12). The frequency inverter
gives an alarm of Fault Err24. Actually accumulative running time can be viewed through Function Code P5.1.00.
Note: Only when actually accumulative running time (P5.1.00) is less than the value set by Function Code
P2.2.01, the frequency inverter can enter into normal running, if the setting is 0, the accumulative running
time is not limited.
Factory set
value
P2.2.02 The reference frequency reaches test width 000.0%~100.0% 000.0
When the running frequency of frequency inverter is within positive and negative frequency with test width of the
reference frequency, the multi-functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON. The
reference value of this function code is the percentage relative to the high reference frequency. Corresponding
function of multi-functional output terminals is Frequency Reached (4), refer to the Description of the figure
below:
124
Output
frequency
Set Detected Width Frequency

frequency Detected Width Frequency
Time
Frequency
reaches test signal
Time
Test width Frequency= The reference frequency reaches test width (P2.2.02) ×Highest Frequency (P0.0.07)

P2.2.03 Frequency Test FDT1 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 050.00
P2.2.04 FDT1 Lagged Value 000.0%~100.0% 005.0
When the output frequency of the frequency inverter exceeds one value, the multi-functional output terminals of
the frequency inverter output Signal ON, this value is called as Tested Frequency FDT1. When the output
frequency of the frequency inverter is lower than a certain value of Tested Frequency FDT1, the multi-functional
output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal OFF, this value is called as Lagged FDT1 Frequency
Value. Corresponding function of multi-functional output terminals is Detected FDT1 Output of Frequency Level
(3), refer to the Description of the figure below:
Output
frequency
FDT1 Lagged Frequency

Value of FDT1
Time
Frequency reaches
test signal
Time
Lagged FDT1 Frequency Value= Tested Frequency FDT1 (P2.2.03) ×Lagged Value of FDT1

P2.2.05 Frequency Test FDT2 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 050.00
P2.2.06 FDT2 Lagged Value 000.0%~100.0% 005.0
FDT2 has the same function with FDT1, refer to the Description for FDT1 (P2.2.03 and P2.2.04）for more details.
Corresponding function of multi-functional output terminals is Frequency Level Test FDT2 (25).
125

P2.2.07 Any reached frequency tested value 1 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 050.00
P2.2.08 Any reached frequency 1 test width 000.0%~100.0% 000.0
When the running frequency of the frequency inverter is within any positive and negative frequency with test
width of the reference frequency that reaches at Tested Frequency Value 1, the multi-functional output terminals
of the frequency inverter output Signal ON. When the running frequency of the frequency inverter is beyond any
positive and negative frequency with test width of the reference frequency that reaches at Tested Frequency Value
1, the multi-functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal OFF. Corresponding function of
the multi-functional output terminals is Frequency 1 Reaches Output (26), refer to the Description of the figure
below:
Output
frequency
Any reached frequency

Test Width Frequency
tested value
Test Width Frequency
Time
Any reached frequency

tested signal
Time
Test width Frequency = Any reached frequency 1 test width (P2.2.08) ×Highest Frequency (P0.0.07)
Factory set
value
P2.2.09 Any reached frequency tested value 2 000.00Hz~Highest Frequency 050.00
P2.2.10 Any reached frequency 2 test width 000.0%~100.0% 000.0
The above function codes have the same function with Function Code P2.2.07 and P2.2.08, refer to the
Description of P2.2.07 and P2.2.08 for more details. Corresponding function of the multi-functional output
terminals is Frequency 2 Reaches Output (27).

000.0%~300.0%
P2.2.11 Zero Current Test Level 005.0
(100.0% correspond to rated current of motor)
Delay Time for Zero
P2.2.12 000.01s~600.00s 000.10
Current Test
When the running current of the frequency inverter is less than or equal to zero-current test level and the duration
exceeds the delay time of zero-current test, the multi-functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output
Signal ON, once the running current resets to the current test level larger than zero, the multi-functional output
terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal OFF. Corresponding function of the multi-functional output
terminals is zero-current state (34), refer to the Description of the figure below:
126
Running
current
Zero-current
detection level
Time
Zero-current
detected signal
Time
Current Test Delay Time when T at O

00.0: No Test
P2.2.13 Output Current Overlimit Value 200.0
000.1%~300.0%
P2.2.14 Delay Time for Current Overlimit Test 000.00s~600.00s 000.00
When the running current of the frequency inverter is greater than the value set by Function Code P2.2.13 and the
duration exceeds the value set by Function Code P2.2.14, the multi-functional output terminals of the frequency
inverter output Signal ON, once the running current resets to the value less than and equal to overlimit of output
current, the multi-functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal OFF. Corresponding function
of the multi-functional output terminals is output current overlimit (36), refer to the Description of the figure
below:
Running
current
Output current
overlimit
Time
Output current
overlimit detected
signal
Time
The output current overlimit is the percentage of rated current of the motor. T refers to the delay time of detecting
out current overlimit.

P2.2.15 Current Level Test 1 000.0%~300.0% 100.0
P2.2.16 Test Width of Current Level 1 000.0%~300.0% 000.0
When the running current of the frequency inverter is within positive and negative frequency with test width of
the current level test 1, the multi-functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON. When
the running current of the frequency inverter is beyond positive and negative test width of current level test 1, the
127
multi-functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal OFF. Corresponding function of the
multi-functional output terminals is Current 1 Reaches Output (28), refer to the Description of the figure below:
Output
current
Current level Detection width of current level 1

detection 1 Detection width of current level 1
Time
Current level
detected signal
Time
Current Level Test 1 and Test Width of Current Level 1 are the percentage of the rated current of the motor.

P2.2.17 Current Level Test 2 000.0%~300.0% 100.0
P2.2.18 Test Width of Current Level 2 000.0%~300.0% 000.0
The above function codes have the same functions with Function Code P2.2.15 and P2.2.16, refer to the
Description of Function Code P2.2.15 and P2.2.16 for more details. Corresponding function of the
multi-functional output terminals is Current 2 Reaches Output (29).

P2.2.19 VF1 Input Lower Limit 00.00V~P2.220 03.10
P2.2.20 VF1 Input Upper Limit P2.219~11.00V 06.80
When the input value of Analog VF1 is less than the value set by Function Code P2.2.19, the multi-functional
output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON. Corresponding function of the multi-functional
output terminals is VF Input less than lower limit (21) or above limit (31).
When the input value of Analog VF1 is less than the value set by Function Code P2.2.20, the multi-functional
output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON. Corresponding function of the multi-functional
output terminals is VF Input less than lower limit (22) or above limit (31).
Factory set
value
P2.2.21 Model Temperature Reaches Reference 000℃~100℃ 075
The module temperature of the frequency inverter reaches the value set by Function Code P2.2.21, the
multi-functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON. Corresponding function of the
multi-functional output terminals is Module Temperature Reached (35).Actual module temperature can be viewed
through Function Code P5.1.03.

P2.2.22 Current Running Reaches Reference Time 0000.0~6500.0min 0000.0
The frequency inverter needs to restart timing for every start, when reaching the value set by Function Code
P2.2.22, the frequency inverter continues to run and the multi-functional output terminals of the frequency
inverter output Signal ON. Corresponding function of multi-functional output terminals is Current Running Time
Reached (40). If the set is 0, current running time is not limited. Actual time of current running can be viewed
through Function Code P9.0.23 (when the frequency inverter shuts down, the display value of P9.0.23
automatically resets to 0).
128
6.4 Group P3 - Programmable Function
Simple PLC 1: End of Single Running and Save Final Value
P3.0.00 0
Running Mode 2: Continuous Running
3: Cycle N Times
0: Stop after End of Single Cycle

The frequency inverter stops automatically according to the stopping method set by P1.0.16 after completing one
cycle.
1: Keep Final Value after End of Single Running

The frequency inverter runs at reference frequency of final phase after completing one cycle.
2: Continuous Cycle
The frequency inverter continues to run until the stop command is given.
3: N Times of Cycle
The frequency inverter stops automatically after cycling N times. N is set by reference value of Function Code
P3.0.01.

P3.0.01 Cycle number(s), N 00000~65000 00000
This function code is used to set the times of cycle running at Function Code P3.0.00=3.
Factory set
value
0: No Power-off Memory
Option of PLC 1: Power-off Memory
P3.0.02 00
Power-off Memory Tens: Stop Memory Selection
0: No Stop Memory
1: Stop Memory
PLC Power-off Memory means running phase and running frequency of PLC before memory power-off, when
powering on next time, the frequency inverter continues to run from memory phase. If it is selected not to memory,
every power-on needs to restart the process of PLC.
PLC Stop Memory means running phase and running frequency of PLC before memory shutdown, when running
next time, the frequency inverter continues to run from memory phase. If it is selected not to memory, every start
needs to restart the process of PLC.
In addition, PLC recyling times can be realized memorizing by selecting this function.
129
P3.0.03 Phase Directive 0 -100.0%~100.0% 000.0
P3.0.04 Phase O Running Time 0000.0s~6553.5s 0000.0
P3.0.06 Phase 1 Running Time 0000.0s~6553.5s 0000.0
When the tens for each phase property of the multiplex directive is 0, the corresponding reference value of Simple
PLC Running and each phase of the multiplex directive are the percentage relative to the highest frequency.
The phase running time is the duration of PLC running at the frequency of each phase (including acceleration and
deceleration time and FWD and REV Dead Time).
130
Factory set
value
P3.0.35 Phase 0 Attribution Ones: Acceleration & Deceleration Time H.00
P3.0.36 Phase 1 Attribution Selection (Invalid Multiplex Directive) H.00
P3.0.37 Phase 2 Attribution 0: Acceleration & Deceleration Time 1 H.00
P3.0.41 Phase 6 Attribution Tens: Frequency Source Selection (Valid H.00
P3.0.42 Phase 7 Attribution Multiplex Directive) H.00
P3.0.43 Phase 8 Attribution 0: Current Phase Directive H.00
P3.0.44 Phase 9 Attribution 1: Keyboard Potentiometer H.00
P3.0.45 Phase 10 Attribution 2: Keyboard Frequency Reference H.00
3: VF1 Input
P3.0.46 Phase 11 Attribution H.00
4: VF2 Input
6: PID Reference
P3.0.49 Phase 14 Attribution 7: Operation Result 1 H.00
P3.0.50 Phase 15 Attribution A: Operation Result 4 H.00
Hundreds unit: running direction
1: Reversed Direction
The ones of the phase property determine the acceleration and deceleration time of Simple PLC running at each
phase and the tens of phase property determine the frequency source of Simple PLC Running or Multiplex
Directive at each phase. The hundreds unit of phase attribute is determined by running direction of simple PLC at
each phase.

0: Second
P3.0.51 Simple PLC Running Time Unit 1: Hour 0
2: Minute
Refer to the unit of phase running time when the frequency inverter is at Simple PLC Running.

Timing Function
P3.1.00 2: Effective (h) (this function is unavailable when 0
Selection
unable to be set as 2)
Fixed Running Time 1: External Terminal VF1 Reference
P3.1.01 0
Selection 2: External Terminal VF2 Reference
(Analog input range corresponds to P3.1.02)
P3.1.02 Fixed Running Time 0000.0min/h~6500.0min/h (unit depends on P3.1.00) 0000.0
The above function codes are used to complete the timing run function of the frequency inverter. Refer to 7.1.8 for
more details (Timing Function).

Wobbulating Reference 0: Relative to Reference frequency
P3.1.03 0
Mode 1: Relative to Highest Frequency
P3.1.04 Wobbulating Range 000.0%~100.0% 000.0
P3.1.05 Kicking Range 00.0%~50.0% 00.0
P3.1.06 Wobbulating Cycle 0000.1s~3000.0s 0010.0
Rise Time of Wobbulating
P3.1.07 000.1%~100.0% 050.0
Triangular Wave
The above function codes are used for wobbulating function. Refer to 7.1.16 for more details (wobbulating
function).
131

P3.1.08 Reference Length 00000m~65535m 01000
P3.1.09 Actual Length 00000m~65535m 00000
P3.1.10 Impulse Count per meter 0000.1~6553.5 0100.0
The above function codes are used for fixed-length control. Refer to 7.1.9 for more details (fixed-length function).

P3.1.11 Reference Count Value 00001~65535 01000
P3.1.12 Designated Count Value 00001~65535 01000
The above function codes are used for counting control. Refer to 7.1.10 for more details (Counting Function).

P3.1.13 Distance Set value 1 -3200.0~3200.0 0000.0
P3.1.15 Impulse Count per Distance 000.00~600.00 000.00
The above function codes are used for distance control. Refer to 7.1.11 for more details (Distance Control
Function).
P3.2 Built-in Logic PLC Function

Factory set
value
0: the input of this relay is determined by this Relay
Control Word A
1: the input of this relay is determined by this Relay
Control Word B
Intermediate 2: the input of this relay is determined by this Relay
P3.2.00 Delay Relay Control Word C 00000
Control Ones: Relay 1 (M1)
Tens: Relay 2 (M2)
Hundreds: Relay 3 (M3)
Thousands: Relay 4 (M4)
Ten Thousands: Relay 5 (M5)
This function is used to set which control word determines the Intermediate Delay Relay.
When at 0, the Intermediate Delay Relay is determined by Control Word A, refer to the Description for Function
Code P3.2.01.
When at 1, the Intermediate Delay Relay is determined by Control Word B, refer to the Description for Function
Code P3.2.02~P3.2.06.
When at 2, the Intermediate Delay Relay is determined by thousands and hundreds of Control Word C, refer to the
Description for Function Code P3.2.07~P3.2.11.
Refer to the explanation for 7.1.12 (Simple Internal Relay Programmable Function).

0: Reference 0
1: Reference 1
Ones: M1
Intermediate Relay Control
P3.2.01 Tens: M2 00000
Word A
Hundreds: M3
Thousands: M4
Ten Thousands: M5
When which digit of Function Code P3.2.00 is 0, this function Code is used to compulsorily set corresponding
relay of this digit at 0 or 1. Refer to 7.1.12 for more details (Simple Internal Relay Programmable Function).
132
Function
Function Name Setting scope Factory set value
code
Intermediate Delay Relay M1 Ones: Control Logic
P3.2.02 00000
Control Word B 0: Input 1
Intermediate Delay Relay M2 1: Input 1 and NOT
P3.2.03 00000
Control Word B 2: Input 1 and Input 2 AND
Intermediate Delay Relay M3 3: Input 1 and Input 2 OR
P3.2.04 4: Input 1 and Input 2 XOR 00000
Control Word B
Intermediate Delay Relay M4 5: the valid reference of Input 1 is valid the
P3.2.05 valid Reference of Input 2 is invalid 00000
Control Word B
6: Valid reference of Input 1 Rise Edge is
valid
Valid reference of Input 2 Rise Edge is invalid
7: Reverse valid signal of Input 1 Rising Edge
8:Input 1 Rise Edge is valid and output a
impulse signal with width of 200ms
9: Input 1 Rise Edge and Input 2 AND
Hundreds and Tens: Input 1 Selection
0~9:DI1~DI10
10~14: M1~M5
Intermediate Delay Relay M5 15~16: VF1,VF2
P3.2.06 00000
Control Word B 17~19: Standby
20~79: Output Function 00~59 Corresponding
to Multi-functional Output Terminal
Ten Thousands: Input 2 Selection
0~9: DI1~DI10
10~14: M1~M5
15~16: VF1,VF2
17~19: Standby
20~59: Output Function 00~39 Corresponding
to Multi-functional Output Terminal
When which digit of Function Code P3.2.00 is 1, the relay of this digit is controlled by the above corresponding
function code. The ones of the above function codes are used to set the logic operation function of Input 1 and
Input 2. The hundreds and tens are used to set the option for Input 1. Ten Thousands and Thousands are used to set
the option for Input 2. The Intermediate Delay Relay M is the result from simple logic operation of Input 1 and
Input 2.
M=Logic Operation (Input 1 and Input 2)
Refer to 7.1.12 for more details (Simple Internal Relay Programmable Function)

Intermediate Delay Relay M1
P3.2.07 0000
Control Word C Tens Ones: 00~59
Intermediate Delay Relay M2 Output Function 00~59
P3.2.08 0000
Control Word C Corresponding to Digital Input
Intermediate Delay Relay M3 Terminal
P3.2.09 0000
Control Word C Thousands Hundreds: 00~59
Intermediate Delay Relay M4 Output Function 00~59
P3.2.10 0000
Control Word C Corresponding to
Intermediate Delay Relay M5 Multi-functional Output Terminal
P3.2.11 0000
Control Word C
The tens and ones of the above function codes are used to set the action destination of acquiring the Intermediate
Delay Relay after logic operation results, that is, action to be performed ( it can correspond to any one kind of
digital input functions), and the thousands and hundreds are used to control corresponding relay when which digit
of Function Code P3.2.00 is 2 (it can correspond to any one kind of multi-functional output terminal
functions).Refer to 7.1.12 for more details（Simple Internal Relay Programmable Function）
133
P3.2.12 MI Connection Delay Time 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0
P3.2.13 M2 Connection Delay Time 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0
P3.2.17 M1 Disconnection Delay Time 0.0s~3600.0s 0000.0
The above function codes are used to set the delay time of connecting or disconnecting the Intermediate Delay
Relays.

0: Not Negation
1: Negation
Ones: M1
Valid State Option of Intermediate
P3.2.22 Tens: M2 00000
Relay
Hundreds: M3
Thousands: M4
Ten Thousands: M5
This function code is used to set valid state of the Intermediate Delay Relay.
If which digit is 0, it means that the relay of this digit will output the signal of acquired results.
If which digit is 1, it means that the relay of this digit will invert the signal of acquired results and output it.
Factory set
value
Ones: Timing Control 1 of Timer
Tens: Timing Control 2 of Timer
0: Timer Running
1: Controlled by Timer Input Terminal 1
2: Negation Control of Timer Input Terminal 1
3: Controlled by Timer Input Terminal 2
4: Negation Control of Timer Input Terminal 2
Internal Timer
P3.2.23 Hundreds: Timer 1 Reset Control 00000
Control Word
Thousands: Timer 2 Reset Control
0: Controlled by Timer Reset Terminal 1
1: Controlled by Timer Reset Terminal 2
Ten Thousands: Timing Unit
0: Second
1: Minute
2: Hour
The ones and tens of this function code is used to set the timing control of Timer 1 and Timer 2 respectively.
0: Indicate that the timer is uncontrollable and continuously counting.
1: Conduct control by Timer Input Terminal 1, when this terminal state is valid, the timer starts counting, when the
terminal state is invalid, the timer stops counting and keeps current value.
2: Conduct inverse control by Timer Input Terminal 1, when this terminal state is invalid , the timer starts counting,
when the terminal state is valid, the timer stops counting and keeps current value.
3~4: Refer to Description for 1 and 2.

The hundreds and thousands of this function code are respectively used to set reset control of Timer 1 and Timer
2.
0: Control by Timer Reset Terminal 1, when this terminal state is valid, the timing value of the timer is recover
zero.
1: Control by Timer Reset Terminal 2, when this terminal state is valid, the timing value of the timer is recover
zero.
134
The ten thousands of this function is used to set the timing unit. 0 indicates second, 1 indicates minute and 2
indicates hour respectively.
Refer to the explanation of 7.1.13 (Internal Timer Function).

P3.2.24 Timing Time of Timer 1 0.0s~3600.0s 00000
P3.2.25 Timing Time of Timer 2 0.0s~3600.0s 00000
Function Code P3.2.24 and P3.2.25 are respectively used to set the time of Timer 1 and Timer 2.

Function Name Setting scope
code value
0: No Operation
1: Add Operation
2: Subtraction Operation
3: Multiply Operation
4: Division Operation
5: Greater than Judgment
6: Equal to Judgment
P3.2.26 Operation Module Operation Module H.0000
7: Equal to or Greater than Judgment
8: Integration
9~F: Reservation
Ones: Operation 1
Tens: Operation 2
The ones, tens, hundreds and thousands of this function code respectively correspond to one-way operation. Each
operation can select different operation methods. Refer to the explanation of 7.1.14 for more details (Internal
Operation Function).
Function Function Factory

code name Setting scope set
value
0: Operate the Setting Coefficient by multiplication without decimal
1: Conduct setting at one decimal fraction to system by multiplication
algorithm
2: Conduct setting at two decimal fractions to system by multiplication
algorithm
3: Conduct setting at three decimal fractions to system by multiplication
algorithm
4: Conduct setting at four decimal fractions to system by multiplication
algorithm
5: Conduct setting at no decimal fraction to system by division algorithm
6: Conduct setting at one decimal fractions to system by division
algorithm
7: Conduct setting at two decimal fractions to system by division
algorithm
Operation 8: Conduct setting at three decimal fractions to system by division
P3.2.27 Setting algorithm 0000
Coefficient 9: Conduct setting at four decimal fractions to system by division
Property algorithm
A: Conduct setting at one decimal fractions to system by division
algorithm
B: Conduct setting at two decimal fractions to system by division
algorithm
C: Conduct setting at three decimal fractions to system by division
algorithm
D: Conduct setting at four decimal fractions to system by division
algorithm
(The setting coefficient of A, B, C, D, E is the address number of function
code)
Ones: Operation 1
Tens: Operation 2
135
The scope of the operation results is not certainly equal to the setting scope of the function codes of the frequency
inverter, so a setting coefficient is required to set the scope of the operation results to the setting scope of the
function codes of the frequency inverter. When the set value is 0~9, the operation setting coefficient is a number
which can be included in operation directly. When the set value is A～E, the operation setting coefficient is a
address number of function code and only the number in the address of function code can be included in operation.
This function code is used to set the functions of the setting coefficient. The ones, tens, hundreds and thousands of
this function code respectively correspond to one-way operation. Refer to the Description of 7.1.14 for more
details (Internal Operation Function).
Functio Factory set

Function Name Setting scope
n code value
Thousands, Hundreds, Tens and Ones: express address of Input A of
Operation 1
Input A of
P3.2.28 Ten Thousands: express input operation model 00000
Operation 1
Thousands, Hundreds, Tens and Ones: express address of Input B of
Operation 1
Input B of
Operation 1
Setting
P3.2.30 Coefficient of 00000~65535 00001
Operation 1
The above function codes are used to set input address and setting coefficient of Operation 1. The thousands,
hundreds, tens and ones of Function Code P3.2.28 and Function Code P3.2.29 represent the address of Input A of
Operation 1 and Input B of Operation 1 respectively. The input address corresponds to all function codes, e.g.
Address 0005 corresponds to Function Code P0.0.05. If the input address has no corresponding function code, the
default value in the input address is 0. The ten thousands in P3.2.28 and P3.2.29 indicate the operation mode of
the digital value in input address. 0 means the operation by unsigned number and 1 means the operation by signed
number.
Function Code P3.2.30 is used to set the setting coefficient of Operation 1. When the ones unit of P3.2.27 is set to
0~9, the numbers in function code P3.2.30 can be included in operation directly; when the ones unit of P3.2.27 is
set to A ~ E, only the numbers which are the address numbers of function code P3.2.30 can be included in
operation, namely indirect addressing.
136
Factor
Function
Function name Setting scope y set
code
value
Operation 2
Input A of
Operation 2
Operation 1
Input B of
Operation 2
Setting
P3.2.33 Coefficient of 00000~65535 00001
Operation 2
Operation 3
Input A of
Operation 3
Operation 3
Input B of
Operation 3
Setting
P3.2.36 Coefficient of 00000~65535 00001
Operation 3
Operation 4
Input A of
Operation 4
Operation 4
Input B of
Operation 4
Setting
P3.2.39 Coefficient of 00000~65535 00001
Operation 4
The above function codes are used to set the input address and setting coefficient of Operation 2, 3, 4. Refer to the
explanation of Function Code P3.2.28~P3.2.30 for more details.
137
6.5 GROUP P4 PID CONTROL AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL

P4.0 PID Control Group
Factory set
value
P4.0.00 PID Reference Source 00
0: Digital Reference (P4.0.01）

PID Reference Value is determined by the value by Function Code P4.0.01.

PID Reference Value is determined by Keyboard Potentiometer.

PID Reference Value is set by the analog input terminal. E Series Frequency inverter provides 2-way analog input
terminal (VF1, VF2). VF1 and VF2 can input 0V~10V voltage or 0/4mA~20mA current. As for corresponding
relation curve between the input value of VF1 and VF2 and PID value, the users can freely choose from four kinds
of the relation curves through function code P2.1.02, in which Curve 1 and Curve 2 are linear relationship able to
be set through Function Code P2.0.13~P2.0.22, and Curve 3 and Curve 4 are broken line relationship with two
inflection points able to be set through Function Code P2.1.04~P2.1.19. The deviation between actual voltage and
sampling voltage of the analog input terminal can be adjusted through Function Code P8.1.05~P8.1.12.

PID Reference Value is set by high-speed impulse frequency of digital input terminal D16 (the terminal function is
not defined). The corresponding relationship between high-speed impulse frequency and PID value can be set
through Function Code P2.0.23~P2.0.26, that is, linear relationship.
PID Reference Value is set by the upper computer through communication mode (refer to Chapter VIII for more
details).

PID Reference Value is given by different composite state of Multiplex Directive Terminal. E Series Frequency
inverter is able to set four Multiplex Directive Terminals (Terminal Function 9~12, refer to the explanation for

PID Reference Value is given by Simple PLC Function, PID Reference of the frequency inverter can be switched
among 1~16 arbitrary frequency directives, the sources, hold time and acceleration & deceleration time of each
frequency directive can be set through Function Code 3.0.03~P3.0.50.

138
PID Reference Value is determined by the operation results after setting calculation of the internal operation
Factory set
value
P4.0.01 PID Value Reference 000.0%~100.0% 050.0%
When at Function Code P4.0.00=0, PID Reference is determined by the value set by this function code.
Factory set
value
2: VF1-VF2
3: VF1+VF2
6: MAX[VF1,VF2]
P4.0.02 PID Feedback Source 00
7: MIN[VF1,VF2]
8: Switch of Multiplex Directive Terminal on
the above conditions

PID Feedback Value is set by the analog input terminal.
2: VF1-VF2
PID Feedback Value is set by the analog VF1-VF2 input.
3: VF1+VF2
PID Feedback Value is set by the analog F1+VF2 input.
4: PULS Reference
PID Reference Value is set by high-speed impulse frequency of digital input terminal DI6 (the terminal function is
not defined). The corresponding relationship between high-speed impulse frequency and corresponding PID value
can be set through Function Code P2.0.23~P2.0.26, that is, linear relationship.
PID Reference Value is set by the upper computer through communication mode (refer to Chapter VIII for more
details).
6: MAX[VF1, VF2]
PID Feedback Source is set by maximum value between Analog VF1 and VF2 Input.
7: MIN[VF1, VF2]
PID Feedback Source is set by minimum value between Analog VF1 and VF2 Input.
8: Multiplex directive terminal switches among the above among the above conditions
PID Reference Value switches among the above 8 kinds of conditions by different composite state of Multiplex
Directive Terminal. E Series Frequency inverter is able to set four Multiplex Directive Terminals, when in use, it
is to take three terminal functions (Terminal Function 9~11), refer to the table below for more details:
139
Terminal 3 Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Feedback channel
0 0 0 VF1 (correspond to P4.0.02=0)
0 0 1 VF2 (correspond to P4.0.02=1)
0 1 0 VF1-VF2 (correspond to P4.0.02=2)
0 1 1 VF1+VF2 (correspond to P4.0.02=3)
1 0 0 PULS reference (correspond to P4.0.02=4)
1 0 1 Communication Reference (correspond to P4.0.02=5)
1 1 0 MAX[VF1,VF2] (correspond to P4.0.02=6)
1 1 1 MIN[VF1,VF2] (correspond to P4.0.02=7)

PID Reference Value is determined by the operation results after setting calculation of the internal operation
module. Refer to the explanation of Function Code P3.2.26~P3.2.39 for more details of the operation module. The

P4.0.03 PID Action Direction 0: Direct Action 1: Reverse Action 0
This function code is used to set the change conditions of the frequency with the feedback quantity.
0: Direct Action
The output frequency of the frequency inverter is in proportion to its feedback quantity, when the feedback
quantity is less than the given quantity, the output frequency of the frequency inverter rises to make the feedback
quantity rise accordingly and final feedback quantity equal to the given quantity.
1: Reverse Action
The output frequency of the frequency inverter is in inverse proportion to its feedback quantity, when the feedback
quantity is greater than the given quantity, the output frequency of the frequency inverter rises to make the
feedback quantity decline accordingly and final feedback quantity equal to the given quantity.

P4.0.04 PID Reference Feedback Range 00000~65535 01000
The feedback range of PID Reference is dimensionless unit, which is the range of PID Reference showing P9.0.14
and PID Feedback showing P9.0.15. If P4.0.04 is set at 5000, when the feedback value of PID is 100.0%, PID
Feedback showing P9.0.15 is 5000. PID Reference and Feedback are set based on this parameter.

P4.0.05 Proportional Gains KP1 000.0~100.0 020.0
P4.0.06 Integral Time TI1 00.01s~10.00s 02.00
P4.0.07 Derivative Time TD1 00.000s~10.000s 00.000
The greater the value of proportional gain KPI is, the larger the adjustment volume is and the faster the response is,
but the too large value can generate the system oscillation, the smaller the value of KPI is, the more stable the
system is and the slower the response is.
The greater the value of Integral Time TI1 is, the slower the response is and the more stable the output is, the
worse the fluctuation control ability of the feedback quantity is, the smaller the value of TI1 is, the faster the
response is and the greater the output fluctuation is, the too small value can generate the oscillation.
The Derivative Time TD1 can set the limit for gain provided by the derivator to ensure that a pure derivative gain
can be obtained at low frequency and a constant derivative gain can be obtained at high frequency. The longer the
derivative time is, the greater the adjusting strength is.
140
P4.0.08 PID Deviation Limit 000.0%~100.0% 000.0
This function code is used to determine whether PID is adjusted to prevent unstable output frequency when the
deviation between reference and feedback is small.
When the deviation between reference quantity and feedback quantity is less than the value set by P4.0.08, stop
the adjustment to PID and the frequency inverter keeps stable output.
When the deviation between reference quantity and feedback quantity is greater than the value set by
P4.0.08,adjust PID.

P4.0.09 PID Feedback Filtering time 00.00~60.00s 00.00
VF1 Input Filtering time is used to set the software filtering time of VF1, when the on-site analog is easily to be
disturbed, the filtering time shall be increased to make the tested analog trend to be stable, but the greater filtering
time makes the response speed of the analog test become slow, so how to balanceset needs is based on actual
situations of the applications.

P4.0.10 Proportional Gains KP2 000.0~100.0 020.0
P4.0.11 Integral Time TI2 00.01s~10.00s 02.00
P4.0.12 Derivative Time TD2 00.000s~10.000s 00.000
The above function codes have the same functions with Function Code P4.0.05~P4.0.07, refer to the Description
for P4.0.05~P4.0.07.

0: No Switch
P4.0.13 PID Switch Conditions 1: Switch through Terminals 0
2: Switch through Deviation
In some occasions of special applications, better PID Parameter is required to be adopted for control under
different conditions. This function code is used to set under what condition PID Parameter is required to be
switched.
0: No Switch
Adopt PID parameters of P4.0.05~P4.0.07 by default.
1: Switch through Terminal

The switch is made through digital input terminal (set this terminal function at 41: switch of PID parameter).
When the terminal signal is valid, adopt PID parameters of P4.0.05~P4.0.07. When the terminal signal is valid,
adopt PID parameters of this group of P4.0.10~P4.0.12.
2: Switch based on Deviation

The switch is made based on set value of Function Code P4.0.14 and P4.0.15, refer to the Description of Function
Code P4.0.14 and P4.0.15.

P4.0.14 PID Switch Deviation 1 000.0%~P4.0.15 020.0
P4.0.15 PID Switch Deviation 2 P4.0.14~100.0% 080.0
When at P4.0.13=2, it is to determine whether the switch of PID parameters needs to be done through these two
function codes. The set value of these two function codes is the percentage relative to Function Code P4.0.04 (PID
Reference Feedback Range).
When the deviation between reference and feedback is less than PID Switch Deviation 1, adopt PID Parameter of
P4.0.05~P4.0.07. When the deviation between reference and feedback is greater than PID Switch Deviation 2,
adopt PID Parameter of P4.0.10~P4.0.12. When the deviation between reference and feedback is between PID
Switch Deviation 1 and PID Switch Deviation 2, PID Parameter is the linear interpolation value of these two
groups of PID Parameters, refer to the description of the figure below:
141
PID Parameter
PID Parameter 1
PID Parameter 2
PID Deviation

P4.0.16 PID Initial Value 000.0%~100.0% 000.0
P4.0.17 PID Initial Value Hold Time 000.00~650.00s 000.00
When the frequency inverter starts, first speed it up to initial value of PID at acceleration time and then keep
running at initial state of PID, after the duration of time reaches the time given by P4.0.17, conduct regulation to
PID. Initial Value of PID is the percentage relative to the highest frequency, refer to the description of the figure
below:
Output frequency
PID Initial Value
Time
Hold Time of PID Initial Value
Factory set
value
000.0%: No Judgment on Feedback Loss
P4.0.18 PID Feedback Loss Test 000.0
000.1%~100.0%
P4.0.19 PID Feedback Loss Test Time 00.0s~20.0s 00.0
These two function codes are used to judge whether the feedback signal of PID is missing.
When at P4.0.18=0.0%, no judgment is made for whether the feedback signal of PID is missing.
When at P4.0.18>0.0%, actual PID Feedback Value is less than the value given by P4.0.18 and the duration of
time exceeds the time given by P4.0.19, the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Err20 Fault, it is deemed that the
feedback signal of PID is missing

0: No Operation
P4.0.20 PID Stop Operation 0
1: Operation
This function code is used to set whether PID operates when the frequency inverter is in shutdown state.
0: No Operation
When the frequency inverter runs, PID operates; when the frequency inverter shuts down, PID can’t operate
(choose this under general conditions)
1: Operation
No matter what the state of the frequency inverter is, running state or shutdown state, PID operates.
142
P4.1 Communication Group

Ones unit: MODBUS baud rate
0: 1200
1: 2400
2: 4800
3: 9600
4: 19200
P4.1.00 Baud Rate 5: 38400 3
6: 57600
Tens unit: PROFIBUS baud rate
0: 115200
1: 208300
2: 256000
3: 512000
1: Even Parity Verification (8-E-1)
P4.1.01 Data Format 0
2: Odd Parity Verification (8-O-1)
000: Broadcast Address
P4.1.02 Local Machine Address 001
001~249
P4.1.03 Response Delay 00~20ms 02
00.0 (Invalid)
P4.1.04 Communication Timeout 00.0
00.1s~60.0s
0: ASCII Mode (Reservation)
P4.1.05 Data Transmission Format 1
1: RTU Mode
MODBUS communication 0: Reply 1: No reply
P4.1.06 0
data reply or not
Troubleshooting of 0:
1:
Bypassed
Shutdown
P4.1.07 communication error 0
2: Communication fault
When E Series inverter realizes the communication with other equipments through communication terminal
RS-485, it is required to set the above function codes. Refer to Communication RS-485 of E Series Frequency
inverter in Chapter VIII for more details.
6.6 Group P5 Keyboard Display

P5.0 Basic Group
Factory set
value
0: Invalid
Keyboard JOG Key 1: Forward Jogging
P5.0.00 1
Function Reference 2: Reverse Jogging
3: Forward and Reverse Switch
This function code is used to set the function of Multi-functional Key JOG.
When at P5.0.00=0, the function of Key JOG is invalid
When at P5.0.00=1, the function of Key JOG is forward jogging function
When at P5.0.00=2, the function of Key JOG is reverse jogging function
When at P5.0.00=3, the function of Key JOG is forward and reverse switch function
Note: Forward Jogging Function and Reserve Jogging Function are valid under any running control mode,
but the forward and reverse switch function is only valid under keyboard control mode (i.e. P0.0.03=0)

0: Only valid in keyboard
P5.0.01 Keyboard STOP Key Stop Function operation mode 1
1: Valid for any mode
This function code is used to set shutdown function of Key Stop.
When at P5.0.01=0, the shutdown function is only valid under Keyboard Control Mode (i.e. P0.0.03=0)
When at P5.0.01=1, the shutdown function is valid under any running control modes.
143
Note : The fault reset function is always valid.

P5.0.02 LED Running Display Parameter 1 H.0001~H.FFFF H.001F
P5.0.03 LED Running Display Parameter 2 H.0000~H.FFFF H.0000
Automatic Time Switch of LED Running 000.0: No Switch
P5.0.04 000.0
Display Parameter 000.1s~100.0s
Function Code P5.0.02 and P5.0.03 determine the contents displayed by LED when the frequency inverter is at
running state.
Function Code P5.0.04 determines the length of time that displays Parameter 1 and Parameter 2. When setting this
to 0, only shown the display parameter given by P5.0.02, or it is to switch between display parameter set by
P5.0.02 and display parameter set by P5.0.03 based on the Reference Time.
The format for specific display contents is as below:
Running Display Parameter 1 of LED
Running Frequency (Hz)

Set Frequency (Hz)
Output Current (A)
Output Voltage (V)
Bus line voltage (V)
Output Torque (%)
Output Power (kW)
Output Terminal State
Input Terminal State
VF1 Voltage (V)
VF2 Voltage (V)
Customized Display Value
Actual counting value (m)
PID Set
PID Feedback
In operation, if it is required to display each parameter above, set corresponding position to 1, after
transfer binary system to hexadecimal system, set at P5.0.02.
Running Display Parameter 2 of LED
PULSE Impulse Frequency (kHz)

Feedback Speed (Hz)
PLC Stage (A)
Voltage before VF1 Correction (V)
Voltage before VF2Correction (V)
Line Speed (m/min)
Current Power-on Time (min)
Current Running Time (min)
Residual Running Time (min)
Frequency Source A (Hz)
Frequency Source B (Hz)
Communication Set value (％)
PULSE Impulse Frequency (Hz)
Encoder Feedback Speed (Hz)
Actual Speed Value
User Standby Monitoring Value 1
In operation, if it is required to display each parameter above, set corresponding position to 1, after
transfer binary system to hexadecimal system, set at P5.0.03.
144
Factory set
value
P5.0.05 LED Shutdown Display Parameter H.0001~H.FFFF H.0033
This function code determines the contents displayed by LED when the frequency inverter is at shutdown state.
The format for specific display contents is as below:

Stopping Display Parameter of LED
Reference Frequency (Hz)
Bus line voltage (V)
Input Terminal State
Output Terminal State
VF1 Voltage (V)
VF2 Voltage (V)
Actual Count Value
Actual Length Value (m)
PLC Stage
User-defined Display Value
PID Reference
PID Feedback
PULSE Impulse Frequency (Hz)
User Standby Monitoring Value 1
Reservation
Reservation
In shutdown state, if the above parameters are required to display, the corresponding position is set at 1, after the
binary digit is converted into hexadecimal digit, it is set at P5.0.05.

P5.0.06 LCD Line 1 Display at Running 0000~9399 9001
The above function codes are used to set the contents displayed by each line when the frequency inverter adopts
LCD Keyboard at running state. The value given by P5.0.06~P5.0.09 is the parameter address required to display,
e.g. if the reference value of Parameter P9.0.00 is needed to display in operation, it is to set one reference value of
P5.0.06~P5.0.09 to 9000.

P5.0.10 LCD Line 1 Display at stop 0000~9399 9001
The above function codes are used to set the contents displayed by each line when the frequency inverter adopts
LCD Keyboard at shutdown state. The value given by P5.0.10~P5.0.13 is the parameter address required to
display, e.g. if the reference value of Parameter P9.0.01 is needed to display when shut down , it is to set one
reference value of P5.0.10~P5.0.13 to 9001.

P5.0.14 LCD Chinese/English Display Switch 0: Chinese 1: English 0
When the above function codes are used to set either Chinese Display or English Display when the frequency
inverter adopts LCD Keyboard.
145

code value
Customized Display of
P5.0.15 0.0001～6.5000 1.0000
Coefficient
Ones unit: user-defined decimal place displaying
0: 0-digit Decimal Point
Tens unit: source of user-defined display value
0: determined by hundreds place of user-defined
Display control word.
1: determined by set value of P5.0.15, and 0.0000 ~
User-defined Display control 0.0099 corresponding to P9.0.00 ~ P9.0.99 of P9
P5.0.16 word. Group. 001
Hundreds unit: selection of user-defined displaying
coefficient
0: user-defined displaying coefficient is P5.0.15.
result 1
result 2
result 3
result 4
In some conditions, the users want to let the frequency inverter not display the frequency, but some values that
have linear relationship with frequency. The users can adjust the corresponding relation between display value and
frequency of the frequency inverter through modification to Function Code P5.0.15, P5.0.16. This display value is
called user-defined display value. Additionally, if want to display any parameter of Group P9, it can be modified
through P5.0.15 & P5.0.16.
The ones unit of P5.0.16 is used to set up the decimal places of user-defined display value.
The tens unit of P5.0.16 is used to set up the source of user-defined display value. If set up to 0, display value will
be a number in relation with frequency; if set up to 1, display value will be a number in relation with P9 Group,
see details as follows:
Tens unit of P5.0.16 Display control word Description

0 Hundreds unit of 0 Display value = Frequency ×P5.0.15
P5.0.16 1 Display value = Frequency × Calculation Result 1 ÷
10000
2 Display value = Frequency × Calculation Result 2 ÷
10000
10000
10000
1 P5.0.15 The set value 0.0000～0.0099 of P5.0.15 coresponds to
P9.0.00～P9.0.99 of P9 Group.
Example: if P5.0.15=0.0002, display value is the value of
P9.0.02.
Note: places of decimal of user-defined decimal are not considered for the above operation
Example: The user-defined displaying coefficient of P5.0.15 is 0.5000, the user-defined display control word of
P5.0.16 is 003, and the frequency is 20.00Hz, the user-defined display value shall be 2000*0.5000 = 1.000
(display three decimal places).
If the user-defined display control word of P5.0.16 is 003, and the frequency is 20.00Hz, the user-defined display
value shall be 2000*0.5000 = 1.000 (display three decimal places).
146
If user-defined control word P5.0.16 is 013, P5.0.15 is 0.0002 and P9.0.02=1000, the user-defined display value is
1.000 (display three decimal places).

Ones:
0: Only display basic group
1: Display the menus at all levels
Tens
0: Don’t display Group P7
1: Display Group P7
Selection Display of
2: Reservation
P5.0.17 Function Parameter 00011
Hundreds:
Group
0: Don’t display correction parameter group
1: Display correction parameter group
Thousands:
0: Don’t display code group
1: Display code group
When the function code is at P0.0.01=0, its function determine what the parameters of the function code is
displayed in detail.

0: Modifiable
Function Password
P5.0.18 1: Non-modifiable 0
Protection
2: Allowable Modification to GP Type
This function code is used to set whether the parameters of the frequency inverter can be modified.
When at P5.0.18=0, the parameters of all function codes can be modified;
When at P5.0.18=1, the parameters of all function codes can only be viewed but not be modified, such a way can
effectively prevent the parameters of the function from incorrect modification.
When at P5.0.18=2, Function Code P0.0.00 is allowed to modify.

00: No Operation
01: Clearance of Record Information
09 Recover Factory set value, excluding motor
parameter, correction group, password group
Parameter
P5.0.19 19: Recover Factory set value, excluding motor 000
Initialization
parameter, password group
30: Users Current Parameter Backup
60: User Backup Parameters Recovery
100~999: User factory set values recovery
0: No Operation
1: Clearance of Record Information

Clear fault record information, accumulative running time, accumulative power-on time and accumulative power
consumption of the frequency inverter
9: Recover factory set value, excluding motor parameter, correction group, password group
The frequency inverter resets to factory set value, excluding motor parameter, correction group, password group.
19: Recover Factory set value, excluding motor parameter, password group
The frequency inverter resets to factory set value, excluding motor parameter, password group.

Back up all current function parameters of the users to the memory, after the parameters adjustment in disorder,
the user can easily reset the disordered parameters to backup function parameters.
147
60: User Backup Parameters Recovery

Recover the backup user parameters last time, i.e. recover the parameters that are backed up last time when
P5.0.19 is set at 30.
100~999: User factory set values recovery
This function is used to reset special tailor-made factory set value of the users. Generally, the users cannot conduct
operation to this reset.

P5.0.20 User Password 00000~65535 00000
P5.0.20 is the user password reference, that is, any non-zero five digits, the password protection function becomes
effective. When enter into the menu next time, if display “-----”, input correct password and then view and modify
the function parameters. P5.0.20 parameter has modification enable control. Only when P5.0.18 parameter is
equal to 2, P5.0.20 can be changed.
If you want to cancel the password protection, only use the password to enter into system and then change P5.0.20
into 00000, the password protection function becomes invalid.
P5.1 Expansion Group

Function code Function name Description of parameter Display scope
Display accumulated running time of
P5.1.00 Accumulative Running Time 0h~65000h
frequency inverter
Display accumulated electrifying time of
P5.1.01 Accumulative Power On Time 0h~65000h
frequency inverter since exworks
Accumulative Power Display accumulated power consumption of
P5.1.02 0~65000
Consumption frequency inverter up to now
P5.1.03 Module Temperature Display current temperature of the module 000℃~100℃
P5.1.04 Hardware Version No. Hardware version number 180.00
P5.1.05 Software Version No. Software version number 001.00
P5.1.06 Program Nonstandard Label Version number of dedicated program 0000~9999
6.7 Fault Display and Protection Control Group P6

P6.0 Fault Display Group
P6.0.00 Fault Record 1 (Last Time) 0~40 00
P6.0.01 Fault Record 2 0~40 00
P6.0.02 Fault Record 3 0~40 00
The above function codes record the fault types in the last three times, 0 indicates no fault. Concerning possible
cause of each fault code and solutions, refer to related explanation of Chapter IX.
Function
Function name Description for Parameters
code
P6.0.03 Fault Frequency 1 Frequency of the fault in the last time
P6.0.04 Fault Current1 Current of the fault in the last time
P6.0.05 Bus line voltage 1 when at Fault Bus line voltage of the fault in the last time
Input terminal state of the fault in the last time with the
sequence as below
Input Terminal State 1 when at VF2 VF1 DI10 DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1
P6.0.06
fault When the input terminal is ON and its corresponding binary
digit is 1. OFF is 0, it is to convert binary digit into denary
digit.
Input terminal state of the fault in the last time with the
sequence as below
Output Terminal State 1 when at M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 YO2 YO1 T2 T1 YO
P6.0.07
fault When the input terminal is ON and its corresponding binary
digit is 1. OFF is 0, it is to convert binary digit into denary
digit.
148
Function
Function name Description for Parameters
code
Frequency inverter State 1 when
P6.0.08 Use of manufacturer
at fault
P6.0.09 Power-on Time 1 when at fault Current power-on time of the fault in the last time
P6.0.10 Running Time 1 when at fault Current running time of the fault in the last time
P6.0.11 Fault Frequency 2
P6.0.12 Fault Current2
P6.0.13 Bus line voltage 2 when at Fault
Input Terminal State 2 when at
P6.0.14
fault
Output Terminal State 2 when at Same as P6.0.03~P6.0.10
P6.0.15
fault
P6.0.16
at fault
P6.0.17 Power-on Time 2 when at fault
P6.0.18 Running Time 2 when at fault
P6.0.19 Fault Frequency 3
P6.0.20 Fault Current3
P6.0.21 Bus line voltage 3 when at Fault
Input Terminal State 3 when at
P6.0.22
fault
Output Terminal State 3 when at Same as P6.0.03~P6.0.10
P6.0.23
fault
P6.0.24
at fault
P6.0.25 Power-on Time 3 when at fault
P6.0.26 Running Time 3 when at fault
P6.1 Protection Control Group

P6.1.00 Input Default Phase Protection 0: Prohibited 1: Allowed 1
This function code is used to set whether the frequency inverter protects the input default phase.
When at P6.1.00=0, the frequency inverter can’t provide protection to input default phase.
When at P6.1.00=1, if the input default phase or three-phase input imbalance is detected out, the frequency
inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err11.The allowable degree of three-phase input imbalance is determined by
Function Code P6.1.26,the higher the value is, the duller the response is and the higher the allowed degree of
three-phase imbalance is. Attention shall be paid that if the frequency inverter cannot operate or the load of the
motor is lighter, even the set value of P6.1.26 is set smaller, it is possible that no alarm is given.

P6.1.01 Output Default Phase Protection 0: Prohibited 1: Allowed 1
This function code is used to set whether the frequency inverter protects the output default phase.
When at P6.1.01=0, the frequency inverter can’t provide protection to output default phase.
When at P6.1.01=1, if the output default phase or three-phase input imbalance is detected out, the frequency
inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err12.

000: without protection to overvoltage
Overvoltage Stall Protection
P6.1.02 and stalling speed 000
Sensitivity
001~100
P6.1.03 120%~150% 130
Sensitivity
In the deceleration process of the frequency inverter, after the DC Bus line voltage exceeds over-voltage stall
protection voltage point, the frequency inverter stops reducing the speed and keeps current running frequency
149
until the Bus line voltage is reduced to below over-voltage stall protection voltage point and then the frequency
inverter continues to reduce the speed. The set value of Function Code P6.1.03 is the percentage relative to normal
Bus line voltage.
Over-voltage stall protection sensitivity is used to adjust the ability of the frequency inverter on suppressing the
overvoltage. The higher this value is, the stronger the ability of suppressing the overvoltage is.

000: without protection to
P6.1.04 overcurrent and stalling speed 020
Voltage Point
001~100
Overcurrent Stall Protection
P6.1.05 100%~200% 150
Sensitivity
In the acceleration and deceleration process of the frequency inverter, after the output current exceeds the
overcurrent stall protection current, the frequency inverter stops the acceleration and deceleration process and
keeps current running frequency, and then continues to accelerate and decelerate after the decline of the output
current. The set value of the function code P6.1.05 is the percentage relative to rated current of the motor.
The Overcurrent Stall Protection Sensitivity is used to adjust the capability of the frequency inverter on restraining
the overcurrent in its acceleration and deceleration process. The greater this value is, the stronger the capability of
restraining the overcurrent is, under the precondition that no overcurrent fault occurs, the smaller the set value is,
and the better it is.
Factory set
value
00: no auto-reset under failure
P6.1.06 Fault Auto Reset Number 00
01~20
Waiting Interval Time of Fault Auto
P6.1.07 000.1s~100.0s 001.0
Reset
When at P6.1.06=0, the frequency inverter keeps fault state for there is no automatic fault reset function.
When at P6.1.06>0, the frequency inverter selects the times of automatic fault reset. In case of exceeding the
selected times, the frequency inverter keeps fault state.
Function P6.1.07 refers to the waiting time from fault alarm of the frequency inverter to automatic fault reset.

0: Free Stop
1: Stop by its Mode
Fault Protective Ones: Motor Overload
P6.1.08 00000
Action Selection 1 Tens: Input Default Phase
Hundreds: Output Default Phase
Thousands: External Default
Ten Thousands: Communication Abnormality
0: Free Stop
1: Stop by its Mode
Fault Protective Ones: Motor Overload
P6.1.09 00000
Action Selection 2 Tens: Feedback Loss
Hundreds: User Customerized Fault 1
Thousands: User Customerized Fault 2
Ten Thousands: Power-on Time Reached
Ones: Running Time Reached
0: Free Stop
1: Stop by its Mode
Fault Protective 2: Continuous Running
P6.1.10 00000
Action Selection 3 Tens: Encoder Abnormality
0: Free Stop
Hundreds: Parameter Read-Write Abnormity
0: Free Stop
150
1: Stop by its Mode
Thousands: Motor Overhear
0: Free Stop
1: Stop by its Mode
Ten Thousands: Fault of 24V Power Supply
0: Free Stop
1: Stop by its Mode
0: Free Stop
1: Stop by its Mode
Fault Protective Ones: Larger Speed Deviation
P6.1.11 00000
Action Selection 4 Tens: Motor Overspeed
Hundreds: Initial Position Error
Thousands: Reservation
The function codes P6.1.08～P6.1.11 are used to set the actions of the frequency inverter after fault alarm. Each
digit among the options for fault protection action corresponds to a kind of fault protection, if it is 0, it indicates
that the frequency inverter stops freely; if it is 1, it indicates that the frequency inverter shuts down in stop mode
after fault alarm; if it is 2, it indicates that the frequency inverter continues to run at frequency selected by
Function Code P6.1.12 after fault alarm.
Factory set
value
0: Running at Current Frequency
Continuous Running 1: Running at Reference frequency
P6.1.12 Frequency Selection 2: Running at Upper Frequency 0
when at Fault 3: Running at Lower Frequency
4: Running at Back Frequency for Abnormality
When the frequency inverter breaks down in the running process, if the handling mode of this fault is continuous
running, the frequency inverter displays A** (A** is its fault code), it continues to run at frequency selected by
P6.1.12.If the handling mode of this fault is shut-down by reducing the speed, the frequency inverter displays A**
in the process of deceleration, the stop state display Err**.
0: Run at Current Frequency

When the frequency inverter gives an alarm of fault, run at current frequency
1: Run at Reference Frequency

When the frequency inverter gives an alarm of fault, run at reference frequency
2: Run at Upper Frequency

When the frequency inverter gives an alarm of fault, run at upper frequency
3: Run at Lower Frequency

When the frequency inverter gives an alarm of fault, run at lower frequency
4: Run at Standby Frequency for Abnormality

When the frequency inverter gives an alarm of fault, run at frequency set by Function Code P6.1.13.

P6.1.13 Backup Frequency for Abnormality 000.0%~100.0% 100.0
When at Function Code P6.1.12=4, the set value of this function code determines the running frequency when the
frequency inverter gives an alarm of fault, which is the percentage relative to highest frequency.
151
0: Invalid
Action Selection for Momentary
P6.1.14 1: Deceleration 0
Interruption
2: Stop by Deceleration
Judgment Time of Momentary
P6.1.15 000.00s~100.00s 000.50
Interruption Voltage Recovery
Voltage Judgment for Momentary 60.0%~100.0% (Standard Bus line
P6.1.16 080.0
Interruption Action voltage)
Voltage Judgment for Suspension of 80.0%~100.0% (Standard Bus line
P6.1.17 090.0
Momentary Action voltage)
When at P6.1.14=0, the frequency inverter continues to run at current frequency in interrupt power-supply or
sudden reduction of voltage.
When at P6.1.14=1, in case of interrupt power-supply or sudden reduction of voltage, after the Bus line voltage
reduces to corresponding voltage of the set value of P6.1.16 below, the frequency inverter slows down and runs;
after the Bus line voltage resets to corresponding voltage of the set value of P6.1.16 above and the duration of
time exceeds the time set by P6.1.15, the frequency inverter runs after it is normally accelerated to reference
frequency. In the process of deceleration, if the Bus line voltage resets to corresponding voltage of the set value of
P6.1.17, the frequency inverter stops slowing down and keeps running at current frequency.
When at P6.1.14=2, in case of interrupt power-supply or sudden reduction of voltage, after the Bus line voltage
reduces to below corresponding voltage of the set value of P6.1.16, the frequency inverter slows down and runs;
after it slows down to 0Hz and the Bus line voltage hasn’t recovered, the frequency inverter stops.
Voltage Judgment for Suspension

Bus line voltage of Momentary Action
Voltage Judgment for

Suspension of
Momentary Action
Voltage Judgment for

Suspension of
Momentary Action
Time
Running Frequency
Deceleration
Time
Deceleration Acceleration Process

Running Frequency Process
Shutdown by Deceleration
Time
Deceleration
Process
152
P6.1.18 Off-load Protection Selection 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0
00.0%~100.0% (Motor Rated Rotating
P6.1.19 Off-load Test Level 010.0
Speed)
P6.1.20 Off-load Test Time 0.0s~60.0s 01.0
The Function Code P6.1.18 is sued to set whether the off-load protection function is valid, 0 and 1 respectively
indicates invalid and valid.
If the off-load protection function is valid and the fault handling mode is continuous run or stop by speed
reduction, when the output current of the frequency inverter is less than corresponding current value of off-load
test level of P6.1.19 and the duration is over off-load test level of P6.1.20, the output frequency of the frequency
inverter automatically reduces to 7% of rated frequency, the frequency inverter gives an alarm of A19 in running
or decelerating state; in shutdown state, the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Err19, if the load is recovered,
the frequency inverter is automatically recovered to run at reference frequency.

P6.1.21 Overspeed Test 0.0%~50.0% (maximum frequency) 20.0
P6.1.22 Overspeed Test Time 0.0s~60.0s 01.0
This function is only valid when the frequency inverter runs with speed sensor vector control. When the frequency
inverter detects out actual speed of the motor over reference frequency and the exceeding value is greater than
corresponding speed of speed test value P6.1.21 and the duration is over speed test value P6.1.22, the frequency
inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err29 and the handling to fault is conducted based on fault protection action
mode.

0.0%~50.0% (maximum
P6.1.23 Speed Deviation greater than Test Value 20.0
frequency)
P6.1.24 Speed Deviation greater than Test Time 0.0s~60.0s 05.0
This function is only valid when the frequency inverter runs with speed sensor vector control. When the frequency
inverter detects out the deviation between actual speed of the motor and reference frequency, if the deviation value
is greater than test value P6.1.23 of excessive speed deviation and the duration is longer than test time P6.1.24 of
excessive speed deviation, the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err28 and the handling to fault is
conducted based on fault protection action mode. When the test time of excessive speed deviation is 0.0s, this
function is invalid.

Fault Output Terminal Action Selection during 0: No Action
P6.1.25 0
Fault Auto Reset Period 1: Action
This function code is used to set whether the fault output terminals act during the period of automatic fault reset.
When at P6.1.25=0, the fault output terminals cannot act during the period of automatic fault reset.
When at P6.1.25=1, the fault output terminals act during the period of automatic fault reset. After automatic fault
reset, the fault output terminals also reset.
153
6.8 Group P7 User Function Customization
P7.0 Basic Group
P7.0.00 User Function 0 U0.0.01 U0.0.01
P7.0.01 User Function 1 U0.0.00~UX.X.XX (exclude P7, P8) U0.0.02
The function codes of this group are User Customized Parameter Group. The users can summarize the parameters
of the function codes (except Group P7 and P8) selected from function codes for display to Group P7.0 as User
Customized Parameter for easy operation as view and medication, and the User Customized Parameter Group is
not more than 30.
154
6.9 Group P8 Manufacturer Function
P8.0 Manufacturer Function
P8.0.00 Manufacturer Code 00000~65535 00000
This function code is the manufacturer password entry and displays dedicated function code of the manufacturer,
the users don’t operate it.
P8.1 Correction Group

P8.1.00 Voltage Input of Potentiometer Correction Point 1 00.00V~P8.1.02 00.00
Corresponding reference of Potentiometer Correction
P8.1.01 -100.0%~100.0% 000.0
Point 1
P8.1.02 Voltage Input of Potentiometer Correction Point 2 P8.1.00~10.00V 10.00
Corresponding reference of Potentiometer Correction
P8.1.03 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0
Point 2
P8.1.04 Filtering time of potentiometer 00.00s~10.00s 00.10
The function codes of this group are used to correct the potentiometer to get rid of the impact of zero-offset or
voltage attenuation caused by overlong keyboard lines. When leaving the factory, the function parameters of this
group have been corrected, when resetting to factory set value, the reset value is the value after factory correction.
Generally, the application site is not required to conduct correction.
If adopts potentiometer instead of VF3, the above function codes can be used to correct VF3 as well.

P8.1.05 VF1 actual voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V 2.000
P8.1.06 VF1 indicated voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V 2.000
The function codes of this group are used to correct analog input VF to get rid of the impact of VF input
zero-offset or gain. When leaving the factory, the function parameters of this group have been corrected, when
resetting to factory set value, the reset value is the value after factory correction. Generally, the application site is
not required to conduct correction.
Actual Voltage: use the measuring instruments to measure the voltage between terminal VF and terminal GND,
such as multi-meter, etc.
Voltage Display: the voltage display value from the sampling of the frequency inverter refers to voltage (P9.0.19,
P9.0.20)display before VF correction of Group P9.
When correcting, input two voltage values on each VF input terminal and then input actually measured voltage
value and display voltage to corresponding function codes, the frequency inverter can conduct correction
automatically.
155
P8.1.13 FM1 target voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V 2.000
P8.1.14 FM1 actual voltage 1 0.500V~4.000V 2.000
P8.1.15 FM1 target voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V 8.000
P8.1.16 FM1 actual voltage 2 6.000V~9.999V 8.000
P8.1.17 FM2 target voltage 1 (E102 invalid) 0.500V~4.000V 2.000
P8.1.18 FM2 actual voltage 1 (E102 invalid) 0.500V~4.000V 2.000
P8.1.19 FM2 target voltage 2 (E102 invalid) 6.000V~9.999V 8.000
P8.1.20 FM2 actual voltage 2 (E102 invalid) 6.000V~9.999V 8.000
The function codes of this group are used to correct analog output FM. If the correction has been done when
leaving the factory, when resetting to factory set value, the reset value is the value after factory correction.
Generally, the application site cannot need to conduct correction.
Actually Measured Voltage: use the measuring instruments to measure the voltage between terminal VF and
terminal GND, such as multi-meter, etc.
Target Voltage: refer to theoretical voltage value of the frequency inverter based on corresponding relationship of
analog output.
When correcting, output two voltage values on each FM terminal and then input actually measured voltage value
and target voltage to corresponding function codes, the frequency inverter can conduct correction automatically.
156
6.10 Group P9 Monitoring Parameter
P9.0 Basic Monitoring Parameter
P9 Parameter Group is used to monitor running state information of the frequency inverter, the users can set
corresponding parameter as required, which can not only be rapidly viewed through panel for easy debugging and
maintenance on site, but also read through communication for monitoring of upper computer.
Function code Function name Description Unit

P9.0.00 Running Frequency Output frequency when the frequency inverter runs 0.01Hz
P9.0.01 Reference frequency Reference frequency of the frequency inverter 0.01Hz
P9.0.02 Output Current Output current when the frequency inverter runs 0.01A
P9.0.03 Output Voltage Output current when the frequency inverter runs 1V
P9.0.04 Voltage on DC Bus of the frequency inverter 0.1V
Bus line voltage
When the frequency inverter runs, the output torque is
P9.0.05 Output Torque 0.1%
the percentage of rated torque of the motor
P9.0.06 Output Power Output frequency when the frequency inverter runs 0.1kW
P9.0.07 Input Terminal Status Check whether the input terminal has signal input
P9.0.08 Output Terminal Status Check whether the output terminal has signal output
Display coefficient P5.0.15 and the value after
P9.0.11 Custom Display Value conversion of Decimal Point P5.0.16 through
customerization
P9.0.12 Actual Counting Value 1
counting function
P9.0.13 Actual Length Value 1m
fixed-length function
Product of PID reference value and PID reference
P9.0.14 PID Reference
feedback quantity
Product of PID feedback value and PID reference
P9.0.15 PID Feedback
feedback rang
PULS Impulse
P9.0.16 View the frequency of PULSE Impulse Input 0.01kHz
frequency
Actual output frequency when the frequency inverter
P9.0.17 Feedback Speed 0.1Hz
runs
P9.0.18 PLC Stage Display which stage the Simple PLC runs at 1
Voltage before VF1
Correction
Voltage before VF2
Correction
The sampling line speed of DI6 impulse is equal to the
P9.0.21 Line Speed 1m/min
acquisition of impulse count per minute/ per meter
P9.0.22 Current Power-on Time Length of current power-on time 1min
P9.0.23 Current Running Time Length of current running time 0.1min
P9.0.24 Residual Running Time Residual running time at Timing Function of P3.1.00 0.1min
Frequency of
P9.0.25 View the frequency given by Frequency A 0.01Hz
Frequency Source A
157
Function code Function name Description Unit

Frequency of
P9.0.26 View the frequency given by Frequency B 0.01Hz
Frequency Source B
Communication Set The value set by corresponding communication address
P9.0.27 %
value A001 is the percentage of the highest frequency
P9.0.28 Impulse frequency View the frequency of PULSE Impulse Input 1Hz
Encoder Feedback Actual running frequency of the motor from feedback of the
P9.0.29 0.01Hz
Speed encoder
View actual distance value of the distance value of the
P9.0.30 Actual Distance Value
frequency inverter
P9.0.31~
Reservation
P9.0.45
User Standby
Monitoring Value 1
User Standby
Monitoring Value 2
User Standby
Monitoring Value 3
User Standby
Monitoring Value 4
User Standby
P9.0.54 Monitoring Value 5 Check the value of user special function
Corresponding Relationship of Input and Output Terminal State

Whether the vertical line of the digital tube of each digit lights on, it indicates that whether the input and output
terminal of each digit has the signal or not. If it lights on, it indicates that corresponding input terminal of this
vertical line has signal input or the output terminal has signal output.
The display rules of Function Code P9.0.07 are shown as below:
Potentiometer
The display rules of Function Code P9.0.08 are shown as below:
(M is internal Intermediate Delay Relay)
M4 M2 YO2 T2 YO
M5 M3 M1 YO1 T1
158
Chapter 7 Common Function and Application Case

7.1 Common Function
7.1.1 Start and Stop Control
E Series Frequency inverter has three kinds of start and stop control modes: keyboard control, terminal control
and communication control.
1. Keyboard Control (Set P0.0.03=0)
Press “RUN” Key on the keyboard, the frequency inverter starts; press “Stop” Key on the keyboard, the frequency
inverter stops; the running direction is controlled by Function Code P0.0.06, it is forward rotation when at
P0.0.06=0 and it is reverse rotation when at P0.0.06=1.
2. Terminal Control (Set P0.0.03=1)
Provide four kinds of terminal start and stop modes for option of the users: two-line mode 1, two-line mode 2,
three-line mode 1 and three-line mode 2. Specific use methods are as below:
 Two-line Mode 1 (Set P2.0.11=0)
Any two terminals of DIx and DIy among multifunctional terminals are used to determine forward and reverse
running of the more and all are the active level. The terminal function references are as below:
Terminal Reference Value Description

DIx 1 Forward Running (FWD)
DIy 2 Reverse Running (REV)
Run Command
Stop
E Series
REV Frequency
inverter
FWD
Stop
 Two-line Mode 2 (Set P2.0.11=1)

Any two terminals of DIx and DIy among multifunctional terminals are used to determine forward and reverse
running of the motor, in which Terminal DIx is used as running enable terminal and DIy is used as terminal of
confirming the running direction, all are the active level. The terminal function references are as below:

Run Command
Stop E Series
Frequency
Stop inverter
REV
FWD
159
 Three-line Mode 1 ( Set P2.0.11=2)

Any three terminals of Dix, DIy and DIn among multifunctional terminals are used to determine forward and
reverse running of the motor, in which Terminal DIx is used as running enable terminal and DIx & DIy are used as
terminal of confirming the running direction, Din is the active level and DIx & DIy are the active PLS. When the
running is needed, the Terminal DIn must be closed at first and then the PLS of DIx or DIy are used to realize
forward or reverse control of the motor. When the shutdown is needed, it is realized through disconnecting the
signal of Terminal Din. The terminal function references are as below:

DIn 3 3-line Running Control
E Series
Frequency
inverter
SB1 is the button of normally opened forward running, SB2 is the button of normally opened reverse running and
SB3 is the button of normally closed stop.
 3-line Control Mode 2 (Set P2.0.11=3)

Any three terminals of Dix, DIy and DIn among multifunctional terminals are used to determine forward and
reverse running of the motor, in which Terminal DIn is used as enable terminal, DIx is used as running terminal
and DIy is used as terminal of confirming the running direction, Din and Dix are the active level and DIy is the
active PLS. When the running is needed, the Terminal DIn must be closed at first and then the PLS of DIx is used
to realize the running of the motor and the state of DIy is used to determine the running direction. When the
shutdown is needed, it needs to be realized through disconnecting the signal of Terminal Din. The terminal
function references are as below:

DIn 3 3-line Running Control
Running
Direction
REV E Series
Frequency
FWD inverter
160
SB1 is the button of normally opened forward running, SB3 is the button of normally closed stop and K is the
button of running direction option
3. Communication Control (Set P0.0.03=2)

The start, stop, FWD and REV of the frequency inverter is realized by the upper computer through
Communication Mode RS-485. E Series Frequency inverter supports Standard MODBUS Protocol, refer to
Chapter VIII Communication RS-485 for more details.
7.1.2 Start and Stop Mode

1. Start Mode
E Series Frequency inverter has three kinds of start modes: direct start, speed tracking start and start after brake.
 Direct Start (Set P1.0.10=0)
The frequency inverter starts according to given start frequency (P1.0.12) and start frequency hold time
(P1.0.13)and then speeds up to the reference frequency according to the selected acceleration time.
Output Frequency
Direct Start
Set Frequency
Factory set value
Start Frequency
Time
Running Hold Time Acceleration

Command of Start Time
Frequency
 Speed Tracking Start (Set P1.0.10=1)
The frequency inverter starts the speed tracking according to the speed tracking mode given by speed tracking
mode P1.0.11 to track the running speed of the motor at which the frequency inverter starts until being accelerated
or decelerated to reference frequency. When the motor hasn’t stopped stably or is unable to stop, this function
shall be adopted.
Output Frequency
Speed Tracking Start
Set Frequency Initial Speed of
Load Motor
Acceleration Time
Time
Automatic Speed
Running Tracking Detection
Command
 Speed Tracking Start (Set P1.0.10=2)

Before starting the motor normally, the frequency converter firstly deploys DC braking in accordance with the
data set up in the parameters about starting DC braking current (P1.0.14) and starting DC braking time (P1.0.15).
If the motor rotates reversely at low speed before starting, this function shall be used when starting the motor by
rotating it forward.
161
Output Frequency
Start after Brake
Set Frequency Factory set value
Start Frequency
Time
Running Start DC Hold Time Acceleration

Command Brake of Start Time
Time Frequency
2. Stop Mode
E Series Frequency inverter has two kinds of shutdown modes: Deceleration Stop and Free Stop
 Deceleration Stop (Set P1.0.16=0)
After the stop command is effective, the frequency inverter reduces the output frequency according to the selected
deceleration time, and it stops when the output frequency is reduced to 0.
When it is required to prevent the frequency inverter from sliding and jittering when it quickly stops or stops at
low speed, the stop DC brake function can be used, after the frequency inverter is reduced to frequency given by
P1.0.17, it is to wait for the time given by P1.0.18 and start DC brake at current given by P1.0.19 until the time
given by P1.0.20 is reached and then the frequency inverter stops DC brake.
When it is required to quickly stop at high speed, the dynamic braking shall be adopted. The built-in brake units of
E Series Frequency inverter 15kW and below set the parameters of brake utilization rate P1.0.21 and externally
connect brake resistance to adopt dynamic braking; the frequency inverters with power above 15kW can adopt
dynamic braking only when they are configured with brake units and brake resistance .Refer to Appendix A2.5 for
externally configured brake units and brake resistance.
Output Frequency Factory set value

Shutdown by
Deceleration
Set Frequency Shutdown DC
Brake Waiting
Time DC Brake Time
Shutdown DC Brake
Start Frequency No Output Time
Deceleration Time
Shutdown Command
 Free Stop (Set P1.0.16=1)
After the stop command is effective, the frequency inverter immediately terminates the output and the motor stop
freely by mechanical inertia. The users haven’t had the stop requirements for load or when the load itself has the
brake function, the function of free stop can be selected.
162
Output Frequency
Free Stop
Set Frequency Shutdown of Load Speed upon Inertia
Time
Stop Command
7.1.3 Acceleration and Deceleration Mode

Different load characteristics have different requirements for acceleration and deceleration time, E Series
Frequency inverter provides three kinds of acceleration and deceleration modes: Straight Line, Curve S 1 and
Curve S 2, which are selected through Function Code P0.1.19. Additionally, the acceleration and deceleration time
unit can be adjusted and set through Function Code P0.2.03.
 Straight Line (Set P0.1.19=0)
Start the linear speed from start frequency to reference frequency. E Series Frequency inverter provides four kinds
of linear acceleration and deceleration modes, which can be switched among different terminal combinations that
are selected through acceleration and deceleration time.
 Curve S 1 (Set P0.1.19=1)
The output frequency increases or decrease by Curve S. Curve S is the used for occasions required gentle start or
stop. Parameter P0.1.20 and P0.1.21 respectively define the time scale of starting period and ending period of
Curve S 1.
 Curve S 2 (Set P0.1.19=2)
In acceleration and deceleration of Curve S, the rated frequency of the motor is always the inflection point of
Curve S. Generally, it is used for occasions that the high-speed areas above rated frequency require acceleration
and deceleration.
7.1.4 Jogging Function

E Series Frequency inverter provides two kinds of the modes to realize jogging function: Keyboard Control and
Terminal Control.
 Keyboard Control
Set the function of multi-functional Key JOG as forward jogging or reverse jogging (P5.0.00=1or 2).The
frequency inverter can use Key JOG to realize Jogging Function when it stops，and the jogging running frequency
and acceleration and deceleration time can be set through Function Code P0.1.08~P0.1.10.
 Terminal Control
Set the function of multi-functional Dix and DIy as forward jogging or reverse jogging. When the frequency
inverter stops, it can use Dix and DIy to realize Jogging Function，and the jogging running frequency and
acceleration and deceleration time can be set through Function Code P0.1.08~P0.1.10.
Note: The jogging function of the above reference modes is the jogging effect when the frequency inverter is
at stop state. If the frequency inverter is required to be at running state and the priority is given to the
effect of Jogging Function, it is to set Function Code P0.1.25=1.
163
7.1.5 Running Frequency Control

E Series Frequency inverter provides two Frequency Source Input Channels, that is, Frequency Source A and
Frequency Source B respectively, they not only can work independently, but in combination mode through
computer. Each frequency source has 14 kinds of references for option, so the optional requirements for different
frequencies at different sites can be greatly satisfied. The factory default of the frequency inverter is Frequency
Source A Reference. When two frequency sources are combined, Frequency Source A is main channel and
Frequency Source B is auxiliary channel by default
Detailed explanation for realization process of frequency selection is shown as the figure below:
164
7.1.6 Multi-speed Function
E Series Frequency inverter can realize the switch of 16-stage speed at most through different combination state of
multiplex directive terminal. As for missing set digit, the calculation is made at state 0.
Frequency
Highest
Frequency
option
Terminal
Multiplex directive terminal input
combination
Multiplex Frequency 0:
directive Frequency 1:
terminal Frequency 2:
Target
frequency
Frequency 13:
Frequency 14:
Frequency 15:
7.1.7 Simple PLC

E Series Frequency inverter can automatically run at 16-stage speed at most, the acceleration and deceleration
time and the length of running time of each stage can be set independently (refer to Function Code
P3.0.03~P3.0.50). Additionally, the times of cycle required can be set through P3.0.00 and P3.0.01.
Simple
PLC Run
Stage 0 Stage 1 Stage 14 Stage 15 Run at
Frequency Mode
Frequency of
inverter Last Stage
Start
Rerun Restart after Run from

Power Off Power Off
Continuous
Run
True Continuous
Run N Times
False Free
Stop
165
7.1.8 Timing Function
P3.1.00 Timing Function Selection 2: Effective (h) (this function is 0
unavailable when unable to be set as 2)
Tinning Running Time
P3.1.01 2: External Terminal VF2 Reference 0
Selection
(Analog input range corresponds to
P3.1.02)
0000.0min/h~6500.0min/h (unit depends
P3.1.02 Tinning Running Time 0000.0
on P3.1.00)
E Series Frequency inverter has built-in Timing Function to complete its timing running.
Function Code P3.1.00 determines whether the timing function is valid.
Function Code P3.1.01 determines the source of fixed running time.
When at P3.1.01=0, the fixed running time is given by the value set by Function Code P3.1.02.
When at P3.1.01=1 or 2, the fixed running time is given by external analog input terminal. E Series Frequency
inverter provides 2-way analog input terminal (VF1, VF2). VF1 and VF2 can input 0V~10V voltage or
0/4mA~20mA current. As for corresponding relation curve between the input of VF1 and VF2 and fixed running
time, the users can freely choose from four kinds of the relation curves through function code P2.1.02, in which
Curve 1 and Curve 2 are linear relationship able to be set through Function Code P2.0.13~P2.0.22, and Curve 3
and Curve 4 are broken line relationship with two inflection points able to be set through Function Code
P2.1.04~P2.1.19. At this time, the analog input range corresponds to the value given by Function Code P3.1.02.
When the Timing Function is effective, the frequency inverter needs to restart timing for every start, when
reaching the Reference Time, the frequency inverter stops automatically. During the process of stop, the
multi-functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON. When the stop process ends,
multi-functional output terminals output Signal OFF. Corresponding multi-functional output terminals are Timing
Reaches Output (30). When the Reference Time is 0, the fixed time is not limited. Actual time of current running
can be viewed through Function Code P9.0.23 (when the frequency inverter shuts down, the display value of
P9.0.23 automatically resets to 0).
Timing Run Time

Free
Stop
Option for
Timing Run Option for Timing
VF1 Input Function Running
Time
( Range Time
Percentage) Reached Multi-functional Output
Terminal Output
VF2 Input
( Range
Percentage)
166
7.1.9 Fixed-length Function
P3.1.08 Reference Length 00000m~65535m 01000
P3.1.09 Actual Length 00000m~65535m 00000
P3.1.10 Impulse Count per meter 0000.1~6553.5 0100.0
E Series Frequency inverter has built-in fixed-length function to realize fixed-length control. In the application,
corresponding digital input terminal is required to be set as “Length Counting Input” (Function 30). When the
input impulse frequency is higher, Terminal DI16 must be adopted. The formula for length calculation is as below:
Actual Length= Total Impulses from Acquisition of Terminal/ Impulses per meter
When actual length reaches the reference length (value set by P3.1.08), the multi-functional output terminals of
the frequency inverter can output Signal ON. Corresponding multi-functional output terminal function is Length
Reached (10).
In the process of fixed-length control, the reset operation to actual length can be realized through digital input
terminal. Corresponding digital input terminal function is Length Reset (31).
Actual length can be viewed through Function Code P3.1.09 or P9.0.13.
Actual Length
Length Reached
Multi-functional Output
Terminal Output
Length Total Length Impulses/ Impulses Set Length

Impulse per Meter (P3.1.10)
Length Length Reset

Reset
Length Impulse
Input
Length Reached
Length Reset Input
167
7.1.10 Counting Function
P3.1.11 Reference Count Value 00001~65535 01000
P3.1.12 Designated Count Value 00001~65535 01000
The counting function of E Series Frequency inverter has two-level signal output, that is, reference counting Value
Reached and designated counting Value Reached. In the application, corresponding digital input terminal function
is required to be set as “Counter Input” (Function 28). When the impulse frequency is higher, Terminal DI6 must
be adopted.
When actual counting value reaches the reference value (set by P3.1.11), the multi-functional output terminals of
the frequency inverter can output Signal ON. Corresponding multi-functional output terminal function is
Reference Counting Value Reached (8).
When actual counting value reaches the reference value (set by P3.1.12), the multi-functional output terminals of
the frequency inverter can output Signal ON. Corresponding multi-functional output terminal function is
Reference Counting Value Reached (9).
In the counting process, the reset operation to actual counting value can be realized through digital input terminal.
Corresponding digital input terminal function is Counter Reset (29)
Actual counting value can be viewed through Function Code P9.0.12.
Actual
Counting value
Reference Counting Value Reaches
Count Multi-functional Output Terminal
Count Impulse Designated Output
Impulse
Input Terminal Counting Value
Input Function 28
Designated Counting Value
Reaches
Reference Terminal Output
Counting Value
Count
Reset Count Reset
Count Impulse Input
Count Reset Input

Reference Count
Reached Output
Designated Count
Reached Output
168
7.1.11 Distance Control Function
P3.1.15 Impulse Count per Distance 000.00~600.00 000.00
E Series Frequency inverter has built-in Distance Control Function. In the application, corresponding digital input
terminal function is required to be set as “Encoder A Input” (Function 52) and “Encoder B Input” (Function 53).
Terminal DI5 and DI6 of CDI-E100 Series can connect high-speed impulse of the encoder, the impulse frequency
of the encoder of other terminals is not allowed more than 200Hz. The impulse frequency of CDI-E102 Series
encoder is not allowed more than 200Hz. The impulse frequency of CDI-E180 Series encoder is not allowed more
than 200Hz.In case of exceeding 200Hz, the open-collector encoder expansion card is required to be configured
(set P0.1.26=10). The phase sequence of the encoder determines the plus-minus of actual distance.
Actual Distance= ±Total Impulses from Acquisition of Terminal/ Impulses per distance
For the digital tube has five digits, when the distance is less than-999.9, all displayed decimal points of the digital
tube completely indicate minus value, e.g. “1.0.1.0.0” means -1010.0。
When actual distance reaches the set value 1 (value set by P3.1.13), the multi-functional output terminals of the
frequency inverter can output Signal ON. Corresponding multi-functional output terminal function is the Distance
Set Value 1 Reached (56).
When actual distance reaches the set value 2 (value set by P3.1.14), the multi-functional output terminals of the
frequency inverter can output Signal ON. Corresponding multi-functional output terminal function is the Distance
Set Value 2 Reached (57).
In the process of distance control, the reset operation to actual distance can be realized through digital input
terminal. Corresponding digital input terminal function is the Distance Reset (54).
Actual distance can be viewed through Function Code P9.0.30.
Distance Set Value 1
Reached
Count
Impulse Total Distance Impulses/Impulses Actual Set Value
per Distance (P3.1.15) Terminal Output
Reached
Distance Set Value 2 Multi-functional Output
Distance Terminal Output
Reset Distance Reset
Encoder Phase
A Input
Encoder Phase
B Input
Count Impulse
Set Value 1
Reached
Set Value 2
Reached
169
7.1.12 Simple Internal Relay Programmable Function
E Series Frequency inverter has five built-in virtual Intermediate Delay Relays, which not only can collect the
physical signals of digital input terminal of the frequency inverter, but virtual signals of multi-functional output
terminals (00~59). And then it is to conduct simple logic running and output the results to multi-functional output
terminals or equivalent digital input terminal.
The
correspondin
Input 2 (Ten g digit in
Thousands and P3.2.00 is 0
Output (Tens and
Thousands of Ones of Control Word
Control Word B) C. Corresponding
Digital Input
Input 1 Interm Terminal Function
( Hundreds and The ediate 00-59)
Tens of Control Input correspondin Delay
Word B)
Apply Input 1 and (Control g digit in Relay
Delay Time Option for
Input 2 to logic Word B) P3.2.00 is 1 Contro Valid State
l
operation ( Ones of
Input 2 (Ten Control Word B)
Thousands and Output
Thousands of The (Multifunctional
Control Word B) correspondin Output Terminal
g digit in Output,
Input (Thousands and P3.2.00 is 2 corresponding
hundreds of Control function is50-54)
Word C. Function 0-59
of corresponding
multi-functional output terminal)
Description for Control Logic Function of Intermediate Delay Relay Control Word B
Set value for
Function code Function Description
unit’s digit
If input 1 is true, the logic result is true,
0 Input 1
If input 1 is false, the logic result is false
If input 1 is true, the logic result is false
1 Input 1 and NOT
If input 1 is false, the logic result is true
Input 1 and Input 2 If Input 1 and Input 2 are true, the logic result is true
2
AND or false
P3.2.02
Any one of Input 1 and Input 2 is true, the logic
P3.2.03 3 Input 1 and Input 2 OR
result is true,
P3.2.04
If Input 1 and Input 2 are opposite logic, the logic
P3.2.05
Input 1 and Input 2 result is true
P3.2.06 4
XOR If Input 1 and Input 2 have same logic, the logic
result is false
The valid reference of
If input 1 is true, the logic result is true,
Input 1 is valid
5 If input 2 is true and input 1 is false, the logic result
The valid Reference of
is true, the logic result is false
Input 2 is invalid
170
Function Set value for unit’s

Function Description
code digit
Valid reference of Input 1
Rise Edge is valid If Input 1 Rising Edge is true, the logic result is true
6
Valid reference of Input 2 If Input 2 Rising Edge is true, the logic result is false
Rise Edge is invalid
P3.2.02
Reverse valid signal of If Input 1 Rising Edge is true, the logic result is
P3.2.03 7
Input 1 Rising Edge reverse
P3.2.04
Input 1 Rise Edge is valid
P3.2.05
and output a impulse If Input 1 Rising Edge is true, the logic result is true,
P3.2.06 8
signal with width of after keeping it 200ms, the logic result becomes false
200ms
Input 1 Rise Edge and If Input 1 Rising Edge and Input 2 Rising Edge are
9
Input 2 AND true, the logic result is true or false
E.g. in case of setting Function Code P3.2.00 (Intermediate Delay Relay Control)=00112, we can learn from
referring to the explanation of Function Code P3.2.00 that Relay 5 (M5) & Relay 5 (M5) are determined by
Control Word A and Relay 3 (M3) & Relay 2 (M2) are determined by Control Word B, and Relay 1 (M1) is
determined by thousands and hundreds of Control Word C, as shown in the figure below:
Corresponding M5 is
controlled by Control Word A Corresponding M1 is controlled by
Corresponding M4 is thousands and hundreds of Control
controlled by Control Word A Word C
Corresponding M3 is Corresponding M2 is controlled by
controlled by Control Word B Control Word B
In combination with the example above, in case of setting P3.2.01 (Intermediate Delay Relay Control Word
A))=10111, it is to compulsively set M5=1 and M4=0.
For M3, M2 and M1 are not determined by Control Word A, so the setting of P3.2.01 to M3, M2 and M1 is
invalid.
Corresponding M5 is
compulsively set at 1
Invalid
Corresponding M4 is
compulsively set at 0
171
In combination with the example above, in case of setting P3.2.03 (Control Word B of Corresponding M2)=01022,
we can learn from referring to the explanation of Function Code P3.2.03 that M2=DI2&&DI3, as shown in the
figure below:
Input 2 is DI2
Input 1 is DI3 Input 1 and

Input 2 AND
Equivalent as shown in the figure below:
DI2 DI3 M2
In combination with the example above, in case of setting the tens and ones of P3.2.08 (Control Word C of
Corresponding M2)at 01 (input terminal function of corresponding digital), it indicates that the function of M2 is
forward running. If 51(Synchronous Intermediate Relay M2) is set among P2.0.28~P2.0.32 at the same time,
corresponding multi-functional output terminal outputs the signal.
FWD Run
(Corresponding Digital Input
Terminal Function)
The Intermediate Relay can not only respectively preset the delay time for its connection and disconnection
through Function Code P3.2.12~P3.2.16 and P3.2.17~P3.2.21, but preset whether the reverse operation is
conducted for output signals through Function Code P3.2.22. In combination with the example above, in case of
setting P3.2.13 (delay time of corresponding M2 connection) =10.0s and P3.2.18 (delay time of corresponding M2
disconnection)=5.0s, when DI2 and DI3 are connected, M2 is not immediately connected, but connected after
waiting for 10.0s. Similarly, when one of DI2 or DI3 is disconnected, M2 is not immediately disconnected, but
disconnected after waiting for 5.0s.
Normal M2 Signal
Delay Time of Delay Time of

Reserve M2 Signal Connection Disconnection
172
7.1.13 Internal Timer Function
E Series Frequency inverter has two built-in timers, their start, shutdown timing and timer reset can be realized
through digital input terminal. The fixed Time Reached can output the signals through multi-functional output
terminal.
Start and Stop
Timer 1 (Ones of Timing of
P3.2.23) The count time of
Timer Input Terminal Timer
Timer 1 reaches the
Terminal Function value set by P3.2.24 Timer 1 Time Reached
48-49
(Multifunctional Output
Timer 2 (Tens of
Terminal Function 42)
P3.2.23)
Internal
Timer The count time of
Control Timer 2 reaches the Time of Timer 2 Reached
Timer 1 (Hundreds Word value set by P3.2.25 (Multifunctional Output
of P3.2.23) Timer
Timer Reset Terminal Terminal Function 43)
Reset
Terminal Function
50-51
Timer 2 (Thousands The count time of
of P3.2.23) Timer 1 reaches the
Time of Timer 1 is
value set by P3.2.24
reached but Time of
Timing Timer 2 is not reached
The count time of
Unit ((Multifunctional Output
Timing Unit (Ten Timer 2 fails to
Terminal Function 44)
Thousands of P3.2.23) reach the value set
by P3.2.25
When the signal of the output terminal of the timer (terminal function 48~49)is valid, the timer starts timing.
When the signal of the input terminal of the timer is invalid, the timer stops timing and keeps current value.
When actual timing value of Timer 1 reaches the value set by P3.2.24, the multi-functional output terminals of the
frequency inverter can output Signal ON. Corresponding multi-functional output terminal function is the Time of
Timer 1 Reached (42).
frequency inverter can output Signal ON. Corresponding multi-functional output terminal function is the Time of
Timer 2 Reached (43).
When actual timing value of Timer 1 reaches the value set by P3.2.24, but actual timing value of Timer 2 fails to
reach the value set by P3.2.25, the multi-functional output terminals of the frequency inverter output Signal ON.
frequency inverter output Signal OFF. Corresponding multi-functional output terminal function is Time of Timer 1
is reached, but Time of Timer 2 is not reached (44).
In the process of timing, the reset operation to actual timing value can be realized through digital input terminal.
Corresponding digital input terminal function is the Timer Reset Terminal (50~51).
Fixed Time of Timer 2
Fixed Time of Timer 1
Timer Input Terminal

Signal
Timer Reset Terminal

Signal
Time of Timer 1 reaches
signal

signal

signal but Time of Timer
2 does not reach signal
173
7.1.14 Internal Operation Module Function
E Series Frequency inverter has four built-in operation modules, which collect the data of two function codes of
the frequency inverter (remove the value after the decimal point) to conduct simple operation and finally output
the operation results into special use occasions .Certainly, the operation results can also be used to realize the
actions of multi-functional output terminals and the output of the analog signal.
Operation Input A Address Operation
Module Special Occasions for
Control Non-setti Output ( setting source is
ng operation result)
Operation Setting
Result Coefficient Operation
of Operation Result
Operation Input B Address Operation Result 2 Greater
than 0 (the multi-functional
output terminal function is 58)
Operation Result 4 Greater
than 0 (the multi-functional
Setting output terminal function is 59)
Coefficient
Property of
Operation Analog Output
( Corresponding operation
result of output setting)
Control Explanation for Operation Module

Corresponding set
Function code Function Description
value
0 No Operation No operation conducted
1 Add Operation Address A data + Address B data
2 Subtraction Operation Address A data - Address B data
3 Multiply Operation Address A data ×Address B data
4 Division Operation Address A data ÷Address B data
Greater than If Address A data>Address B data, the
5
Judgment non-setting operation result is 1, or it is 0.
If Address A data=Address B data, the
6 Equal to Judgment
non-setting operation result is 1, or it is 0.
Equal to or Greater If Address A data>=Address B data, the
7
P3.2.26 than Judgment non-setting operation result is 1, or it is 0.
Time of every Address B Data (ms as unit)
means Address A Data added to non-setting
operation result, e.g. If Address A Data is 100
and Address B Data is 1000, it indicates that 10
is added to non-setting operation result per
8 Integration
1000ms. The scope of the operation results is
-32767~32767. When the operation results is
less than -9999, all displayed decimal points of
the digital tube completely indicate minus
value, e.g. “1.0.1.0.0” means -10100.
9~F Reservation Reservation
174
Explanation for Setting Coefficient Property of Operation
Function code Corresponding set value Function Description

Conduct setting at no
decimal fraction to system Non-setting Operation Result × Setting Coefficient of
0
by multiplication Operation
algorithm
Operate the Setting
Coefficient by Non-setting Operation Result × Setting Coefficient of
1
multiplication with one Operation÷10
decimal
Operate the Setting
2
multiplication with two Operation÷100
decimals
Operate the Setting
3
multiplication with three Operation÷1000
decimals
Operate the Setting
4
multiplication with four Operation÷10000
decimals
Operate the Setting
Non-setting Operation Result ÷ Setting Coefficient of
5 Coefficient by division
Operation
without decimal
Operate the Setting
P3.2.27 Operation ×10
with one decimal
Operate the Setting
Operation ×100
with two decimals
Operate the Setting
Operation ×1000
with three decimals
Operate the Setting
Operation ×10000
with four decimals
Operate the Setting
Non-setting operation result ÷ number of function
A Coefficient by division
code corresponding to operation setting coefficient
without decimal
Operate the Setting
Non-setting operation result ÷ number of function
B Coefficient by division
code corresponding to operation setting coefficient × 10
with one decimal
Operate the Setting Non-setting operation result ÷ number of function
C Coefficient by division code corresponding to operation setting coefficient ×
with two decimals 100
D Coefficient by division code corresponding to operation setting coefficient ×
with three decimals 1000
E Coefficient by division code corresponding to operation setting coefficient ×
with four decimals 10000
Note: 5~9 are operation setting coefficients and can be directly included in the operation, and A～E are not operation setting
coefficients and cann’t be directly included in the operation. The operation setting coefficient is used to point to a function
code number and only the number of function code can be included in the operation.
175
Control Explanation for Operation Results
Operation Results oriented Scope of Operation Results
-Highest Frequency~Highest Frequency (Remove
Operation Results Oriented Reference Frequency
Decimal Point)
Operation Results Oriented Reference Upper Frequency 0~Highest Frequency (Remove Decimal Point)
Operation Results Oriented PID Reference -1000~1000 means -100.0%~100.0%
Operation Results Oriented PID Feedback -1000~1000 means -100.0%~100.0%
Operation Results Oriented Torque Reference -1000~1000 means -100.0%~100.0%
Operation Result 1: -1000~1000
Operation Result 2: 0~1000
Operation Results Oriented Analog Output
Operation Result 3: -1000~1000
Operation Result 4: 0~1000
The operation result 1 can be reviewed through Function Code P9.0.46.

e.g. the sum of VF1 Reference and VF2 Reference can be used to torque reference through operation. When the
scope of torque reference is 0.0%~100.0%,the desired scope of operation results is 0~1000. For the scope of
reference voltage of VF1 and VF2 is 00.00~10.00m, the scope of the non-setting operation results of Operation 2
is 0~2000, but the desired scope of operation results can be reached through division by two. The parameters of
the function code are required to be set as below:
Function code Function name Set value Explanation

Torque Reference Source from Operation
P1.1.14 Torque Reference Source 9
Result 2
P3.2.26 Operation Module H.0010 Select addition operation for operation 2
Operation Setting Coefficient Operate the setting coefficient by division
P3.2.27 H.0050
Property without decimals
Operate corresponding Function Code
P3.2.31 Input A of Operation 2 09009
P9.0.09 by unsigned number
Operate corresponding Function Code
P3.2.32 Input B of Operation 2 09010
P9.0.10 by unsigned number
Setting Coefficient of Operation
P3.2.33 2 The setting coefficient is 2
2
The above description means:

Operation result = (number in P9.0.09 + number in P9.0.10) ÷2
If P3.2.27= H.00A0, the above description means:
Operation result = (number in P9.0.09 + number in P9.0.10) ÷number in P0.0.02
If P0.0.02=1,
Operation result = (number in P9.0.09 + number in P9.0.10) ÷1
176
7.1.15 PID FUNCTION
E Series Frequency inverter has built-in PID Regulator, which is configured with the option for signal reference
channel and signal feedback channel, the users can easily realize automatic regulation of process control and
control applications on constant voltage, constant flow, constant temperature, tension, etc. When in use of PID
Frequency Closed-loop Control, the users need to preset the running frequency and reference mode and select
P0.0.04 as 8 (PID Control), that is, PID Automatic Regulation on Output Frequency, related parameters of PID are
given in Group P4 and the use methods of PID are as below: Frequency
Superposition
PID Parameter 1:
Built-in PID regulator Proportional Gain P4.0.05
PID Value Reference Integral Time P4.0.06 PID Output
Derivative Time P4.0.07 Property Option for
Option for PID Action Deviation Frequency
Reference Direction Limit Source Drive
Source PID Parameter 2: Motor
Proportional Gain P4.0.10
Integral Time P4.0.11
Derivative Time P4.0.12
Controlle
Reference Switch Condition d Target
Quantity
Display
Feedback
Feedback Filtering Feedback Signal Disposal
Feedback time Source Transmitt
Quantity er
Display Detection
The frequency inverter has 2 built-in equivalent PID computing units ,the performance parameters can be preset
separately to realize optimum usage of regulating speed and accuracy, the users can use multi-functional terminals
or setting deviation adjustment to freely switch different regulation performance required by different stage.
7.1.16 Wobbulating Function

Factory set
value
0: Relative to Reference frequency
P3.1.03 Wobbulating Reference Mode 0
1: Relative to Highest Frequency
P3.1.04 Wobbulating Range 000.0%~100.0% 000.0
P3.1.05 Kicking Range 00.0%~50.0% 00.0
P3.1.06 Wobbulating Cycle 0000.1s~3000.0s 0010.0
Rise Time of Wobbulating
P3.1.07 000.1%~100.0% 050.0
Triangular Wave
In some occasions, the Wobbulation can improve the control performance of the equipments, e.g. winding
equipments in textile, fiber, etc., the use of the Wobbulating Function can improve the uniform tightness of the
winding of spindle. Through setting Function Code P3.1.03~P3.1.07,it is to realize the reference frequency as
wobbulating performance of the central frequency.
The Function Code P3.1.03 is used to confirm the reference quantity of amplitude. The Function Code P3.1.04 is
used to determine the size of the amplitude The Function Code P3.1.05 is used to confirm the size of mutation
frequency of the wobbulation.
When at P3.1.03=0, the amplitude is variable amplitude system in relative to reference frequency, which will
change along the reference frequency
Amplitude = Reference Frequency ×Amplitude of Wobbulation
Mutation Frequency = Reference Frequency ×Amplitude of Wobbulation ×Sudden Jump of Amplitude
When at P3.1.03=1, the amplitude is fixed amplitude system in relative to reference frequency, which is a fixed
amplitude.
Amplitude = Reference Frequency ×Amplitude of Wobbulation
Mutation Frequency = Reference Frequency ×Amplitude of Wobbulation ×Sudden Jump of Amplitude
Wobbulating Cycle: refer to the time value of a complete wobbulating cycle.

Triangular Wave Rise Time of Wobbulation: refer to the percentage of Triangular Wave Rise Time relative to
wobbulating cycle（P3.1.06）.
177
Triangular Wave Rise Time ＝ Wobbulating Cycle×Triangular Wave Rise Time of Wobbulation, Unit: Second.
Triangular Wave Fall Time ＝ Wobbulating Cycle×(1-Triangular Wave Rise Time of Wobbulation), Unit:
Second.
Refer to the figure below for explanation:
Wobbulating No Wobbulating
Wobbulating Run of
Frequency inverter
Winding motor
Uniform line-speed
rotation
Reciprocating Running
Gear
Pendulum Bar
Motor
Output
Frequency
Mutation
Frequency
Amplitude
Central
Frequency
Amplitude
Mutation
Frequency
Time
Fall Time of
Acceleration Rise Time of Triangular Wav Deceleration Time
Time Triangular Wave
Running Wobbulating Cycle
Command
Note: the output frequency of wobbulation is subject to upper frequency and lower frequency
178
7.1.17 Analog Input/Output Use
1. Analog Input
E Series Frequency inverter support 2-way analog input, which can be voltage signal or can also be current signal.
Voltage
Shift switch J5-1 to U side, which enable to receive the signal at 0V~10V DC.
source
VF1
Current
Shift switch J5-1 to I side, which enable to receive the signal at 0/4mA~20mA.
source
Input
Voltage
Shift switch J5-2 to U side, which enable to receive the signal at 0V~10V DC.
source
VF2
Current
Shift switch J5-2 to I side, which enable to receive the signal at 0/4mA~20mA.
source
When the frequency inverter uses the analog input as frequency source reference, torque reference, PID reference
or feedback, corresponding curve can be chosen for the relationship between the voltage or current value and
reference value or feedback quantity through function code P2.1.02, and the corresponding curve parameters are
set. The sampling value of Terminal VF can be viewed through Function Code P9.0.09 and P9.0.10. Refer to the
figure below for explanation:
Signal Source
Option (Curve 1)
Terminal
Signal 1
Curve Reference
Option quantity /
(Curve 3)
Feedback
quantity
Signal 2
Note: the use of Curve 2 and Curve

4 is similar as above
NOTE: The default value of inverter’s analog input is 0V～10V. If the input is 0mA～20mA, it will remain 0V～
10V; if the input is 4mA～20mA, it will remain 2V～10V.
2. Analog Output
E Series Frequency inverter support 2-way analog output, which can be voltage signal or can also be current
signal.
Voltage source Shift switch J6 to U side, which enable to receive the signal at 0V~10V DC.
FM1
Current source Shift switch J6 to I side, which enable to receive the signal at 0mA~20mA.
Output
Voltage source Shift switch J7 to U side, which enable to receive the signal at 0V~10V DC.
FM2
Current source Shift switch J7 to I side, which enable to receive the signal at 0mA~20mA.
FM1 and FM2 can indicate internal running parameters through output analog mode. The indicated contents of the
parameters can be selected through Function Code P2.0.33 and P2.0.34. The analog output signal can be corrected
through Function Code P2.0.36and P2.0.37 before output, the correction effect is shown in the figure below:
FM Terminal Output
(After Correction)
Parameters to be output
(Before Correction)
Corrected Output Y= aX+b (X means running parameters to be output, a means output gain and b is output
offset) .
179
7.1.18 Digital Input/Output Use
1. Digital Input
CDI-E100 Series Frequency inverter has 6 digital input terminals with No. DI1~DI6, in which DI6 is high speed
input terminal. CDI-E102 Series Frequency inverter has 5 digital input terminals with No. DI2～DI6, in which
DI6 is high speed input terminal. CDI-E180 Series Frequency inverter is configured with 6 digital input terminals
with No.DI1~DI6, in which DI6 is high speed input terminal. Besides, it can externally connect IO Expansion
Card and additional 4 IO Expansion Cards with No.DI7~DI10 can be adopted. VF1 and VF2 can also be set as
digital input through Function Code P2.1.23 and P2.1.24.
The digital input terminal adopts internal power by factory default, which is valid for short circuit to Terminal
COM (indicated as 1) and invalid for disconnection (indicated as 0), it also can make its indicated effect reverse
through setting Function Code P2.1.00 and P2.1.01. When VF is used as digital input, the short circuit of 10V
Power Terminal of the frequency inverter and VF is valid, but invalid for disconnection, and the indicated effect
can also be reversed through Function Code P2.1.25.
Terminal DI1~DI3 can also be used to set the delay effect time through Function Code P2.1.26~P2.1.2 and
available for the occasions that require to delay the signal effect.
Setting for Terminal

Delay Time
Signal Input Signal Action

Time Point Time Point
T is the delayed time

2. Digital Output
CDI-E100 Series Frequency inverter has three multi-functional output terminals, that is, YO, T1 and T2. E102
Series inverter has only one multi-function putput terminal, i.e. T1. CDI-E180 Series Frequency inverter is
configured with three multi-functional output terminals, that is, YO, T1 and T2. Besides, it can externally connect
IO Expansion Card and then additional two IO Expansion Cards can be adopted, that is, YO1 and YO2.
Name of Function Configuration Description for Output

Terminal Code
YO1 P2.0.28 E180 Expansion Transistor; drive capability: 48VDC, 50mA below
Card
T1 Relay P2.0.29 E Series Control Relay: drive capability: 250VAC, 3A below or 30VDC, 3A
Panel below
T2 Relay P2.0.30 E Series Control Relay: drive capability: 250VAC, 3A below or 30VDC, 3A
Panel (E102 below
invalid)
YO2 P2.0.31 E180 Expansion Transistor; drive capability: 48VDC, 50mA below
Card
FMP(YO/FMP) P2.0.35 E Series Control Transistor; able to output high-frequency impulse
(P2.1.20=0) P2.1.21 Panel 0.01kHz~100kHz; drive capability: 24VDC, 50mA below
(E102 invalid)
YO(YO/FMP) P2.0.32 E Series Control Transistor; drive capability: 48VDC, 50mA below
(P2.1.20=1) Panel
(E102 invalid)
Output Terminal YO, T1 and T2 can also be used to set the delay effect time through Function Code
P2.1.29~P2.1.31 and available for the occasions that require to delay the signal effect.
180
Setting for Terminal
Delay Time
Generation Output Time

Time Point of Point of Output
Output Signal Signal
T is the delayed time
7.1.19 Communication of Upper Computer

As the automation control is more widely used, the applications on controlling the running of the frequency
inverter the upper computer through communication mode have been too much, so the use of Network RS485 can
conduct communication with E Series Frequency inverter of Delixi. CDI-E100 Series Frequency inverter has
communication interface terminal on control panel, that is, SG+ and SG-, so the communication can be realized
by connecting the communication line and programming on upper computer. While E180 Series Frequency
inverter hasn’t had communication interface terminal on control panel, so the communication can be realized by
externally connecting the expansion card and programming on upper computer.
E Series Frequency inverter adopts MODBUS-RTU Protocol, which can only be used as slave station, namely, it
can only handle and reply the data from upper computer, but not initiatively send the data. When communicating,
it is required to set the parameters of Function Code P4.1.00~P4.1.05. These parameters need to be set based on
actual conditions, if the setting is improper, it may cause the communication unable to be done or abnormal
communication. When the communication timeout (P4.1.04)is set at non-zero data, the frequency inverter
automatically shuts down after the fault of communication timeout to avoid the frequency inverter from running
without control to lead to adverse consequence when the communication or upper computer breaks down. As for
specific use of Communication Protocol, refer to the Description of Chapter VIII for more details. The figures
below are communication diagram of E100, E102 and E180.
181
Communication Setting
(set based on actual
conditions)
Communication E100 Baud Rate P4.1.00

Protocol Frequency Data format P4.1.01
inverter Local format P4.1.02 Communication
Response delay P4.1.03 Function
Upper Communication Timeout
Computer P4.1.04
Data Transmission Format
P4.1.05
conditions)
Communication Baud Rate P4.1.00

Expansion Card E102 Data format P4.1.01
Protocol for E102 Frequency Local format P4.1.02 Communication
Communication inverter Response delay P4.1.03 Function
Computer P4.1.04
P4.1.05
conditions)
Communication Baud Rate P4.1.00

Expansion Card E180 Data format P4.1.01
Protocol for E180 Frequency Local format P4.1.02 Communication
Communication inverter Response delay P4.1.03 Function
Computer P4.1.04
P4.1.05
7.1.20 Parameter Identification

When the control mode of the frequency inverter is vector control mode (P0.0.02=1 or 2), the accuracy for the
parameters of motor of P0.0.19~P0.0.23 directly effects the control performance of the frequency inverter, if the
frequency inverter has good control performance and running efficiency, the frequency inverter must acquire the
accurate parameters of the controlled motor. If exact parameters of motor have been acquired, the parameters of
motor can be manually input into P0.0.19~P0.0.23, or the Parameter Identification Control Function is required to
be used.
The Parameter Identification Control Modes include Static Identification, Complete Identification, Load
Synchronous Machine Identification and Non-load Synchronous Machine Identification. As for Parameter
Identification Control of the asynchronous motor, it suggests using the Complete Identification Mode at on-load
run. (P0.0.24=2
Parameter Identification Identification

Applicable Occasions
Control Mode Effect
Only applicable for occasions not convenient to separate the motor
Static Identification Worse
and rotating system from asynchronous motor
Only applicable for occasions able to completely separate the
Complete Identification Best
motor and rotating system from asynchronous motor
Load Synchronous Only applicable for occasions not convenient to separate the motor
Not bad
Machine Identification and rotating system from synchronous motor
Non-load Synchronous Only applicable for occasions able to completely separate the
Best
Machine Identification motor and rotating system from synchronous motor
As for the occasions hard to separate the asynchronous motor and rotating system, the motor with same brand
and type can be used, after complete identification, the parameters for properties of the motor are copied to
corresponding parameter of P0.0.19~P0.0.23.
182
Factory set
value
00: No action
Parameter Identification
P0.0.24 11: Synchronous machine on-load identification 00
Control
(Invalid E100)
12: Synchronous machine non-load identification
(Invalid E100)
E100, E102and E180 Series supports all modes.

0: No Action
When the frequency inverter is under normal operating state, the parameter identification is not required to be
done.
1: Static Identification
When the load cannot completely separate from the asynchronous motor, this mode can be adopted. Before
conducting the identification, the parameter value of P0.0.13~P0.0.18 must be set correctly. After completing the
setting and pressing Key RUN, the frequency inverter operates the static identification, the completion of the
identification only can acquire three parameter values of P0.0.19~P0.0.21.
2: Complete Identification
When the load completely separates from the asynchronous motor, this mode can be adopted (if the conditions
allow, please try to adopt this mode, for it has better effect). Before conducting the identification, the parameter
value of P0.0.13~P0.0.18 must be set correctly. After completing the setting and pressing Key RUN, the frequency
inverter operates the complete identification, the completion of the identification only can acquire five parameter
values of P0.0.19~P0.0.23.
11: Load Synchronous Machine Identification

When the load cannot completely separate from the synchronous motor, this mode can be adopted. Before
conducting the identification, the parameter value of P P0.0.13~P0.0.18, P0.1.26, P0.1.27 and P0.1.34 must be set
correctly. After completing the setting and pressing Key RUN, the frequency inverter operates the Load
Synchronous Machine Identification, the completion of the identification can acquire initial position angle of the
synchronous, and the initial position angle is the necessary conditions for normal operation of the synchronous
motor, so the first use of the synchronous motor must conduct identification.
12: Non-load Synchronous Machine Identification

When the load completely separates from the synchronous motor, this mode can be adopted (if the conditions
allow, please try to adopt this mode, for it has better effect), such a mode can acquire accurate parameters of the
motor so as to achieve better running performance of the synchronous motor. Before conducting the identification,
the parameter value of 0.0.13~P0.0.18, P0.1.26, P0.1.27 and P0.1.34 must be set correctly.
Steps for Motor Parameter Identification:
1. If the motor can completely separate from the load, please confirm its state and the motor cannot influence
other related devices when the motor is rotating.
2. After power-on, please confirm that the Parameter P0.0.13~P0.0.18 of the frequency inverter is the same with
corresponding parameter on the nameplate of the motor.
3. Please confirm that when the running control mode of the frequency inverter is at P0.0.03=0, the panel
control is adopted (i.e. only Key RUN on the control panel can identify the running signal).
4. Set Function Code P0.0.24 and select the mode of parameter identification. If the Complete Identification is
selected, the Function Code is at P0.0.24=2, press Key “ ENTER” and then press Key “RUN”, the keyboard
displays “ ”，the indicator of“RUN” lights on and the indicator of “TUNE” keeps flashing. The parameter
identification continues running about 30s~60s, when the display of “ ” disappears, the indicator
of“TUNE” lights off, such a condition means the end of parameter identification, the frequency inverter can
automatically store the identified the characteristic parameters of the motor into corresponding function code.
When CDI-E180 Series Frequency inverter drives the synchronous motor, the feedback signal of the encoder is
required, before identification, the parameters of the encoder must be set correctly. In the process of identifying
the synchronous motor, the rotating action is required, the best identification mode is no-load dynamic
identification, if the conditions don’t allow, and the load dynamic identification can be conducted.
183
7.2 Application Cases
7.2.1 Switching function of dual-pump
Circuit Breaker
Power supply
Motor
CDI-E Series
Start through
inverter
terminal Multi-function relay output T1
Two contactors for motor
switching control
Multi-function relay output T2
Default is reference parameter
for failure indication
Referenced parameter: P2.0.30
General parameters of dual-pump function (when you debug dual-pump function, please input 100 for
function code P5.0.19)
Function Set
Name Description
code value
Option for Running Control 0 Start via Run key on Control Panel (default)
P0.0.03
Mode 1 Start via External Terminal DI1 (P2.0.00=01)
0 End of Single Running and Stop
1 End of Single Running and Save Final Value
P3.0.00 Simple PLC Running mode
2 Continuous Running (default)
3 N cycles
P3.0.01 Cycle number(s), N 0 Switching times of dual-pump cycle when at P3.0.00=3
Option of PLC Power-off
P3.0.02 11 Memory for shutdown and power-off
Memory
The set value is larger than actual deceleration time of the
P3.2.13 Pump Switching Time Point 22.0s
inverter
P3.2.17 Restart Time Point 24.0s The set value is larger than the set value of P3.2.13
P3.0.04 Pump 1 Running time 0 Operation time of pump #1
P3.0.06 Pump 2 Running time 0 Operation time of pump #2
H.010 Determined by keyboard potentiometer (default)
Frequency resource of pump H.020 Determined by keyboard frequency
P3.0.35
#1 H.030 VF1 input
H.040 VF2 input
H.010 Determined by keyboard potentiometer (default)
Frequency resource of pump H.020 Determined by keyboard frequency
P3.0.36
#2 H.030 VF1 input
H.040 VF2 input
0 Second
P3.0.51 Pump Running time Unit 1 Hour
2 Minute
00 No Operation
30 Users Current Parameter Backup
P5.0.19 Factory set values Recovery
60 User Backup Parameters Recovery
100 Factory set values of dual-pump function recovery
Factory set values (used for internal function test and no modification is allowed)
Function code Set value Function code Set value
P0.0.04 7 P3.2.03 00100
P2.0.29 52 P3.2.04 00117
P3.2.00 112 P3.2.07 3914
184
7.2.2 PID control for Water Supply at Permanent Pressure
1. Diagram of wiring connection
Circuit Breaker
Power supply
Motor
Start through terminal CDI-E
Series
inverter
Multi-function relay
Remote output T1
pressure
Default is running signal
gauge
PID
feedback
Dual-line Pump-increasing control
pressure
transmitter
Note: select
one out of
two
Note: if it is the remote pressure gauge, put J5-1 (VF1 DIP switch) to U side, and if it is the pressure transmitter,
put J5-1 to I side.
2. Control Diagram of one-driving-two pump-increasing
Control power
Fuse
Power indication
Terminal for external Mini circuit breaker
connection
Connect to remote
pressure gauge Pump 1# variable frequency
START/STOP
CDI-E series inverter Unlock Interlock

Pump 2# working frequency
Direct START/STOP

Pump-increasing control Operation indication

Interlock START/STOP
Pump 1 Pump 2
185
General parameters of permanent water supply (when user debugs the function of permanent water supply,
please input 101 to function code P5.0.19)
Function code Function name Set value Description
Option for Running Control 0 Start Key Run on Control Panel (default)
P0.0.03
Mode 1 Start the External Terminal DI1（P2.0.00=01）
P0.0.09 Lower frequency 10.00 Set based on actual conditions
P0.0.11 Acceleration Time Machine type Set based on actual conditions
P0.0.12 Deceleration Time Machine type Set based on actual conditions
P4.0.00 PID Reference Source 0 The reference source is given from P4.0.01
The reference value is given by the users based
P4.0.01 PID Value Reference 50.0% on actual needs, which is the percentage
relative to P4.0.04.
P4.0.02 PID Feedback Source 0 The feedback source inputs from Terminal VF1
PID Direct Action. The bigger feedback is, the
0
smaller the frequency is. (default)
P4.0.03 PID Action Direction
PID Reverse Action. The smaller the feedback
1
is, the smaller the frequency is.
Set based on actual feedback range (1000
P4.0.04 PID Given Feedback Range 1000
means 1MPa）
P3.2.24 PID Sleep Threshold Value 90.0% on actual needs, which is the percentage
PID Wake-up Threshold
P3.2.25 10.0% on actual needs, which is the percentage
Value
P3.2.12 Time of Delayed Sleep 5.0 Set based on actual conditions
PID Reference
P9.0.14 Display PID Reference
(Display Value)
PID Feedback
P9.0.15 Display PID Feedback
(Display Value)
00 No Operation
30 Current User Parameters Backup
P5.0.19 Factory set values Recovery 60 User Backup Parameters Recovery
Recovery of Factory set values of Permanent
101
Pressure Water Supply Function
Control Parameters of Pump-increasing
00 Enable pump-increasing function
P2.0.30 Pump-increasing function
54 Disable pump-increasing function
Increased pump will be connected after user
Pump-increasing
P3.2.15 5.0 delay the set value once upper frequency is
Connection Delay Time
reached.
Increased pump will be disconnected after user
Pump-increasing
P3.2.20 5.0 delay the set value once lower frequency is
Disconnection Delay Time
reached.
186
Performance parameters of permanent water supply

Function Set
Name Description
code value
Analog Input Curve
P2.1.02 H.21 Define VF1 Select Curve 1
Selection
Minimum Input of
P2.0.13 00.00V
Curve 1
Corresponding
reference for
P2.0.14 000.0%
Minimum Input of Define the relation curve between VF1 Input and PID Feedback
Curve 1 NOTE: The default value of inverter’s analog input is 0V～
Maximum Input of
P2.0.15 10.00V 10V. If the input is 0 mA～20 mA, it will remain 0V～10V; if
Curve 1 the input is 4 mA～20 mA, it will remain 2V～10V.
Corresponding
reference for
P2.0.16 100.0%
Maximum Input of
Curve 1
When the site analog is easily disturbed, please increase the
filtering time to make the detected analog tend to be stable, but the
P2.0.17 VF1 Filtering time 00.10s
longer the filtering time is, the response speed to the analog test
gets slow as the filtering time become longer.
The greater the value of proportional gain KPI is, the larger the
adjustment volume is and the faster the response is, but the too
Proportional Gains
P4.0.05 020.0 large value can generate the system oscillation, the smaller the
KP1
value of KPI is, the more stable the system is and the slower the
response is.
The greater the value of Integral Time TI1 is, the slower the
response is and the more stable the output is, the worse the
fluctuation control ability of the feedback quantity is, the smaller
P4.0.06 Integral Time TI1 02.00
the value of TI1 is, the faster the response is and the greater the
output fluctuation is, the too small value can generate the
oscillation.
The Derivative Time TD1 can set the limit for gain provided by
the derivator to ensure that a pure derivative gain can be obtained
P4.0.07 Derivative Time TD1 00.000 at low frequency and a constant derivative gain can be obtained at
high frequency. The longer the derivative time is, the greater the
adjusting strength is.
Generally, no setup is required for the optimized parameters of permanent water supply. If any, please
refer to the description of related function code.
Function
Name Set value Description
code
P4.0.08 PID Deviation Limit 000.0
P4.0.09 PID Feedback Filtering time 00.00
P4.0.10 Proportional Gains KP2 020.0
P4.0.11 Integral Time TI2 02.00
P4.0.12 Derivative Time TD2 00.000
P4.0.13 PID Switch Conditions 0
Refer to the description
P4.0.14 PID Switch Deviation 1 020.0
of related function code
P4.0.15 PID Switch Deviation 2 080.0
P4.0.16 PID Initial Value 000.0
P4.0.17 PID Initial Value Hold Time 000.00
P4.0.18 PID Feedback Loss Test 000.0
P4.0.19 PID Feedback Loss Test Time 00.0
P4.0.20 PID Stop Operation 0
187
Monitoring contents under non-operation status:

Press ＞＞
Bus line PID given
voltage value
Press ＞＞
Press ＞＞
PID feedback
Monitoring contents under operation status:
Press ＞＞ Press ＞＞
Running Output Bus line
frequency current voltage
Press ＞＞
PID feedback PID given
value
P0.0.04 8 P3.2.28 04004
P3.2.00 11111 P3.2.29 3224
P3.2.02 780 P3.2.30 1000
P3.2.03 790 P3.2.31 9015
P3.2.04 11106 P3.2.32 9046
P3.2.05 38376 P3.2.34 4004
P3.2.06 1132 P3.2.35 3225
P3.2.09 14 P3.2.36 1000
P3.2.26 H.7353 P3.2.37 9048
P3.2.27 H.0505 P3.2.38 9015
P5.0.05 H.0C02 P5.0.02 H.C015
188
7.2.3 Ball mill

Circuit Breaker
Power supply
CDI-E
Series Motor
inverter
Start through Multi-function relay output T1
terminal
Default is running signal
Default is reference parameter

for failure indication
General parameters of ball mill (when you debug ball mill, please input 102 for function code P5.0.19)
Function Name Given scope Factory set
code value
0: Basic Mode (Prefix with ‘P’)
P0.0.01 Type of Inverter 1: User Mode (Prefix with ‘U’) 1
2: Verification Mode（Prefix with ‘C’）
0: V/F Control
1: Open-loop Vector Control (SVC)
2: Closed-loop Vector Control (Invalid
P0.0.02 Display Mode 0
E100、E102)
3: Intelligent selection 0 or 1 (this function
is unavailable when unable to be set as 3)
0: Keyboard Control
Option for Running Control
P0.0.03 1: Terminal Control 0
Mode
P0.0.11 Acceleration Time 0000.0～6500.0s Machine type
P0.0.12 Deceleration Time 0000.0～6500.0s Machine type
P0.1.16 Deceleration Timing 0000.0～6500.0s Machine type
1: End of Single Running and Save Final
P3.0.00 Cycle Running Mode Value 2
3: Cycle N Times
P3.0.01 Cycle number (s), N 00000～65000 00000
Memory for shutdown and power-off
0: No memory (not saved)
Option of PLC Power-off
P3.0.02 1: Memory (saved) 00
Memory
Tens: Option of Shutdown
0: No memory (not saved)
1: Memory (saved)
189
Function code Name Given scope Factory set

value
P3.0.04 Phase 0 Running time 0000.0～6500.0 min. 100.0
P3.0.06 Phase 1 Running time 0000.0～6500.0 min. 100.0
H.010: default direction
P3.0.35 Phase 0 Running direction H.010
H.110: reversed direction
H.010: default direction
P3.0.36 Phase 1 Running direction H.010
H.110: reversed direction
0: Second
P3.0.51 Running Time Unit 1: Minute 2
2: Hour
4200: not timed
P3.2.11 Control of timed running 4200
4239: timed
P3.2.17 Waiting Interval Time 0.0～3600.0 sec. 0000
P3.2.24 Total running time 0.0～3600.0 min. 1000.0
Customized Display of 0.0001～6.5000
P5.0.15 0.288
Coefficient
00: No Operation
30: Current User Parameters Backup
P5.0.19 Factory set values Recovery 60: User Backup Parameters Recovery 00
102: Recovery of Factory set values of
Ball Mill
Notes：1. The system can be stopped automatally either through cycle numbers or through timing
2. Only the above parameters will be displayed and other parameters will be hided when you switch to
user mode (P0.0.01=1).
3. If the running direction of Phase 0 and Phase 1 is same, which means single direction running; if the
running direction of Phase 0 and Phase 1 is opposite, which means alternative direction running
4. If vector control, please refer to User Manual (default is V/F control) of motor parameters setting and
parameters idendification.
Illustration of system running

Running direction of Phase 0 and Phase 1 is same.
One complete cycle

Running time Interval of Running time Interval of
of Phase 0 waiting time of Phase 1 waiting time
Total running time
If the running is not timed, the system will run one cycle after one cycle untile a stop instruction is received. If the
running is timed, the system will stop automatically once the total running time is reached.
190
Running direction of Phase 0 and Phase 1 is opposite.
One complete cycle
Running time Interval of Interval of
of Phase 0 waiting time waiting time
Running time
of Phase 1
Total running time
If the running is not timed, the system will run one cycle after one cycle untile a stop instruction is received. If the
running is timed, the system will stop automatically once the total running time is reached.
Method of rotating speed indicating
If you want to display rotating speed, you can calculate the customized display consitent according to the
following formula and set the calculation result in P5.0.15. And then press >>, once V, A, Hz on the keyboard
panel are black out, the figure displayed is rotating speed.
Customized display consitent = Rated rotating speed / (rated frequency*100)/ speed ratio
For example: the rated rotating speed of motor is 1444 rpm, rated frequency is 50.00Hz and the speed ratio of
machine is 2, so Customized display consitent =1440/（50.00*100）/ 2 = 0.144
Monitoring contents under shutdown status
Press ＞＞
Set frequency Bus line voltage
Press ＞＞
Press ＞＞
Set rotating speed
Monitoring contents under running status:
Running Press ＞＞ Set Press ＞＞

frequency frequency Output current
Press ＞＞
Rotating speed of Press ＞＞
Bus line voltage Output voltage
running
Function code Set value Function code Set value Function code Set value
P0.0.04 7 P3.2.09 0048 P3.2.04 21113
P3.2.00 21112 P3.2.05 121 P5.0.05 H.0203
P3.2.07 3914 P3.2.10 0050 P5.0.02 H.081F
P3.2.03 00100 P3.2.23 10001
P3.2.18 1.0 P3.0.51 2
191
7.2.4 Injection Molding Machine
DC reactor
Braking resistor
Circuit Breaker Braking unit
Power Motor
supply
CDI-E 180
Series inverter
Forward running
Upper frequency1
Upper frequency2 Multi-function relay output T1
Upper frequency3 Default is running signal

Upper frequency4
Public terminal

Pressure signal
Default is reference parameter for
failure indication
Flow signal
Note: if analog input is 0～10V, then voltage signal will switch J5-1 & J5-2 (VF1, VF2 DIP switch) to U side; if
analog input is 4～20mA, then voltage signal will switch J5-1 & J5-2 to I side; if analog input is 0～1A current
signal, you should increase an E180-ZS expansion card to convert current signal into 0～10V voltage signal.
Please see Appendix 6 for the use instruction of E180-ZS expansion card.
Wiring connection of main circuit of variable frequency (VF) energy-saving reconstruction of Injection
Molding Machine
As for Injection Molding Machine with direct START/STOP oil pump motor, the wiring connection is as
follows:
Circuit breaker Inverter Electromagneti Oil pump motor
c switch
When make reconstruction, connect the power cable from the back of circuit breaker to in-line terminal of inverter,
and connect in-line terminal of electromagnetic switch to out-line terminal of inverter.
192
As for Injection Molding Machine with oil pump motor via reduced-voltage START, the wiring connection
is as follows:
Start device with Oil pump motor

Circuit breaker Inverter
reduced-voltage
When make reconstruction, connect the power cable from the front of bus line of START device with
reduced-voltage or back of circuit breaker to in-line terminal of inverter, and connect out-line terminal of inverter
to in-line terminal of main circuit of START device with reduced-voltage.
General parameters of Injection Molding Machine (when you debug Injection Molding Machine, please
input 103 for function code P5.0.19)
Function
Name Set value Description
code
0 VF1 (default)
1 VF2
P0.1.00 Option of Frequency Source
2 VF1+ VF2
4 MAX[VF1, VF2]
The lowest running frequency is allowed by
P0.0.09 Lower frequency 10.00Hz
inverter
P0.0.11 Acceleration Time Machine type
P0.0.12 Deceleration Time Machine type
P2.1.04 Min. Input of VF1 00.00V Corresponding
Corresponding reference for Min. given value
P2.1.05 000.0%
Input of VF1
P2.1.10 Max. Input of VF1 10.00V
Corresponding reference for Max.
P2.1.11 100.0%
Input of VF1
VF input
P2.1.12 Min. Input of VF2 00.00V
Corresponding reference for Min.
P2.1.13 000.0%
Input of VF2
Relation curve of VF input and corresponding
P2.1.18 Max. Input of VF2 10.00V reference. The corresponding reference means
Corresponding reference for Max. percentage of the highest frequency.
P2.1.19 100.0%
Input of VF2
P6.1.06 Fault Auto Reset Number 00 No automatic fault reset
Waiting Interval Time of Fault Refer to the waiting time of automatic fault
P6.1.07 001.0s
Auto Reset reset after the inverter gives an alarm of fault.
Limitless Fault Auto Reset 0200 Invalid
P3.2.08
0213 Valid
Waiting Interval Time of Limitless
Refer to the waiting time of automatic fault
P3.2.13 Fault Auto Reset 001.0s
reset after the inverter gives an alarm of fault.
00 No Operation
30 Current User Parameters Backup
P5.0.19 Factory set values Recovery 60 User Backup Parameters Recovery
Recovery of Factory set values of Injection
103
Molding Machine
193
Performance Parameters of Injection Molding Machine

P2.1.06 VF1 Inflection Point 1 Input 03.00V Corresponding
Corresponding reference for given value
P2.1.07 030.0%
VF1 Inflection Point 1 Input
P2.1.08 VF1 Inflection Point 2 Input 06.00V
P2.1.09 060.0%
VF input
P2.1.14 VF2 Inflection Point 1 Input 03.00V
P2.1.15 030.0%
P2.1.16 VF2 Inflection Point 2 Input 06.00V Relation curve of VF input and corresponding
Corresponding reference for reference. The corresponding reference means
P2.1.17 060.0% percentage of the highest frequency.
Upper frequency when DI5, DI4, DI3, DI2 are
P3.0.03 Phase directive 0 100.0%
disconnected (percentage of the highest frequency)
P3.0.05 Phase directive 1 090.0% Upper frequency only when DI2 is connected (ditto)
when the on-site analog is easily to be disturbed, the
P2.0.17 VF1 Filtering time 0.10s sec. filtering time shall be increased to make the tested
analog input to be stable, but the greater filtering time
P2.0.22 VF2 Filtering time 0.10 sec. makes the response speed of the analog test become
slow.
P0.0.03 1 P2.0.02 10
P0.0.04 3 P2.0.03 11
P0.1.01 4 P2.0.04 12
P0.0.07 50.00Hz P2.1.02 H.43
P0.0.10 0 P3.2.00 00022
P0.1.03 3 P3.2.07 3714
P2.0.00 01 P2.0.01 9
194
7.2.5 Local/ Remote Control
Circuit
breaker
Motor
CDI-E
series
inverter
Running signal
Failure indication
Notes: 1. VF1 is local analog input

2. VF2 is remote analog input
3. DI1 is local button of START/ STOP（START is connected while STOP is disconnected）
4. DI2 is remote button of START/ STOP（START is connected while STOP is disconnected）
5. DI3 is switch button of LOCAL/ REMOTE (REMOTE is connected while LOCAL is
disconnected)
General parameters for local/ remote control (when you debug local/ remote control, please input 104 for
function code P5.0.19)
Function code Description

Running command control method:
P0.0.03=1 and P3.2.07=0021: keyboard control of local and terminal DI2 control for remote
(default)
P0.0.03=1 and P3.2.07=0000: Terminal DI1 control for local and terminal DI2 control for
P0.0.03 remote
P0.0.03=2 and P3.2.07=0021: keyboard control of local and communication control for remote
P0.0.03=2 and P3.2.07=0022: Terminal DI1 control for local and communication control for
remote
P0.0.04 Local frequency resource method selection 0～13, 02: Keyboard potentiometer (default)
P0.1.01 Remote frequency resource method selection l0～13, 04: VF2 (default)
P5.0.19 60: User Backup Parameters Recovery
104: Factory set values of Local/ Remote function recovery
Function code Set value Function code Set value Function code Set value
P0.0.03 1 P2.0.01 00 P3.2.03 00102
P0.1.00 8 P2.0.02 18 P3.2.04 01022
P0.1.01 4 P3.2.00 1111 P3.2.05 11123
P2.0.00 0 P3.2.02 00021 P3.2.10 01
195
Chapter 8 E Series Frequency Inverter RS-485 Communication

1 Explanation for E Series Frequency inverter RS-485 Communication Terminal
CDI-E100，E102 Series Frequency inverter have had RS-485 Communication Terminal on control panel.
SG+:485 Signal Positive
SG-:485 Signal Negative
CDIE180 Series Frequency inverter hasn’t had RS-485 Communication Terminal on control panel. If the
communication is required, the external expansion card must be connected.
2 Explanation for E Series Frequency inverter Communication Parameter
Before the use of RS-485 Communication, must use the keyboard to set “Baud Rate”, “Data Format” and
“Communication Address”.
Ones unit:：0：1200
1：2400
2：4800
P4.1.00 Baud Rate 3：9600 3
4：19200
5：38400
6：57600
0:No Verification (8-N-2)
1:Even Parity Verification (8-E-1)
P4.1.01 Data Format 0
2:Odd Parity Verification (8-O-1)
3:No Verification (8-N-1)
000:Broadcast Address
P4.1.02 Local Machine Address 1
001~249
P4.1.03 Response Delay 00~20ms 2
00.0 (Invalid)
P4.1.04 Communication Timeout 0.0
00.1s~60.0s
0:ASCII Mode (Reservation)
P4.1.05 Data Transmission Format 1
1:RTU Mode
P4.1.06 MODBUS communication data 0: Reply 1: No reply 0
reply or not
P4.1.07 Troubleshooting of 0: Bypassed

1: Shutdown
communication error 0
2: Communication fault
Response Delay: when the frequency inverter receives the data and after the time set by Function Code P4.1.03 is
delayed, the frequency inverter starts recovering the data.
Communication Timeout: the interval between data frames received by the frequency inverter is over the time set
by Function Code P4.1.04, the frequency inverter gives an alarm of Fault Err14, it is deemed as abnormal
communication. If it is set at 0.0, the communication timeout is invalid.
196
3 Description for Standard MODBUS Communication Format
3.1 String Structure

(8-N-2, P4.1.01=0)
Start Bit Data Bit Stop Bit Stop Bit
(8-E-1, P4.1.01=1)
Start Bit Data Bit Even Parity Stop Bit

Verification
(8-O-1, P4.1.01=2)
Start Bit Data Bit Odd Parity Stop Bit

Verification
(8-N-1, P4.1.01=3)
Start Bit Data Bit Stop Bit
197
3.2 Communication Data Structure
Slave Machine (Frequency inverter) Address

The address scope of the frequency inverter is (001~249), ( 8-digit hexadecimal number)
ADR
Note: When the address is ADR=000H, it is valid for all slave machines and all slave machines
can’t respond message (broadcast mode)
Function Code of Data Package (06: write the contents of a register; 03: read out the contents of
CMD
one or more than one register(s)) (8-digit hexadecimal number)
Sending of Host Machine: when at Function Code 06, it means data address (16-digit
hexadecimal number); when at Function Code 03, it means data initial address (16-digit
ADRESS hexadecimal number)
Slave Station Responds: refer to data address when at function code 06 (16-digit hexadecimal
number); refer to data number when at function code 03
Sending of Host Machine: when at Function Code 06, it means data address (16-digit
hexadecimal number)
DATA
Slave Station Responds: when at Function Code 06, it means data address (16-digit
hexadecimal number in N)
CRC CHK (CHECKSUM) (16-digit hexadecimal number)
RTU adopts CRC CHK (CHECKSUM), which is calculated as per the following steps:
Step 1: Load 16-digit register with content of FFFFH (CRC Register).
Step 2: Conduct XOR operation for the first byte of the communication data and the contents of CRC Register and
store the results into CRC Register.
Step 3: Move 1bit of the contents of CRC Register to the minimum significant bit and fill in 0 to the maximum
significant bit, and check the minimum significant bit of CRC Register.
Step 4: If the minimum significant bit is 1, the CRC Register and preset value conduct XOR operation. If the
minimum significant bit is 0, no action is taken.
Step 5: After repeat 8 times of Step 3 and 4, the handling to this byte is finished.
Step 6: Repeat Step 2-5 for next byte of the communication data until the handling to all bytes are completed, the
final content of CRC Register is the value of CRC. When transmitting CRC Value, first add the low byte and then
high byte, that is, the low byte is first transmitted.
198
In case of any fault of the communication, the slave machine responds the data of ADRESS and DATA are as
below:
ADRESS DATA Description ADRESS DATA Description
FF01 0001 Invalid address FF01 0005 Invalid parameter
Invalid
FF01 0002 CRC Check Error FF01 0006 Modification to
Parameter
Read and Write
FF01 0003 FF01 0007 System Lock
Command Error
Parameter under
FF01 0004 Password Error FF01 0008
Storage
The master station writes the command string format:
Name of Slave Station Write Command Function Code Data content CRC Check
Character 06H Address
Length of 1Byte 1Byte 2Byte 2Byte 2Byte
Character
Example 01H 06 H 0005 H 1388H 949DH
The slave station responds the command string format:
Name of Slave Station Write Command Function Code Data content CRC Check
Character 06H Address
Character
Example 01H 06 H 0005 H 1388H 949DH
The master station reads the command string format:
Name of Slave Station Read Command Initial Address of Data content CRC Check
Character 03H Function Code
Character
Example 01H 03 H 9000 H 0003H 28CBH
The slave station responds the read command string format:

Name of Slave Read Data content Data Data content CRC Check
Character Station Command 03H 1 content 2 3
Length of 1Byte 1Byte 2Byte 2Byte 2Byte 2Byte
Character
Example 01H 03 H 0000H 0000H 0000H 2175H
The slave station responds the write command error string format:
Name of Slave Station Write Command Read and Write Read and Write CRC Check
Character 06H Error Mark Error Type
Character
Example 01H 03 H FF01 H 0005H 281DH
199
The slave station responds the read command error string format:
Name of Slave Station Read Command Read and Write Read and Write CRC Check
Character 03H Error Mark Error Type
Character
Example 01H 03 H FF01H 0005H E41DH
4 Definition for Parameter Address of Communication Protocol
E Series Frequency inverter not only has many multifunctional function code parameters, but some non-
multifunctional function code parameters. Specific read and write properties are as below:
P1~P8 Readable, writable

Function Code Parameter
P9 Only Readable
A000H, A001H, A002H, A003H, A004H, A005H,
Non-function Code Only writable
A010H, A011H
Parameter
B000H, B001H Only Readable
Explanation for Read and Write Address of Function Code Parameters:
High-order parameter address is composed of groups and levels by the function code parameters.
For the service life of EEPROM is limited, the EEPROM cannot be stored frequently in the process of
communication. Therefore, some function codes don’t need to be stored in EEPROM in the process of
communication, but only need to modify the value in RAM.
If it is required to write them into EEPROM, the high-order parameter address adopts the hexadecimal number
and low parameter address adopts decimal number that then is converted to the hexadecimal number. And then the
high-order and low-order parameter address constitutes a four-digit hexadecimal number.
E.g. The address of writing P2.1.12 to EEPROM is as below:

High-order address is 21 by hexadecimal system and lower-order address is 12 by decimal system, which is 0C
after conversion into hexadecimal system, so the address indicates 0x210C.
If it is not required to write it into EEPROM, the high-order parameter address adopts hexadecimal number and
adds 4 digits, and low-order parameter address adopts decimal number then is converted to the hexadecimal
number. And then the high-order and low-order parameter address constitutes a four-digit hexadecimal number.
E.g. The address of not writing P2.1.12 to EEPROM is as below:

High-order address is 21 by hexadecimal system and then adds 4 digits, that is, 25. The lower-order address is 12
by decimal system, which is 0C after conversion into hexadecimal system, so the address indicates 0x250C.
200
Table of Definitions for Non-functional Function Code Parameter Address

Function Parameter
Definition Description for Function
Code Address
0001H Forward Run
0002H Reverse Run
0003H Forward Jogging
A000H 0004H Reverse Jogging
0005H Free Stop
0006H Shutdown By Speed Reduction
0007H Fault Rest
Frequency Command or Upper Frequency Source (refer to the
A001H percentage of the highest frequency without storage)
(00.00~100.00 indicates 00.00%~100.00%)
Multi-functional Output Terminal YO1
BIT0 (valid only when E180 adds I/O expansion card,
E100 is invalid)
Multi-functional Output Terminal YO2
BIT1 (valid only when E180 adds I/O expansion card,
Command to E100 is invalid)
Frequency 06H BIT2 Multi-functional Output Terminal T1
inverter A002H
BIT3 Multi-functional Output Terminal T2
Multi-functional Output Terminal YO (when
BIT4 Terminal YO/FMP is used as YO, that is,
P2.1.20=1)
If it is required to make multi-functional output terminal valid,
set corresponding position to 1, after transfer binary system to
hexadecimal system, send it to address A002.
FM1 Output Address
A003H
(00.0~100.0 indicates 00.0%~100.0%)
FM2 Output Address
A004H
(00.0~100.0 indicates 00.0%~100.0%)
FMP Output Address (when Terminal YO/FMP is used as FMP,
A005H that is, P2.1.20=0)
(0000H~7FFFH indicates 0.00%~100.00%)
A010H PID Reference Value
AO11H PID Feedback Value
Running status 0001H Forward Run
of monitoring 0002H Reverse Run
03H B000H
frequency
0003H Stop
inverter
201
Table of Definitions for Non-functional Function Code Parameter Address
Parameter
Definition Function Code Description for Function
Address
00 No fault
01 Over-current at constant speed
02 Over-current at acceleration
03 Over-current at deceleration
04 Over-voltage at constant speed
05 Over-voltage at acceleration
06 Over-voltage at deceleration
07 Module Fault
08 Undervoltage
09 Frequency inverter Overload
10 Motor Overload
11 Input Default Phase
12 Output Default Phase
13 External Fault
14 Abnormal Communication
15 Frequency inverter Overheat
16 Hardware Fault of Frequency inverter
Motor Earthing Short Circuit
17
Motor
Monitoring to
18 Motor Identification Error
Fault of
03H B001H 19 Motor Off-load
Frequency
20 PID Feedback Loss
inverter
23 Accumulative Power-on Time Reached
24 Accumulative Running Time Reached
25 Encoder Fault
26 Parameter Read-Write Abnormity
27 Motor Overheat
28 Larger Speed Deviation
29 Motor Overspeed
30 Initial Position Error
31 Current Test Fault
32 Contactor
33 Abnormity of Current Test
34 Fast Current-limiting Timeout
35 Motor Switch at Running
36 24V Power Fault
37 Driving Power Supply Fault
38 Output short circuit
40 Buffer Resistance
202
5 Example
E.g. 1. Forward Start No.1 Frequency inverter
The host machine sends data package The slave machine responds the data package
ADR 01H ADR 01H

CMD 06H CMD 06H
ADRESS A0H ADRESS A0H
00H 00H
DATA 00H DATA 00H
01H 01H
CRC 6AH CRC 6AH
0AH 0AH
E.g. 2. Reference No.1 Frequency inverter Frequency (Not store)
The frequency value of Reference 1# Frequency inverter is the highest frequency 100.00%.
Methods are as below: after removal of the decimal point of 100.00, it is 10000D=2710H.
The host machine sends data package Respond the data package
ADR 01H ADR 01H

CMD 06H CMD 06H
ADRESS A0H ADRESS A0H
01H 01H
DATA 27H DATA 27H
10H 10H
CRC E0H CRC E0H
36H 36H
E.g. 3. Inquire the running frequency of No.1 Frequency inverter Frequency
In running state, inquire the “Output Frequency” of the Frequency inverter 1#
Methods are as below: the Function Code Parameter No. of the output frequency is P9.0.00, after conversion into
address, it is 9000H.
If the “Output Frequency” of the Frequency inverter 1# is 50.00Hz, it is 5000D=1388H
The host machine sends data package The slave machine responds the data package
ADR 01H ADR 01H

CMD 03H CMD 03H
ADRESS 90H ADRESS 02H
00H DATA 13H
DATA 00H 88H
01H CRC B5H
CRC A9H 12H
0AH
203
Chapter 9 Fault Handling

9.1 Frequency inverter Fault and Exclusion Measure
Fault display Description Details Fault elimination
Err00 No Fault
 Check whether the output circuit of the
frequency inverter has short circuit;
 Check whether the input voltage is
relatively low;
The output current exceeds the
Over-current  Check whether the load has mutation;
over-current value while the
Err01 at constant  Conduct parameter identification or
frequency inverter is running at a
speed improve low frequency torque
constant speed
compensation;
 Check whether the rated power of the
motor or frequency inverter is large
enough;
 Check whether the motor is and its lines
are short circuit, grounded or too long;
 Check whether the input voltage is
relatively low;
 Delay the acceleration time
 Conduct parameter identification or
When the frequency inverter improve low frequency torque
Over-current
Err02 accelerates, output current compensation or adjust V/F Curve;
at acceleration
exceeds overcurrent  Check whether the load has mutation;
 Check whether it is to select speed
tracking or start after the motor stops
stably;
 Check whether the rated power of the
motor or frequency inverter is large
enough;
 Check whether the motor is and its lines
are short circuit, grounded or too long;
 Conduct parameter identification
Over-current When the frequency inverter  Delay the deceleration time;
Err03 at decelerates, output current  Check whether the input voltage is
deceleration exceeds overcurrent relatively low;
 Check whether the load has mutation;
 Install additional brake unit and brake
resistance;
When the frequency inverter runs
at constant speed, DC voltage of  Check whether the input voltage is too
the main circuit exceeds this set high;
Over-voltage
value.  Check whether the Bus line voltage
Err04 at constant
Detected DC overvoltage value: display is normal;
speed
Level S2/T2 : 400V Check whether the motor is dragged to run by
Level T4: 800V external force in the running process;
Level T6: 1350V
204

 Check whether the input voltage is too
high;
 Check whether the Bus line voltage
When the frequency inverter runs at
display is normal;
constant speed, DC voltage of the main
Over-voltage  Delay the deceleration time;
Err05 circuit exceeds this set value. The tested
at acceleration  Check whether the motor is dragged to
overvoltage value is the same as above.
run by external force in the process of
deceleration;
resistance;
 Check whether the input voltage is too
high;
 Check whether the Bus line voltage
When the frequency inverter runs at display is normal;
Over-voltage constant speed, DC voltage of the main  Delay the deceleration time;
Err06
at deceleration circuit exceeds this set value. The tested  Check whether the motor is dragged to
overvoltage value is the same as above. run by external force in the process of
deceleration;
resistance;
 Check the coil resistance of the motor;
External fault has triggered automatic  Check the isolation of the motor;
Err07 Module fault
module protection  Damage by inverse module
breakdown;
 Check the lines of supply power
contact well;
Under-voltage in the main circuit, check  Check whether the incoming voltage is
the electric level: within regulated scope;
 Check whether there is momentary
Err08 Under-voltage Test DC undervoltage value: interruption;
Level S2/T2 :200V  Check whether the display of the Bus
Level T4: 350V line voltage is normal;
Level T6: 650V  Check whether the setting bridge and
charge resistance are normal;
 Check whether the motor is in

locked-rotor conditions or the load to motor
Frequency
Err09 Motor and current exceed the rated load needs to be reduced;
inverter
 Replace the frequency inverter with
overloaded
larger power;
 Check the protection parameter
P1.0.25 Reference of the motor is proper;
 Check whether the motor is in
locked-rotor conditions or the load to motor
Motor Motor and current exceed the rated
Err10 needs to be reduced;
overload current
 Correctly preset the rated current of
the motor;
 Replace the frequency inverter with
larger power;
 Check main circuit voltage whether it
is missing phase or unbalanced three phases
Error of missing phase or unbalanced
Err11 Missing phase  Check whether the connecting terminal
three phases
is loosing.
 Seek technical support
205
Fault
Description Details Fault elimination
display
 Check whether the output circuit has output

Output Default Output Default Failure or default failure or 3-phase imbalance fault
Err12
Failure 3-phase Imbalance Fault  Check whether the wiring terminals are loose
 Seek technical support
Fault caused by External  Check the signal input circuit of external fault
Err13 External Fault
Control Circuits  Reset Run
 Check external communication lines
Abnormity for
 The upper computer doesn’t work normally
Abnormal communication of
Err14  The setting for communication parameter is not
Communication frequency inverter and other
correct
equipments
 The communication protocol is inconsistent
 Check the running state of the fan and ventilation
state
 Check whether the surrounding temperature is
Frequency Radiator temperature ≥ oh too high and the cooling measures are required to
Err15 inverter Test Value (about 80℃,to be taken;
Overheat temperature switch)  Check whether the thermistor or temperature
switch is damaged;
 Clear the dirt on the exterior of radiator and air
intake;
In case of overcurrent or
Hardware Fault
overvoltage existed in
Err16 of Frequency  Handle as overcurrent and overvoltage fault
frequency inverter, it is
inverter
judged as hardware fault
Motor-to-groun Motor-to-ground short  Check whether the output line or motor of the
Err17
d short circuit circuit frequency inverter has ground short circuit
 Check whether the motor parameter is consistent
Motor When conducting the
with the nameplate of the motor
Err18 Identification parameter identification, the
 Whether the frequency inverter and main cable
Error fault occurs in motor
of the motor are connected well;
Refer to the value of running
 Check whether the load separates;
current less than off-load
Err19 Motor Off-load  Check whether the value set by Parameter
current P6.1.19 and duration
P6.1.19 and P6.1.20
of P6.1.20
Refer to the value of PID  Check whether PID Feedback Signal is normal
PID Feedback feedback value less than  Check whether the value set by Parameter
Err20
Loss value of P4.0.18 and P4.0.18 and P4.0.19 meets actual running
duration of P4.0.19 conditions;
206
Fault
Description Details Fault elimination
display
Fault 1 Signal given by the users
User-Defined through multi-functional  Check whether the User-Defined Fault
Err21
Fault 1 terminals or PLC Programming 1 is removed and then run after reset；
Function
Fault 2 Signal given by the users
User-Defined through multi-functional  Check whether the User-Defined Fault
Err22
Fault 2 terminals or PLC Programming 2 is removed and then run after reset；
Function
Refer to the time given by
Accumulative
accumulative power-on Time  Use the parameter initialization function
Err23 Power-on Time
Reached P5.1.01 of the to clear the record information
Reached
frequency inverter
Refer to the time given by
Accumulative
accumulative power-on Time  Use the parameter initialization function
Err24 Running Time
Reached P5.1.00 of the to clear the record information
Reached
frequency inverter
 Check whether the type of the encoder
matches
The frequency inverter is unable  Check whether the wiring connection of
Err25 Encoder Fault
to identify the data of the encoder the encoder is correct
 Check whether the encoder or PG card
is damaged;
Parameter
Err26 Read-Write Damage of EEPROM Chip  Change main control panel
Abnormity
 Check whether the temperature of the
Test on excessive temperature of motor is too high;
Err27 Motor Overheat
the motor  Check whether the temperature sensor
is damaged or its wirings are loose;
 Check whether the parameters of the
encoder is set correctly;
Refer to the value of speed
Larger Speed  Check whether P6.123 and P6.124 are
Err28 deviation larger than P6.1.23 and
Deviation set rationally;
duration of P6.1.24
 Check whether the motor parameter
identification has been conducted;
 Check whether the parameters of the
encoder is set correctly;
Refer to the value of motor speed
Motor  Check whether P6.121 and P6.122 are
Err29 over P6.1.21 and duration of
Overspeed set rationally;
P6.1.22
 Check whether the motor parameter
identification has been conducted;
 Check whether the motor parameters
Initial Position Large deviation between motor
Err30 are correct, especially for rated current
Error parameters and actual parameters
of the motor;
207

 Check whether the Hall device has
defaults;
Current Test  Check whether the circuit has fault after
Err31 Circuit fault after current test
Fault test of the driver board;
 Check whether the driver board has
fault;
 Check whether the contactor is normal;
Abnormal power supply of
Err32 Contactor  Check whether the power supply of the
driver board caused by the fault
driver board is normal;
of the contactor
 Check whether the Hall device has
defaults;
Circuit fault after current test
Abnormity of  Check whether the circuit has fault after
Err33 leads to abnormal current test
Current Test test of the driver board;
value
 Check whether the driver board has
fault;
The running current of the  Check whether the load is too large or is
Fast
frequency inverter continues to stalled;
Err34 Current-limiti
be larger, which exceeds  Check whether the size of the frequency
ng Timeout
allowable current–limit time inverter is too small;
Conduct motor switch in the  Conduct the switch operation of the
Motor Switch
Err35 running process of the motor after shutdown of the frequency
at Running
frequency inverter inverter;
External 24V power supply is  Check whether external 24V power
short circuit or the load of supply is short circuit;
Err36 Power Fault
External 24V power supply is  Reduce the load of external 24V power
too large supply;
Driving Driving Power Supply Fault for  Check whether driving power supply in
Err37 Power Supply
Model G250T4 and above driver board is normal;
Fault
Output short 3-phase output inter-phase short  Check insulation of motor wire and mot
Err38
circuit circuit or
 Check whether the contactor is normal;
Buffer The Bus line voltage fluctuates
Err40  Check the fluctuations of incoming
Resistance strongly
voltage;
208
9.2 Motor Fault and Exclusion Measure
If any of the faults below occurs to your motor, find out the causes and take corresponding corrective measures. If
the fault persists, please contact your DELIXI distributor immediately.
Motor Fault and Its Elimination:
Fault Tips for checking Corrective measures

Switch on the power supply;
switch it off and on again; check
Has the power voltage been delivered to the
power voltage; make sure the
terminals R, S and T?
terminal bots have been
tightened
Measure the voltages of terminals U, V and W with Cut off power supply and switch
a rectifier-type voltmeter. Are they right? it on again
The motor does not
Has the motor been locked due to overload? Reduce load and lift the lock
rotate.
Is there any fault information displayed on the Check the fault according to the
monitor of the operator? table of faults
Has the instruction for forward or reverse rotation
Check the wiring
been fed in?
Change the wiring, check the
Has the frequency-setting signal been fed in?
frequency-setting voltage
Has the running mode been set up correctly? Put in the correct setup
The motor rotates in Wire them to the lead wires U, V
opposite direction and W of the motor in
Is the wiring of terminals U, V and W correct?
accordance with the phase
sequence
Is the input signal connection right for the
Change the wiring
forward/backward rotation?
Is the wiring of the frequency reference circuit
Change the wiring
The motor rotates, but correct?
is incapable of speed Check the selected running
Has the operation mode been correctly set up?
changing. mode with an operator
Is the load too much? Reduce load
Are the rated values (number of poles, voltage) Check the technical data on the
right? nameplate of the motor
Is the acceleration/deceleration gear shifting ratio Checking the shifting gears (like
The rotation speed of the gear wheel right? the gear wheel and so on)
(rpm/min) of the motor Has the maximum output frequency been correctly Check the set value of the
is too high or too low. set up? maximum output frequency
Check the voltage between the terminals of the
Check the V/F characteristic
motor with a rectifier-type voltmeter. Is there too
value
much voltage drop?
Is the load too much? Reduce load
Reduce load change, increase
The rotation speed of Is the change of load too much? the motor capacity of the
the running motor is frequency inverter
unsteady What about the power supply. Is it a 3-phase or a Check the wiring of the 3-phase
single-phase one? If it is a 3-phase one, is there any power supply for possible phase
phase loss? loss.
209
Appendix 1 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Methods

Period Inspection Measuring
Inspection Items for method instrument
Description Criteria
location inspection Daily Yearly Biennial
Is there any See the Temperature: Thermometer,
dust? precautions -10~+40℃; no hygrometer
Are the ambient dust; humidity: and a recorder
Surroundings √
temperature and below 90% and
humidity no dew
appropriate? formation
Is there any Look, see No
Exterior abnormal abnormality
Equipment √
vibration or
noise?
Is the input Measure the Digital AVO
voltage of the voltage meter/ tester
Input voltage main circuit √ between the
normal? terminals R,
S and T
Megger Disconnect Over 5 MΩ DC
examination (of the frequency and fault free 500V-type
the resistance inverter, megger
between the Short-circuit
main circuit and the terminals
earth) for any R,S,T,U,V,W
The entire loosened parts. and measure
√
operating site Overheat on any the resistance
parts? between them
Clean? and the earth.
Tighten the
bolts
Check with
naked eyes
Conductor Check with No fault
Conductor
rusty? Wire √ naked eyes
wiring
sheath damaged?
Any damage? Check with No Fault
Terminals √
Main naked eyes
Circuit Check the Disconnect Digital AVO
impedance the frequency meter / analog
between inverter, and measuring
terminals measure with meter
a tester the
resistance
IGBT module
√ between the
/ diode
group of R,
S, T<-> +, -
and the group
of U, V, W
<-> +, -
respectively
Megohmmeter Release Exceed 5MΩ 500V type
inspection connection of megohmmeter
Insulation (between output U, V and W
√
resistance terminal and and fasten
grounding motor wire
terminal)
210
Inspecti Period Inspection Measuring

Items for
on Description method Criteria instrument
inspection Daily Yearly Biennial
location
Is there any liquid Check with No fault Devices for
seepage? Is the naked eyes exceeds 85% measuring
Filter safety hole Measure with of the rated capacitance
√ √
capacitor bulging out? capacitance capacity
Is the capacitor meters
bulging out?
Any wobbling Listen No fault
noise during Check with
Main Relay operation? Any √ naked eyes.
Circuit damage to the
contacts?
Whether Visual There is no Digital
resistance inspection fault multimeter/sim
insulation is Disconnect one Error must be ulation test
Resistance damaged √ and measure it within ±10% instrument
Whether resistor with test of resistance
wire is damaged instrument. value
(open circuit)
Is the output Measure the For Digital AVO
voltage balanced voltage among 200V(400) meter/
Protecti
for all the phases? terminals U, V model, the calibrating
on
After executing and W Short difference in voltmeter
circuit Operation
sequential √ circuit and open the voltage of
and check
protection, there frequency each phase
control
should be no fault inverter should not
circuit
in the display protection exceed
circuit circuit output 4V(8V)
Any abnormal Turn the Rotation
vibration or noise? √ tightening smooth and
Any loosened connection of no fault
Cooling
Cooling fan connections? √ the fan after
system
switching off
the power
supply
Is the displayed Check the Check the set Voltmeter/
value correct? reading of the values ammeter
Display Meter √ √
meter outside
the panel
The entire Any abnormal Check with No fault
operating vibration or noise? your ears, nose,
site Any abnormal and eyes;
Motor √
smells? Check for
overheat or
damage
Note: the values in brackets apply to 400V-type frequency inverters.
211
Appendix 2 Guideline for Option of Optional parts

Users of this series product can choose to install additional peripherals in accordance with the operating
conditions and needs.
A2.1 Alternative Current Reactor (ACL)
Alternative current reactor can be used to suppress the high-order harmonic of the input current from the
frequency inverter, thus improve its power factors. It is recommended for the following situations:
1 The ratio of the capacity of the power source to that of the frequency inverter exceeds 10:1.
2 Silicon controlled load or power factor compensation devices with switch control is wired to the same power
supply.
3 The 3-phase power has a high degree of voltage unbalance. (≥3%)
Table of Matching Alternating Current Reactors:
S2/T2 Series
Inductance Inductance
Power (kW) Current (A) Power (kW) Current (A)
(mH) (mH)
0.4 2.0 4.6 2.2 10 1.0
0.75 4.0 2.4 3.7 16 0.6
1.5 7.0 1.6
T4 Series
(mH) (mH)
0.75 2.3 7.6 93 176 0.11
1.5 3.7 4.8 110 210 0.09
2.2 5.0 3.2 132 253 0.08
3.7 8.8 2.0 160 300 0.06
5.5 13 1.5 185 340 0.06
7.5 17 1.2 200 380 0.05
11 25 0.8 220 420 0.05
15 32 0.6 250 480 0.04
18.5 37 0.5 280 540 0.04
22 45 0.42 315 600 0.03
30 60 0.32 355 680 0.03
37 75 0.26 375 710 0.03
45 90 0.21 400 750 0.03
55 110 0.18 500 930 0.02
75 152 0.13 630 1200 0.02
T6 Series
(mH) (mH)
22 28 0.47 55 68 0.23
30 38 0.35 75 92 0.18
37 46 0.28 93 110 0.15
45 56 0.28 110 132 0.12
132 155 0.094 315 345 0.042
160 180 0.07 355 390 0.036
185 210 0.07 400 430 0.028
220 245 0.055 500 540 0.023
250 275 0.048 600 630 0.021
280 305 0.042 700 720 0.019
212
A2.2 DC reactor
When the capacity of the power grid far exceeds that of the frequency inverter or when the power capacity is
beyond 1000KVA, or when the user expects greatly improved power factor of the power supply, direct current
reactors will be necessary. Direct current reactors can be used simultaneously with alternating current reactors,
which is effective in reducing higher-order harmonic input.
Table of Matching Direct Current Reactors:

T4 Series
Power Current μHInductance Power Current Inductance
KW A μH KW A μH
18.5～30 75 600 110～132 280 140
37～55 150 300 160～185 370 110
75～90 220 200
T6 系列
22～55 75 600 75～110 150 300
A2.3 Radio noise filter
Radio noise filters are used to restrain the transmission of electromagnetic interfering noises generated by the
frequency inverter. They can also be used to restrain interference with the motor from external radio,
instantaneous impact and surges.
Table of matching 3-phase 3-wire Radio Noise Filters:
Key filter parameters

Voltage Motor power Voltage Motor power
Filter model Common-mode input loss dB Derivation-mode input loss dB
(V) (kW) (V) (kW)
0.1MHz 1MHz 30MHz 0.1MHz 1MHz 30MHz
0.4～0.75 0.75～1.5 DL-5EBT1 75 85 55 55 80 60
1.5～2.2 2.2～3.7 DL-10EBT1 70 85 55 45 80 60
3.7 5.5～7.5 DL-20EBT1 70 85 55 45 80 60
5.5～7.5 11～15 DL-35EBT1 70 85 50 40 80 60
220 11 380 18.5～22 DL-50EBT1 65 85 50 40 80 50
15～18.5 30～37 DL-80EBT1 50 75 45 60 80 50
22 45 DL-100EBK1 50 70 50 60 80 50
30 55～75 DL-150EBK1 50 70 50 60 70 50
0.4～0.75 93～110 DL-150EBK1 50 70 60 60 70 50
In situations requiring stronger anti-radio interference capability or conformity to CE, UL, or CSA standards, or
when there are devices with poor anti-interference capabilities in the vicinity, filters should be installed. While
installing, make sure the wiring is as short as possible, that is, the filter should be as close to the frequency
inverter as possible.
A2.4 Remote Operation Keyboard
Our series frequency inverters have all been equipped with operation keyboards, exquisitely designed and easily
operated. If you wish to use it away from the frequency inverter or other places, an extended cable would serve
the purpose. You just need to demand it when you place an order. Since the serial communication mode is
employed to link the keyboard and the frame, you can remove the keyboard to work area as far as 10 meters away.
Or if you want to or need to work father away, then you can buy a remote operation keyboard from the suppliers
concerned, or from our company.
213
A2.5 Energy Consumption Brake Unit and Brake Resistance
All E100 Series and E102 Series frequency inverters are equipped with built-in brake unit, if the brake torque is
required to be increased, it is to directly connect the brake resistance. CDI-E180 Series frequency inverters with
power 15kW and below are equipped with built-in brake unit. The types with power 18.5～30kW are not
equipped with built-in brake unit, if the brake torque is required to be increased, it is required to externally
connect brake resistance. The built-in brake unit is not equipped on the inverters above 30 Kw, if the brake torque
is required to be increased, it is required to externally connect brake unit and brake resistance.
The formula for simple calculation for brake unit and brake resistance is as below:
Generally, the brake current is 1/2 I of the rated current of the motor, the generated brake torque is approximately
equal to the rate torque of the motor. Therefore, proper brake current IB shall be selected based on requirements of
load inertia and shutdown time. The greater the load inertia is, the shorter the shutdown time requires and the
greater the selected brake current IB is.
IB = (1/2~3/2)*I
According to brake current, the value of resistance to brake unit and brake resistance can be selected.
The peak current of the brake unit (only aim at brake unit of Delixi) is larger than IB.
Size of Brake Resistance Value
RB=U/IB (in S2 and T2 Series, U takes 400V; in T4 Series, U takes800V)
Size of Brake Resistance Power

PB=K*U*U/RB
In formula, K indicates braking coefficient with range of 0.1~0.5, and the braking coefficient shall be selected
based on requirements of load inertia and shutdown time. The greater the load inertia is, the shorter the shutdown
time requires and the greater the selected braking coefficient K is. General load can select 0.1~0.2 and the large
load inertia selects 0.5.
The following sizing table is available when ID is approximately equal to 1/2I and K is between 0.1~0.2. The
greater the load inertia is, the shorter the shutdown time requires, and proper adjustment shall be made according
to the formula above.
214
1. E100 、E102 Series

Brake Resistance Brake Resistance
Type of Frequency inverter Type of Brake Unit Value Power
(Ω) (W)
S2 (Single Phase 220V)
CDI-E100G0R4S2B Built-in, allowable Max. Current 8A 400 80
CDI-E100G0R75S2B Built-in, allowable Max. Current 8A 200 160
Built-in, allowable Max. Current
CDI-E100G1R5S2B 120 250
15A
CDI-E100G2R2S2B 80 400
15A
CDI-E100G0R4T2B Built-in, allowable Max. Current 8A 400 80
CDI-E100G1R5T2B 120 250
15A
CDI-E100G2R2T2B 80 400
25A
CDI-E100G2R2T4B 250 400
15A
CDI-E100G3R7T4B 150 600
15A
CDI-E100G5R5/P7R5T4B 100 1000
40A
CDI-E100G7R5/P011T4B 75 1200
40A
CDI-E100G011/P015T4BL 50 2000
50A
CDI-E100G015/P018.5T4BL 40 2500
75A
CDI-E100G018.5/P022T4 30 4000
75A
CDI-E100G022/P030T4 30 4000
75A
CDI-E100G030/P037T4 20 6000
75A
CDI-E100G037/P045T4 16 9000
75A
CDI-E100G045/P055T4 13.6 9000
100A
CDI-E100G055/P075T4 20/2 12000
100A
CDI-E100G075/P093T4 13.6/2 18000
200A
CDI-E100G093/P110T4 20/3 18000
200A
CDI-E100G110/P132T4 20/3 18000
200A
CDI-E100G132/P160T4 CDI-BR-200 20/4 24000
CDI-E100G160/P185T4 CDI-BR-400 13.6/4 36000
CDI-E100G185/P200T4 CDI-BR-400 13.6/5 45000
CDI-E100G200/P220T4L CDI-BR-400 13.6/5 45000
CDI-E100G220T4L CDI-BR-400 13.6/6 54000
CDI-E100P250T4L CDI-BR-400 13.6/6 54000
215
Brake Resistance Brake Resistance
Type of Frequency inverter Type of Brake Unit Value Power
(Ω) (W)
CDI-E100G250/P280T4L CDI-BR-400 13.6/6 54000
CDI-E100G280/P315T4L CDI-BR-400 13.6/6 54000
CDI-E100G315/P355T4L CDI-BR-400 13.6/6 54000
CDI-E100G355/P375T4L CDI-BR-600 13.6/7 63000
CDI-E100G375T4L CDI-BR-600 13.6/7 63000
CDI-E100P400T4L CDI-BR-600 13.6/8 72000
CDI-E100G400T4L CDI-BR-600 13.6/8 72000
CDI-E100P500T4L CDI-BR-600 13.6/9 81000
CDI-E100G500T4L CDI-BR-600 13.6/9 81000
CDI-E100G630T4L 2*CDI-BR-400 13.6/10 90000
Note: The brake components of E102 series inverter types are same as those of E100 series inverter.
2. E180 Series
Brake Brake
Resistance Resistance
Type of Frequency inverter Type of Brake Unit
Value Power
(Ω) (W)
CDI-E180G7R5T2BL Built-in, allowable Max. Current 75A 20 1200
Built-in, allowable Max. Current 50A
CDI-E180G011T2 16 2000
Externally-connect CDI-BR-50
CDI-E180G015T2 12 2500
CDI-E180G018.5T2 CDI-BR-100 20/2 4000
CDI-E180G022T2 CDI-BR-100 16/2 4000
CDI-E180G030T2 CDI-BR-100 13.6/2 6000
CDI-E180G3R7/P5R5T4B Built-in, allowable Max. Current 25A 150 600
CDI-E180G5R5MT4B Built-in, allowable Max. Current 40A 100 1000
CDI-E180G5R5/P7R5T4B Built-in, allowable Max. Current 40A 100 1000
CDI-E180G7R5/P011T4B Built-in, allowable Max. Current 40A 75 1200
CDI-E180G011MT4B Built-in, allowable Max. Current 50A 50 2000
CDI-E180G011/P015T4BL Built-in, allowable Max. Current 50A 50 2000
CDI-E180G015/P018.5T4BL Built-in, allowable Max. Current 75A 40 2500
CDI-E180G018.5/P022T4 30 4000
CDI-E180G022/P030T4 30 4000
CDI-E180G030/P037T4 20 6000
CDI-E180G037/P045T4 CDI-BR-100 16 9000
CDI-E180G045/P055T4 CDI-BR-100 13.6 9000
CDI-E180G055/P075T4 CDI-BR-100 20/2 12000
CDI-E180G075/P093T4 CDI-BR-200 13.6/2 18000
CDI-E180G093/P110T4 CDI-BR-200 20/3 18000
CDI-E180G110/P132T4 CDI-BR-200 20/3 18000
216
Brake Brake
Resistance Resistance
Type of Frequency inverter Type of Brake Unit
Value Power
(Ω) (W)
CDI-E180G132/P160T4 CDI-BR-200 20/4 24000
CDI-E180G160/P185T4 CDI-BR-400 13.6/4 36000
CDI-E180G185/P200T4 CDI-BR-400 13.6/5 45000
CDI-E180G200/P220T4L CDI-BR-400 13.6/5 45000
CDI-E180G220T4L CDI-BR-400 13.6/6 54000
CDI-E180P250T4L CDI-BR-400 13.6/6 54000
CDI-E180G250/P280T4L CDI-BR-400 13.6/6 54000
CDI-E180G280/P315T4L CDI-BR-400 13.6/6 54000
CDI-E180G315/P355T4L CDI-BR-400 13.6/6 54000
CDI-E180G355/P375T4L CDI-BR-600 13.6/7 63000
CDI-E180G375T4L CDI-BR-600 13.6/7 63000
CDI-E180P400T4L CDI-BR-600 13.6/8 72000
CDI-E180G400T4L CDI-BR-600 13.6/8 72000
CDI-E180P500T4L CDI-BR-600 13.6/9 81000
CDI-E180G500T4L CDI-BR-600 13.6/9 81000
CDI-E180G630T4L 2*CDI-BR-400 13.6/10 90000
Note: 13.6/2 means two resistances of 13.6 used in parallel connection;
2*CDI-BR-400 means two CDI-BR-400 brake units used in parallel connection, in this case, the brake resistance
will be assigned to two brake units equally, otherwise the brake units will be damaged.
217
Appendix 3 E180 I/O Expansion Card

1. Introduction
Expansion Card E180-IO is developed by Delixi (Hangzhou) Inverter Co., Ltd and is applied for CDI-E180 Series
Terminal I/O. It is devided into: E180-IO1 and E180-IO2. Its specific configuration is as below:
Spec. Function name Description

4-way Digital Input (DI7~DI10)
1-way Analog Input (VF3)
E180-IO1 E180-IO1 Expansion Card
2-way Multi-functional Open Collector Output (YO1、YO2)
RS-485 Communication Interface (SG+,SG-)
4-way Digital Input (DI7~DI10)
E180-IO2 E180-IO2 Expansion Card 1-way Analog Input (VF3)
2-way Multi-functional Open Collector Output (YO1、YO2)
2. Mechanical Installation
The frequency inverter shall be installed when it switched off completely.
Align IO expansion card with expansion card interface and positioning hole on the control panel of the frequency
inverter and then fix them with screws.
IO
Expansion
Card
Installation Method of IO E180-IO1 Appearance E180-IO2 Appearance

Expansion Card
218
3. Description for Control Terminal
Category Terminal Name of Terminal Explanation for Function

DI7-COM Digital Input 7 Specific functions refer to explanation
DI8-COM Digital Input 8 for use of Function Code
Digital Input Terminal DI9-COM Digital Input 9 P2.0.06~P2.0.09
Note: Only internal power supply is
DI10-COM Digital Input 10
applicable
YO1 Multi-functional Open Specific functions refer to explanation
Multi-functional Output CME Collector Output 1 for use of Function Code
Terminal YO2 2 Multi-functional Open P2.0.08~P2.0.31
CME Collector Output 2 Drive Capability: DC48V 50mA below
Be used for receiving external analog
Analog Input Terminal VF3-GND Analog Input Terminal 3 signal input, which is voltage signal
0V~10V or current signal 0/4mA~20mA
COM Externally provide DC 24V Supply
Voltage, which is generally used for
digital input terminal or working power
24V Power Supply 24V Power Supply Output
P24 supply of external low-voltage devices.
Drive Capability: Max. Output Current
300mA
Positive Signal Terminal of
SG+
Communication RS485 Communication
Support MODBUS-RTU Protocol
Terminal Negative Signal Terminal of
SG-
RS485 Communication
Note: if Terminal VF3 is adopted, it is to short J9 on IO expansion card. At this moment, the function of
keyboard potentiometer will be replaced by the function of Terminal VF3.
219
Appendix 4 E180 Encoder Expansion Card

1. Introduction
CDI-E180 Series can realize Closed-loop Vector Control against different load motor, which is required to
different encoder. Accordingly, there are many various expansion cards of the encoder with specific types as
below:
Type Name Description

Support A, B, Z differential input without frequency
division output
E180-PG1 E180 Encoder Expansion Card 1
Max.Speed:100kHz
Differential Input Signal Amplitude: ≤7V
Support A, B, Z, U, V, W differential input without
frequency division output
Max.Speed:100kHz
Differential Input Signal Amplitude: ≤7V
Support A, B, Z open collector input
Max speed: 100kHz
Support Rotary Transformer
E180 Rotary Transformer 10kHz 7VRMS excitation output
E180-PG4
Expansion Card 4 12-digit resolution
Without frequency division output

Align expansion card with expansion card interface and positioning hole on the control panel of the frequency
inverter and then fix them with screws.
PG Card
Installation method of PG
Expansion Card
220
Appearance of E180-PG1 Appearance of E180-PG2 Appearance of E180-PG3 Appearance of E180-PG4
3. Definition Description of Connection Terminal Signal

Definition for E180-PG1 Connection Terminal Signal
Name of Terminal Description
A+ Positive Encoder A Signal
A- Negative Encoder A Signal
B+ Positive Encoder B Signal
B- Negative Encoder B Signal
Z+ Positive Encoder Z Signal
Z- Negative Encoder Z Signal
5V Externally provide Power 5V and Max. output current is 100mA
COM Power Ground

A+ Positive Encoder A Signal
A- Negative Encoder A Signal
B+ Positive Encoder B Signal
B- Negative Encoder B Signal
Z+ Positive Encoder Z Signal
Z- Negative Encoder Z Signal
U+ Positive Encoder U Signal
U- Negative Encoder U Signal
V+ Positive Encoder V Signal
V- Negative Encoder V Signal
W+ Positive Encoder W Signal
W- Negative Encoder W Signal
COM Power Ground

A Encoder A signal
B Encoder B signal
Z Encoder Z signal
COM Power Ground

EXC+ Rotary transformer excitation positive (+)
EXC- Rotary transformer excitation negative (-)
SIN+ Rotary transformer feedback SIN positive (+)
SIN- Rotary transformer feedback SIN negative (-)
COS+ Rotary transformer feedback COS positive (+)
COS- Rotary transformer feedback COS negative (-)
221
Appendix 5 Expansion Card of RS485 Communication
Appendix 5 Expansion Card of RS485 Communication

1. Introduction
For CDI-E180 Series not configured with communication function, if communication required, the expansion card
for communication needs to be added. Specific types are as below:

SG+: Positive Signal Terminal of RS485
Communication
E180 Communication Expansion
E180-485 SG-: Negative Signal Terminal of RS485
Card
Communication
Support MODBUS-RTU Protocol
Align RS485 Communication with expansion card interface and positioning hole on the control panel of the
frequency inverter and then fix them with screws.
E180-485 Installation Method
Appearance of E180-485
222
Appendix 6 Expansion Card of E180 Injection Molding Machine
Appendix 6 Expansion Card of E180 Injection Molding Machine

1. Introduction
E180-ZS Expansion Card is developed by Delixi (Hangzhou) Inverter Co., Ltd and applied for CDI-E180 Series
Terminal ZS, its specific configuration is as below:

2-way Digital Input Terminal (DI7~DI8)
Refer to Description for use of specific functions of Function Code
P2.0.06~P2.0.07
Note: Only internal power supply is applicable
E180 Expansion 2-way Analog Input Terminal （G1-S1, G2-S2）
Card of Injection G1:Connect proportional flow signal negative S1:Connect proportional
E180-ZS
Molding flow signal positive
Machine G2:Connect proportional voltage signal negative S2:Connect proportional
voltage signal positive
Note: proportional flow and proportional voltage signal are DC Current
Signal 0~1A, and corrective wiring shall be made according to the flow
of circuit current
Align Expansion Card E180-ZS with expansion card interface and positioning hole on the control panel of the
frequency inverter and then fix them with screws.
E180-ZS Installation Method Appearance of E180-ZS
223
Appendix 7 E180-DP Expansion Card

1. Introduction
E180-DP Expansion Card is developed by Delixi (Hangzhou) Inverter Co., Ltd. and used for E180 Series inverters
and realizing PROFIBUS communication to PROFIBUS-DP master station.
Description: The E180-DP card is only supported by the E180 series inverter with the model number
including DP and the power above 3.7kW, the user shall pay special attention to the requirement. For
example: CDI-E180G3R7/P5R5T4B(DP).
2. Installation
Please cut off power supply of inverter before installation of E180-DP expansion card, so as to ensure the
installation can be conducted only when LED indicator of power charing of inverter is black out completely. See
the below figure for detailed installation method. Please fasten the relevant screws after the E180-DP is inserted
into inverter.
Installation schematic Appearance of Outer cable of

diagram of E180-DP E180-DP card E180-DP card
3. Parameter setting of inverter

Function
Name Setting range Description
Code
Tens: control PROFIBUS When PROFIBUS communication is adopted, you
communication can select baud rate same as inverter through the
Baud rate of 0: 115200 1st and 2nd digit of DIP switch of E180-DP.
P4.1.00
inverter 1: 208300
2: 256000
3: 512000
P4.1.02 Local IP address 1-126
Tens: control PROFIBUS The data format shall be same as the format
communication selected by PROFIBUS master station
Data transmission 0: PPO1
P4.1.05
format 1: PP02
2: PP03
3: PP05
224
4. Definition and description of connection terminal signal

DIP No. Function Description
The 1st digit The 2nd digit Baud rate
E180-DP card and OFF OFF 115200
1 ，2 inverter communication OFF ON 208300
baud rate selection ON OFF 256000
ON ON 512000
Total 64 addresses are comprised of 6-digit binary system, and
for the addresses over 64 can be set up through function code.
Address of E180-DP The examples of DIP switich setting amd corresponding address
3～8 communication slave are as follows:
station Setting of DIP switch Address
000001 1
011110 30
Wire jumper
Description of function
No.
J1 Selection of matched resistor for PROFIBUS terminal
5. Description of 9-pin standard interface of outer cable
Data cable B
Data cable A
Syboml Name of terminal Function description

3 Data cable B Positive pole (+) of data cable
4 RTS Request transferring signal
5 GND Insulation 5V power supply grounding
6 +5V Insulation 5V power supply
8 Data cable A Negative pole (-) of data cable
225
6. LED indicator
LED indicator Name Description
LED indicator for power The indicator shall be constant ON, after E180-DP card
LED1 (red)
supply connects to inverter properly and inverter is electrified.
After E180-DP card connects to inverter properly, the
LED indicator for
indicator shall be constant ON, if flicker, means improper
LED2 (green) communication established
connection (on-again & off-again), if black-out, means failure
between PROFIBUS master
connection to PROFIBUS station (check slave station address,
station and E180-DP card
data format and programming cable).
LED indicator for After E180-DP card connects to inverter properly, the
communication established indicator shall be constant ON, if flicker, means improper
LED3 (yellow)
between inverter and connection (on-again & off-again), if black-out, means failure
E180-DP card connection to inverter (check baud rate).
6. Description and solution to failure

LED1 LED2 LED3
Description of failure Corresponding solution
(red) (green) (yellow)
No power supply on Check whether the interface with inverter is connected
Black Black Black
E180-DP card properly?
No communication is Check whether the setup of PROFIBUS master station,

Bright Black Black established to PROFIBUS address of slave station and data format are correct; check
master station whether the connection of PROFIBUS cable is OK?
No communication
Bright Bright Black Check whether the baud rate of inverter is same as
established to inverter
E180-DP DIP switch?
Bright Bright Bright Communication established
226
Appendix 8 E180-WSP Expansion Card
Appendix 8 E180-WSP Expansion Card

1. Main features
1. The E180-WSP Expansion Card for constant pressure water supply is able to realize automatic control of 4
main pumps + 1 sub-pump.
2. The keyboard (E180 general type) is used for function parameters setting with 5-digit digital tube display for
convenient operation and commission.
3. The active pumps can be set as adjustable pump and non-adjustable pump (standby adjustable pump and
standby non-adjustable pump) through function parameters setting, and the pumps can be arranged on demands to
satisfy various complicated water supply system or fire protection system.
4. The function of timed pump-changing function is added in order to balance working time among each pump
and extend average lifetime of water pump.
5. Fire-protection pump polling function can carry out polling for the fire-protection pump under the mode of
fire protection according to the set time, so as to prevent corrosion of fire-protection pump.
6. Total 8 time intervals pressure control are available in the product, and pressure value and timing ON/OFF
setting function can be done within each time interval as desired.
7. The function of dormancy and sub-pump is able to realize energy-saving and extend the lifetime of machine.
8. Add function of second-target pressure and setting via external terminal input.
9. The function of Automatic Transfer Switching is equipped, i.e. the standby pump can automatically work
while main pump has failure.
10. PI adjustment has function of positive and negative feedback selection, which can be used for both water
supply and water pumping for water level maintaining.
11. Provide alarm function for over-pressure, lose-control pressure and inverter failure etc.
12. Once the inverter has failure, it is possible to select “shift to working frequency operation automically
(pressure section control)”
13. Be equipped with function of automatic failure reset with adjustable delay.
14. Be able to record 5 records of latest failure type and time in max.
2. Installation
Please cut off power supply of inverter before installation of E180-WSP expansion card, so as to ensure the
installation can be conducted only when LED indicator of power charing of inverter is black out completely. See
the below figure for detailed installation method. Please fasten the relevant screws after the E180-WSP is inserted
into inverter. (Note: only the models 5.5 kW and above support E180-WSP card)
Installation method Appearance of E180-WSP card
227
CM1 B1 D1 B2 D2 B3 D3 B4 D4 XB
Connection terminal of E180-WSP expansion card

Name Description
CM1 Public terminal of pump output relay
B1 Variable frequency pump control point of pump No. 1
D1 Working frequency pump control point of pump No. 1
XB Control point of sub-pump (water supply pump)
228

DELIXI E Series User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DELIXI E Series User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DELIXI E Series User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

To Users

People should not reprint,

Chapter 1 Safety Operation and Notices

1.1 Examination and Acceptance

1.2 Precautions for safe operation:

1.3 Safety mark of frequency converter:

Chapter 2 Product Information

Nameplate data: for example CDI-E180G011/P015T4BL:

CDI E180 G011/P015 T4 B L

Product Series No.

Product Type No: No Built-in Brake Unit

P: Light load type

2.2 Technical Specifications

Two E102 Series

(2) Type configuration

Three. E180 Series

(2) Type configuration

Note: the dimension of E102 is same as E100 series

Note: the dimension of E102 is same as E100

Note: the dimension of E102 is same as E100 series

Note: the dimension of E102 is same as E100 series

(2) E180 Series

2.5 Routine maintenance

(4) Storage of frequency inverter

Chapter 3 Installation and Connection of Frequency inverter

Option of the installation space:

Installation space of E frequency inverters

3.2 Wiring of the Peripherals and Optional parts

Radio Noise Filter Be used for reducing radio noise filter

When the brake torque is unable to meet

3.3 Wiring of the main circuit

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 1、2 of Machine Type E100、E102.

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 3 of Machine Type E100、E102

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 4 of Machine Type E100、E102

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 6、7 of Machine Type E100、E102

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 8 of Machine Type E100、E102

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 9 of Machine Type E100、E102

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 10 of Machine Type E100、E102

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 1 of Machine Type E180

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 2、3 of Machine Type E180

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 4 of Machine Type E180

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 6 of Machine Type E180

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 7、8 of Machine Type E180

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 9、12 of Machine Type E180

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 10、13 of Machine Type E180

Wiring Diagram of Main Circuit of Model 11 of Machine Type E180

3.3.4 Wiring and Supporting Peripherals for Main Circuits

(2) E180 Series

3.4 Connection of control circuit

Circuit Breaker Three-phase

FM2 Analog Signal

Common Terminal （Digital Signal FMP(P2.1.20=0)

（Analog Signal Ground）

（Analog Signal Input 1）

VF2（Analog Signal Input 2） Digital signal power

(standard configuration for 15 kW and

The default is to use P24V

GND（Analog Signal Ground ） T2A

Category Terminal Name of Terminal Description of Function

3.4.3 Wiring Instruction for Control Circuit

Installation dimension of Keyboard Booth:9759mm Outer dimesion of Keyboard Booth: 10567mm

Installation dimension of Keyboard Booth:9759mm Outer dimesion of Keyboard Booth: 10567mm

Installation dimension of Keyboard Booth:13672mm Outer dimesion of Keyboard Booth: 14278mm